FundSweep

Tag It, Track It

This feature allows users to quickly add tags to their expenses as they input their financial data. By providing suggested tags based on their past entries, users can efficiently categorize expenses, making their financial tracking more organized and intuitive.

Requirements

Dynamic Tag Suggestions

"As a small business owner, I want the system to suggest tags based on my past expense entries so that I can quickly categorize my expenses without wasting time manually entering tags."

Description

The 'Dynamic Tag Suggestions' requirement enables the system to analyze users' historical expense entries and offer personalized tagging suggestions when they input new expenses. This functionality will enhance user experience by reducing the time spent categorizing expenses through an intelligent suggestion mechanism. The suggested tags will be contextually relevant based on previous user activity, facilitating more organized and intuitive financial tracking. This integration will also improve data consistency and accuracy, ensuring that users can retrieve and analyze their financial data with ease and confidence. Effective implementation of this feature will lead to enhanced user engagement and satisfaction, ultimately contributing to better financial management outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

User inputs a new expense and the system suggests relevant tags based on previous entries.

Given a user has entered multiple expense records in the past, when they enter a new expense, then the system should display at least three relevant tag suggestions based on their historical data.

User selects a suggested tag for an expense entry and saves it.

Given the user has selected a suggested tag, when they save the expense entry, then the selected tag should be accurately applied to the new entry and reflected in the expense report.

User views their expense report to check the effectiveness of tagging.

Given the user has applied tags to various expenses, when they view their expense report, then each expense should display the correct tags, and the report should allow filtering based on those tags.

User attempts to input an expense without selecting a suggested tag.

Given the user has input an expense without selecting a suggested tag, when they attempt to save the entry, then the system should prompt them to either select a tag or provide an option to save without tagging.

User wants to delete a tag from a previously entered expense.

Given a user has applied tags to an expense, when they choose to delete a tag, then the tag should be removed from the expense, and this change should be reflected in the expense report immediately.

User accesses the tagging feature for the first time.

Given a new user is accessing the tagging feature, when they input their first expense, then the system should provide a tutorial or tooltip explaining how to use tag suggestions and apply tags effectively.

User tests the accuracy of tag suggestions after updating their expense categories.

Given the user has changed their expense categorization settings, when they input a new expense, then the suggested tags should reflect the updated categories relevant to their recent entries.

Batch Tagging Functionality

"As a freelancer, I want to tag multiple expenses at once so that I can save time managing my financial data instead of tagging each expense individually."

Description

The 'Batch Tagging Functionality' requirement allows users to select multiple transactions and apply tags in bulk. This functionality addresses the need for efficiency, allowing users to categorize similar transactions simultaneously rather than one-by-one. It streamlines the process of expense management, significantly reducing the time required for tagging and organizing financial data. Users will benefit from greater control and flexibility in their expense categorization, which leads to more accurate data tracking across multiple entries. An intuitive interface for batch tagging will be crucial to ensure ease of use and user satisfaction, enhancing overall product usability.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects multiple transactions for batch tagging to streamline expense categorization.

Given I am on the transaction overview page, When I select multiple transactions and click on the 'Tag' button, Then I should be prompted to assign tags to all selected transactions.

User receives tag suggestions based on previous entries during batch tagging.

Given I have previously tagged transactions, When I select multiple transactions to tag, Then I should see tag suggestions that match my past entries.

User successfully applies a single tag to multiple transactions at once.

Given I have selected multiple transactions and specified a single tag, When I confirm the tagging, Then all selected transactions should display the new tag in their details immediately.

User can untag transactions after batch tagging.

Given I have tagged multiple transactions, When I select the transactions and choose the 'Remove Tag' option, Then the specified tags should be removed from all selected transactions.

System displays a confirmation message after successful batch tagging.

Given I have applied tags to multiple transactions, When the tagging process is complete, Then I should see a confirmation message indicating the number of transactions tagged successfully.

Users can filter transactions based on applied tags after batch tagging.

Given I have tagged multiple transactions, When I use the filter option to view transactions by tag, Then only transactions with the selected tag should be displayed in the overview.

Custom Tag Creation

"As an independent contractor, I want to create my own tags for expenses so that I can track my financial transactions in a way that fits my specific business needs."

Description

The 'Custom Tag Creation' requirement permits users to create personalized tags beyond the predefined options. This functionality empowers users to adapt the tagging system according to their unique financial tracking needs, fostering a more tailored experience. Custom tags can enhance the granularity of financial data, allowing users to categorize expenses in a way that makes sense for their particular business or personal preferences. This flexibility is essential for users who may operate in diverse industries or require specific tracking for particular projects. The implementation of this feature will involve a user-friendly interface for creating and managing custom tags, ensuring that users can utilize it effortlessly.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a custom tag for an expense to classify it more accurately based on their specific business needs.

Given a user is on the expense entry page, when the user selects 'Add Custom Tag', then the system should allow the user to enter a new tag name and save it without errors.

User attempts to create a custom tag with an invalid name (e.g., empty or duplicate tag).

Given a user is on the custom tag creation interface, when the user submits a tag with invalid criteria, then the system should display an appropriate error message and prevent tag creation.

User edits an existing custom tag to change its name or delete it.

Given a user has created custom tags, when the user chooses a custom tag and selects 'Edit', then the system should allow the user to modify the tag and save the changes successfully.

User views a list of all created custom tags to manage their expense categorization.

Given a user has created custom tags, when the user navigates to the 'Manage Custom Tags' section, then the system should display all existing custom tags along with options to edit or delete them.

User applies custom tags to multiple expenses at once for efficient categorization.

Given a user is in the expense management section, when the user selects multiple expenses and chooses a custom tag to apply, then the system should update all selected expenses with the chosen custom tag successfully.

User receives suggestions for custom tags based on previous entries while creating a new expense.

Given a user is about to enter a new expense, when the user begins typing a tag, then the system should suggest relevant custom tags based on the user's history.

Tag Filtering Options

"As a small business owner, I want to filter my expenses by tags so that I can easily see where my money is going without having to sift through all transactions."

Description

The 'Tag Filtering Options' requirement will provide users with the ability to filter expenses displayed on the dashboard based on selected tags. This will allow users to quickly review and analyze their spending patterns by focusing on specific expense categories. The filtering functionality will enable users to gain insights into their financial habits and make informed decisions based on organized data. By implementing easy-to-use filter settings within the dashboard, users can customize their financial overview, leading to better budgeting and effective tracking of financial goals. This feature will significantly enhance the analytical capabilities of the platform, proving essential for proactive financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to filter expenses by specific tags to analyze spending patterns over the last month.

Given that the user is on the dashboard, when the user selects multiple tags and clicks 'Apply Filters', then only expenses associated with the selected tags should display, and the total amount spent should be updated accordingly.

User seeks to filter expenses to report on business-related spending for tax purposes.

Given that the user has tagged their expenses, when the user selects the 'Business' tag from the filtering options and clicks 'Apply Filters', then all expenses tagged as 'Business' should be shown on the dashboard, and other expenses should be hidden.

User wants to quickly revert to viewing all expenses after applying tag filters.

Given that the user has applied filters by tags on the dashboard, when the user clicks the 'Clear Filters' button, then all expenses, regardless of tags, should be restored and visible on the dashboard.

User wants to understand the impact of selected expense tags on overall budgeting.

Given that the user has selected one or more tags to filter expenses, when the user views the summary chart on the dashboard, then the chart should visually represent the filtered expenses and reflect changes to budget allocations based on those tags.

User wishes to save frequently used tag filter configurations for quicker access in future sessions.

Given that the user has selected a specific set of tags and applied the filter, when the user saves this configuration as a 'Default Filter', then the saved filter should be available in a dropdown menu for easy access in future sessions.

User wants to ensure that tags are consistently suggested based on previously used entries when filtering.

Given that the user starts typing in the tag filter input field, when the user types a tag, then the system should suggest tags that have been used previously by the user, allowing for consistent tagging and filtering.

Tag Management Interface

"As a freelancer, I want to easily manage my tags so that I can keep my expense categories relevant to my current business needs and avoid clutter."

Description

The 'Tag Management Interface' requirement facilitates users in efficiently managing their tags, including editing, deleting, and organizing tags in a user-friendly system. This feature is crucial as it allows users to maintain an updated and relevant tagging structure reflecting their current categorization needs. A well-designed management interface will help users navigate through their tags effortlessly, and modify or remove tags that are no longer useful while retaining those that benefit their financial tracking. This will enhance the overall user experience by ensuring that the tagging system remains intuitive and adaptable as users evolve in their financial practices.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Tag Management Interface to edit an existing tag name.

Given the user is on the Tag Management Interface, when the user selects a tag and enters a new name, then the tag should be successfully updated and reflected in the tag list without errors.

User wants to delete an unnecessary tag from the Tag Management Interface.

Given the user is on the Tag Management Interface, when the user selects a tag and confirms deletion, then the tag should be removed from the system and should no longer appear in the tagging options for expenses.

A user attempts to organize tags by creating a new category in the Tag Management Interface.

Given the user is on the Tag Management Interface, when they create a new category and assign existing tags to it, then the tags should appear grouped under the newly created category in the tag list.

User needs to filter tags based on specific criteria in the Tag Management Interface.

Given the user is on the Tag Management Interface, when the user applies a filter by tag type, then only the tags matching the filter criteria should be displayed in the list.

User accesses the Tag Management Interface and views the list of current tags for categorization.

Given the user is on the Tag Management Interface, when they open the page, then the interface should load within 2 seconds, displaying all current tags, and they should be sortable alphabetically or by usage frequency.

User wants to receive suggestions for tagging based on past entries in the Tag Management Interface.

Given the user is inputting an expense, when they begin to type a tag, then the system should provide at least three relevant tag suggestions based on their previous tagging history.

Tag Analytics Reporting

"As a small business owner, I want to generate reports on my expenses based on tags so that I can better understand my spending patterns and make more informed financial decisions."

Description

The 'Tag Analytics Reporting' requirement introduces a detailed report feature that allows users to analyze their spending based on tags over specified periods. Users will have the option to generate reports that break down expenses by tags, offering insights into spending trends and patterns. This functionality is vital for users looking to understand their financial behavior and make informed decisions regarding budgeting and expense management. The implementation will involve creating clear visual presentations of the analytics data, such as graphs and charts. Effective reporting will enhance user engagement with the platform, turning transactional data into actionable insights that contribute to strategic financial planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a Tag Analytics Report for the previous month to analyze spending on office supplies and travel expenses.

Given that the user has tagged expenses related to office supplies and travel, when the user selects the date range for the previous month and generates the report, then the report should display a breakdown of expenses by tag with total amounts for each category and a visual representation (e.g., pie chart or bar graph).

User visualizes spending trends using the Tag Analytics Report over a custom date range to identify spending patterns.

Given that the user specifies a custom date range for the report, when the user generates the report, then the analytics should reflect accurate totals of tagged expenses within that range, along with a line graph illustrating monthly spending trends for each tag.

User wants to filter the report data by specific tags to focus on particular spending categories.

Given that the user has multiple tags available, when the user selects one or more specific tags and generates the report, then the report should display only the expenses associated with the selected tags, along with corresponding totals and visual analytics.

User saves a generated Tag Analytics Report for later reference.

Given that the user has generated a Tag Analytics Report, when the user clicks the 'Save Report' option, then the system should successfully save the report in the user's account with a timestamp and a summary of the parameters used for report generation.

User shares the Tag Analytics Report with an external accountant via email.

Given that the user has generated a Tag Analytics Report, when the user selects the 'Share via Email' option and enters the accountant's email address, then the report should be successfully emailed in a PDF format to the specified address without errors.

User reviews the Tag Analytics Report and provides feedback on the report's usability and insights.

Given that the user has accessed the generated Tag Analytics Report, when the user completes a feedback form regarding the report’s clarity and usefulness, then the feedback should be successfully submitted and logged in the system for future improvements.

Intelligent Spend Analysis

Leveraging AI, this feature analyzes users' spending habits and provides insights on trends over time. Users can identify areas where they can cut back or need to allocate more funds, ultimately enabling better budget management and financial planning.

Requirements

Automated Spending Insights

"As a small business owner, I want automated insights into my spending habits so that I can identify areas to cut back and optimize my budget effectively."

Description

This requirement focuses on the development of an AI-driven module that automatically analyzes user transactions over time, categorizing spending habits into comprehensive reports. The generated insights will include suggested budget adjustments and a summary of spending trends to provide actionable advice for financial improvements. The module must integrate seamlessly with FundSweep’s existing financial data framework to ensure real-time updates and accuracy in the insights provided, empowering users to make informed budgeting decisions based on reliable data. Additionally, it should support multi-currency transactions to cater to the diverse user base of freelancers and small business owners who may deal with international clients.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the automated spending insights report after a month of using FundSweep.

Given the user has entered multiple transactions over the past month, when they access the automated spending insights report, then they should see categorically organized spending habits, along with at least three actionable recommendations for budget adjustments.

User receives spending trend notifications based on their transaction history.

Given the user has a regular transaction history, when the system analyzes their spending habits over three consecutive months, then the user should receive a notification summarizing key trends and fluctuations in their spending patterns.

User checks the multi-currency support functionality within spending insights.

Given the user has transactions in multiple currencies, when they view the automated spending insights report, then all amounts should be accurately converted to the user's preferred currency, reflecting real-time exchange rates.

User seeks to adjust budgeting based on automated insights.

Given the user views the spending insights, when they follow the recommendations provided, then their budget should automatically adjust in FundSweep, showing the new suggested allocations based on the insights received.

User requests a detailed breakdown of their spending categories.

Given the user has accessed the spending insights feature, when they select to view a breakdown, then they should receive a comprehensive report detailing their spending in each category, including visual graphs and comparison to previous periods.

User examines the accuracy of the automated spending insights module after several months of use.

Given the user has consistently entered all transactions, when they review the historical accuracy of the spending insights provided, then at least 90% of the automated recommendations should align with their actual spending adjustments made during that period.

Trend Visualization Dashboard

"As a freelancer, I want a dashboard that visually represents my spending trends so that I can quickly identify patterns and make better financial decisions."

Description

This requirement entails the creation of a user-friendly dashboard feature that visualizes spending trends over various time periods (daily, weekly, monthly). Users will be able to view graphs and charts that highlight patterns in their spending, providing a quick and intuitive way to understand their financial habits. The dashboard should offer customization options for users to set preferred timeframes and categories for analysis, as well as filters to easily switch between different financial metrics. This visualization functionality will help users to quickly grasp their financial situation and make timely adjustments to their spending behavior.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Trend Visualization Dashboard for the first time after logging into FundSweep.

Given the user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the 'Trend Visualization Dashboard', then the dashboard should load successfully within 3 seconds and display the default spending trends for the past month in graph format.

User customizes the time period for spending trend analysis on the dashboard.

Given the dashboard is displayed, when the user selects 'Weekly' from the time frame options, then the spending trend for the past week should be visualized on the graph without errors.

User filters spending trends by a specific category on the dashboard.

Given the dashboard is displayed, when the user selects the 'Food' category filter, then the graph should update to show only food-related spending trends for the selected time frame with no other categories included.

User interacts with the spending trend graph to view detailed information.

Given the spending trend graph is displayed, when the user hovers over a data point, then a tooltip should appear showing the exact amount spent on that day, alongside a brief description of the transaction, if available.

User saves their customized settings on the Trend Visualization Dashboard.

Given the user has selected their preferred time frame and category on the dashboard, when they click the 'Save Settings' button, then their preferences should be saved and reloaded the next time they access the dashboard.

User shares their spending trend graph with another user.

Given the spending trend graph is displayed, when the user clicks the 'Share' button, then they should be able to send an email containing the graph image and a link to the dashboard, without any errors during the process.

User navigates away and returns to the Trend Visualization Dashboard.

Given the user has accessed the Trend Visualization Dashboard, when they log out and log back in, then upon returning to the dashboard, it should display the previously saved settings and the correct time frame selected.

Budget Adjustment Recommendations

"As an independent contractor, I want personalized budget adjustment recommendations so that I can manage my finances more effectively and avoid overspending."

Description

The requirement involves a recommendation engine that utilizes AI algorithms to actively suggest budget adjustments based on analyzed spending data. The feature will alert users to potential overspending in certain categories, suggest limits, and propose reallocations of budgetary funds to ensure better adherence to financial plans. This proactive approach will aim to reduce financial stress for users by providing practical advice tailored to their specific financial behaviors and needs. The recommendations should also be adjustable, allowing users to accept, modify, or reject suggestions based on personal preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

Budget Adjustment Recommendations for Monthly Spending Review

Given the user accesses the Intelligent Spend Analysis feature, when their monthly spending is analyzed, then the system should display three recommendations for budget adjustments based on identified overspending in specific categories.

User Interaction with Recommendations

Given that budget adjustment recommendations are displayed, when the user selects a suggestion, then the system should allow the user to accept, modify, or reject the recommendation, updating their budget accordingly based on the user's choice.

Real-Time Alerts for Overspending

Given the user has set budget limits for certain categories, when the system detects that the user is about to exceed these limits, then the user should receive a real-time alert prompting them to review their spending in that category.

Historical Spending Trend Analysis

Given the user accesses their spending history, when the analysis is performed, then the system should provide insights comparing spending patterns over the last three months, highlighting trends and suggesting necessary adjustments.

Customizable Recommendation Settings

Given the user wants to tailor the recommendation engine, when they access the settings, then the user should have the option to specify preferences for recommendations, such as focusing on specific categories or spending types, which will influence future suggestions.

Integration of Multi-Currency Support

Given that the user operates in multiple currencies, when the budget adjustment recommendations are generated, then the system should accurately convert and analyze spending data, providing recommendations based on the equivalent value in the user's primary currency.

Feedback Loop for Recommendation Effectiveness

Given the user has accepted a budget adjustment recommendation, when the subsequent financial report is generated, then the system should track the effectiveness of the recommendation over the next month and provide feedback to the user regarding the impact on their financial goals.

Spending Alerts and Notifications

"As a small business owner, I want to receive alerts about my spending so that I can take immediate action to stay within my budget."

Description

This requirement is for implementing a system of automated alerts and notifications for users whenever their spending approaches set limits or when unusual spending patterns are detected. Users will receive real-time alerts through the app as well as email notifications, helping them stay informed about their financial activities. The alerts will help users to keep their spending in check and encourage proactive budget management. This feature must be configurable, allowing users to select which types of alerts they wish to receive and under what conditions, thus improving user engagement and satisfaction with the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a real-time alert when their spending reaches 80% of a configured monthly budget limit.

Given a user has set a budget limit for a specific category, when their spending in that category reaches 80%, then the user receives a real-time in-app alert and an email notification indicating the threshold has been met.

User can customize alert settings to choose the types of alerts they want to receive.

Given a user accesses the alert settings page, when the user selects or deselects different alert options (e.g., budget threshold alerts, unusual spending alerts), then the system saves their preferences and reflects the changes in their alert settings.

User receives an alert when unusual spending patterns are detected in their account.

Given a user’s spending patterns are analyzed by the system, when a significant deviation from usual spending is detected (e.g., a purchase amount greater than the average by 50%), then the user receives a real-time in-app alert and an email notification about the unusual spending.

User can view historical alert notifications to track past spending behaviors.

Given a user navigates to the alert history section, when the user selects the date range and filters for specific alert types, then the system displays a list of all past alert notifications corresponding to the selected filters.

User can opt-out of specific types of alerts at any time.

Given a user is on the alert preferences page, when the user unchecks a specific alert option, then the system updates the user's preferences and confirms the change with a success message.

User receives alerts via both in-app notifications and email to ensure they stay informed.

Given the user has enabled email notifications for spending alerts, when a spending alert is triggered, then the user receives both an in-app notification and an email with the alert details.

Multi-Currency Support Analytics

"As a freelancer working internationally, I want to analyze my spending across multiple currencies so that I can accurately understand my financial health and make informed decisions."

Description

The requirement entails integrating multi-currency analysis capabilities into the AI-driven spend analysis feature, allowing users to receive insights based on their spending across different currencies. This feature must automatically convert transactions to a base currency for analytical purposes, ensuring that users with international dealings can accurately assess their financial status. The solution should also provide historical exchange rates and conversion statistics to enhance the users' understanding of how currency fluctuations impact their financial decisions. This integration will broaden the feature's applicability, ensuring it meets the needs of a global user base.

Acceptance Criteria

Multi-Currency Transaction Analysis for an International Freelancer

Given a freelancer who has transactions in multiple currencies, when they access the Intelligent Spend Analysis feature, then they should see a consolidated view of their spending in the base currency along with the original currency values and amounts.

Historical Exchange Rates Display for Budget Planning

Given a user reviewing their past transactions, when they request the historical exchange rates report, then they should receive a detailed report showing conversion rates for transactions along with timestamps for accurate financial assessment.

Real-Time Currency Conversion for Expense Tracking

Given a user entering a new expense in a foreign currency, when they input the amount and select the currency, then the system should automatically convert the amount to the base currency using real-time exchange rates at the moment of entry.

Spending Trend Analysis in Multiple Currencies Over Time

Given a user reviewing their spending habits over the past year, when they filter the analysis by different currencies, then they should see trends and insights specific to each currency alongside the overall spending pattern in the base currency.

User Notifications for Significant Currency Fluctuations

Given a user who engages in transactions across different currencies, when there is a significant change in exchange rates, then the user should receive an alert notification regarding potential impacts on their budget and spending.

Dashboard Integration of Multi-Currency Insights

Given a user accessing their financial dashboard, when they click on the Intelligent Spend Analysis widget, then all analyzed data should display integrated insights regarding multi-currency transactions, trends, and historical data seamlessly in the dashboard.

Performance Metrics on Currency Conversion Accuracy

Given the multi-currency support functionality, when the system processes conversions, then the accuracy of these conversions should be validated against known standards and displayed in the analytics report for user review.

Auto-Tailored Budget Adjustments

Expense SmartTags can automatically recommend budget adjustments based on real-time data. Users receive alerts when expenses exceed predefined budgets, empowering them to take corrective actions promptly and stay on track financially.

Requirements

Real-time Expense Alerts

"As a small business owner, I want to receive real-time alerts when my expenses exceed my budget so that I can take immediate corrective actions to stay financially on track."

Description

Users will receive instant notifications via the platform when their expenses exceed predefined budget limits. These alerts will provide actionable insights and recommended adjustments based on current spending patterns, ensuring users can respond quickly to financial deviations. This requirement enhances user engagement and ensures that users stay informed of their financial status, allowing for prompt corrective actions and better overall budget management.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when their monthly expenses exceed their budget limit for the first time, enabling them to take immediate corrective action.

Given a user with a predefined budget, when their expenses for the month exceed that budget, then the user should receive an instant notification via the platform's alert system.

The system analyzes user spending patterns and suggests budget adjustments when an alert is triggered for overspending.

Given that a user receives an expense alert, when the user reviews the alert details, then the system should provide at least two actionable budget adjustment recommendations based on current spending patterns.

User customizes their notification settings for expense alerts and successfully receives these alerts according to their preferences.

Given a user who has selected their preferred notification settings for expenses, when their spending exceeds the budget, then the alert should be delivered according to those preferences (e.g., email, in-app notification).

The platform will allow users to view historical alerts to analyze their spending behavior over time.

Given that alerts have been triggered for a user over a specified period, when the user accesses the alerts history, then they should be able to view all past alerts with details on dates, amounts, and suggested adjustments.

In case of continuous overspending, the user is prompted with a reminder to reassess their budget and financial habits.

Given that a user exceeds their budget for three consecutive months, when the user logs into the platform, then they should receive a prompt to reassess their budget and review their spending habits with suggested resources.

User feedback is collected after receiving an expense alert to assess the effectiveness of the alerts and recommendations.

Given that a user has received an expense alert, when the user dismisses the alert, then the user should be prompted with a feedback survey to rate the relevance and helpfulness of the alert and recommendations provided.

The alert system works accurately across different currencies and provides users with real-time conversions when alerts are triggered.

Given that a user operates in multiple currencies, when a spending alert occurs, then the alert should display amounts converted to the user's primary currency with the latest exchange rate used.

Automated Budget Recommendations

"As a freelancer, I want the system to recommend budget adjustments based on my expenses so that I can allocate my funds more effectively and achieve my financial targets."

Description

The system will automatically analyze spending patterns and recommend adjustments to budget allocations based on real-time financial data. These personalized recommendations aim to optimize the user’s financial health by reallocating funds to underutilized budgets or suggesting cuts to over-utilized categories. This feature will utilize AI-driven analytics to provide tailored advice that aligns budget distributions with the user's financial goals, enhancing strategic decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when their spending in a particular category exceeds the predefined budget limit, prompting them to review and adjust their budget allocations accordingly.

Given a user has set a budget for a specific category, When their spending exceeds this budget limit, Then the user receives an automatic alert recommending they review their budget allocation.

The system analyzes historical spending patterns and provides actionable recommendations for reallocating budgets based on current financial health.

Given that the system has collected sufficient historical spending data, When it assesses current spending against this data, Then it suggests budget increases for under-utilized categories and decreases for over-utilized ones with specific percentage recommendations.

A user views their personalized budget recommendations on the dashboard and decides to accept or reject the suggestions provided by the system.

Given that the user is logged into the dashboard, When they view their budget recommendations, Then they can easily accept or reject each recommendation with a single click action that updates their budget in real-time.

The user wants to review their adjusted budgets over time to ensure they align with their financial goals, accessing reports generated by the system.

Given that the user has modified their budgets using the system’s recommendations, When they navigate to the reports section, Then they can view a detailed report of their adjustments and their impact on overall spending and savings, including visual graphs and trends over time.

The automated recommendations take into consideration the user’s changed financial goals input during a financial review session.

Given that the user has updated their financial goals in the application, When the system generates budget recommendations, Then it reflects these new goals accurately in the budget adjustment suggestions.

The system should ensure that the recommended budget adjustments do not exceed a maximum percentage limit to prevent drastic changes in user budgets.

Given that the system has generated budget recommendations, When it evaluates these recommendations, Then no single category's budget is adjusted by more than 25% without user verification.

The user can provide feedback on the accuracy and relevance of the budget recommendations received from the system to improve future suggestions.

Given that the user has received budget recommendations, When they provide feedback via a simple rating mechanism (e.g., thumbs up or down), Then the system logs this feedback to improve the algorithm for future recommendations.

Historical Expense Analytics

"As an independent contractor, I want to access historical analytics of my expenses so that I can understand my spending habits and make informed decisions about my budget moving forward."

Description

The platform will include a feature that provides users with comprehensive analytics on historical spending patterns, allowing them to identify trends and make informed financial decisions. By visualizing past expenses against budget goals, users can better understand their financial habits and make proactive adjustments to their budgets. This requirement emphasizes enhancing user knowledge and fostering a data-driven approach to financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User views historical expense analytics to identify patterns and trends in spending over the past six months.

Given the user has logged into the FundSweep platform, when they navigate to the Historical Expense Analytics section, then they should see a visual representation of their spending patterns categorized by month, along with the total expenses and budget goals for each month.

User receives alerts when their expenses exceed predefined budget limits based on historical analytics.

Given the user has set budget limits for their expense categories, when their current expenses for any category exceed the defined limit, then the user should receive an immediate notification alerting them of the budget overage, along with suggestions for possible adjustments.

User analyzes their historical expense trends against budget goals to make informed decisions for future budgeting.

Given the user is in the Historical Expense Analytics section, when they select a specific month, then they should be able to view a detailed comparison of expenses against budget goals, including a percentage deviation and recommendations for adjustments.

User utilizes historical analytics to forecast future spending and budget adjustments for the upcoming month.

Given the user has accessed the Forecasting tool based on historical spending data, when they select the upcoming month, then the system should suggest budget adjustments based on trends from the past six months, including any anomalies and expected future expenses.

User explores the impact of seasonal spending patterns on their overall budget.

Given the user accesses their spending history, when they filter the data by season, then they should see a breakdown of seasonal spending trends with insights into how these patterns affect their annual budget.

User wants to visualize their spending habits through customizable graphs and reports.

Given the user is in the Historical Expense Analytics section, when they choose a type of visualization (e.g., pie chart, bar graph), then the user should be able to customize the graph to display different expense categories and time periods, with the option to download the report.

User-Friendly Dashboard Integration

"As a user of FundSweep, I want to see all my budget alerts and recommendations directly on my dashboard so that I can manage my expenses efficiently without switching between different screens."

Description

Integrate real-time budget and expense alerts seamlessly into the user dashboard for easy accessibility. This integration will ensure that users can quickly review their financial status through visual indicators and notifications without navigating away from their dashboard. Creating a user-friendly interface will improve user engagement and streamline budget management processes, enhancing the overall usability of FundSweep.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses their dashboard to review their current budget status and associated expenses.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when their expenses exceed the predefined budget, then a visual alert should appear, indicating the overage with specific details.

User receives a notification for their budget adjustments based on real-time expense tracking.

Given the user has enabled notifications, when an adjustment is recommended due to overspending, then an alert is sent to the user, displaying the recommended new budget and reasons for adjustment.

User interacts with the budget adjustment alerts to gain insights into their spending habits.

Given the user sees an alert on their dashboard, when they click on the alert, then detailed analytics regarding their spending patterns and suggestions for budget correction are displayed clearly.

User wants to customize their budget settings to better reflect their spending preferences.

Given the user is on the budget settings page, when they adjust their budget parameters and save changes, then the new budget settings should be reflected in the dashboard immediately without glitches.

User monitors the overall health of their finances at a glance through the dashboard's visual indicators.

Given the user is viewing their dashboard, when their expenses are within budget, then the dashboard displays green indicators, and if they exceed, it displays red indicators, providing immediate visual feedback.

User attempts to integrate multiple currency settings for their budget management.

Given the user has multiple currency transactions, when they set up their budget in a specific currency, then the dashboard should accurately convert and display all expenses in this currency with real-time exchange rates.

User wants to access historical budget data for better financial forecasting.

Given the user selects the historical data section within the dashboard, when they request data for a specific time frame, then the system provides accurate historical budget information in a user-friendly format.

Multi-Currency Support for Budgets

"As a small business owner who works with international clients, I want to manage my budgets in multiple currencies so that I can track my expenses more accurately and efficiently."

Description

Implement the capability for users to manage budgets across multiple currencies, including automatic conversion rates and supporting international transactions. This functionality will allow clients who operate in diverse markets to effectively set and track budgets in their preferred currencies, leading to improved financial clarity and management for global operations.

Acceptance Criteria

User needs to set a budget in their local currency and convert it to a different currency for tracking expenses in a foreign market.

Given a user is managing a budget in USD, when they enter expenses in EUR, then the platform should automatically convert the amounts using the latest exchange rate and adjust the budget accordingly.

User receives an alert when their expenses in a foreign currency surpass their established budget limit.

Given a user has set a budget of 1000 EUR, when their total expenses reach 1100 EUR due to conversion rates, then they should receive a notification alerting them of the budget excess.

User wants to view their budget performance dashboard that reflects all transactions across different currencies.

Given a user has budget entries in multiple currencies, when they access their dashboard, then the dashboard should display consolidated budget data with real-time conversion rates included.

User needs to manually adjust the budget due to changes in market conditions or expected expenses in a different currency.

Given a user has set a budget in GBP, when they update the budget to reflect changes in their spending habits, then the new budget amount should be saved and displayed correctly across all relevant sections of the platform.

User operates in multiple markets and needs to report on budget utilization across those markets in their preferred currency.

Given a user has multiple budgets in different currencies, when they generate a financial report, then the report should automatically convert all data into the user's preferred reporting currency, displaying accurate figures for all market transactions.

User wants to analyze the impact of fluctuating currency exchange rates on their budgets over time.

Given a user has a historical budget performance record, when they view the budget history, then they should see a trend analysis that factors in historical exchange rates affecting their budget utilization.

User is setting up a budget for a new international project that involves transactions in several currencies.

Given a user is setting a new budget for a project with expenses in USD, EUR, and AUD, when they define the budget categories, then the system should allow them to designate amounts in their respective currencies and automatically manage the conversions for tracking.

Customizable Tag Groups

Users can create custom tag groups tailored to their unique financial situations. This feature allows for personalized categories that reflect specific income sources or expense types, enhancing clarity and control in their financial data.

Requirements

Custom Tag Creation

"As a small business owner, I want to create custom tag groups for my expenses so that I can easily track and manage my finances in a way that makes sense for my unique business needs."

Description

The requirement enables users to create custom tag groups for categorizing their financial data based on personal preferences and unique financial situations. This feature will include a user-friendly interface that allows users to name tags, define colors for visual differentiation, and organize tags into groups for easier access. It enhances user control over financial data, leading to more efficient tracking and reporting of income and expenses. By allowing for personalized categorization, users can better analyze their spending habits and income sources, ultimately improving their financial management. The implementation of this feature will require integration with existing data structures for expenses and income, ensuring seamless interaction with the platform's dashboard and reporting features, providing real-time updates as users interact with their financial information.

Acceptance Criteria

Custom Tag Creation by User for Expense Tracking

Given a user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they navigate to the 'Tags' section, then they should be able to create a new custom tag with a name and a selected color, and see it listed under their custom tags immediately after creation.

Organizing Custom Tags into Groups

Given a user has created multiple custom tags, when the user chooses to organize these tags into groups, then they should be able to create a new group, drag and drop their custom tags into this group, and see the organization reflected in their dashboard without any error.

Editing Existing Custom Tags

Given a user has created custom tags, when they select a tag to edit its name or color, then they should be able to update these attributes and see the updated tag name and color reflected in their custom tags list immediately.

Deleting Custom Tags

Given a user wishes to remove a custom tag from their list, when they select the delete option for a tag, then the tag should be removed from their list and should no longer appear in the dashboard or reports.

Real-time Data Synchronization with Dashboard

Given a user interacts with the custom tag creation feature, when they create, edit or delete any custom tag, then the dashboard should reflect these changes in real-time, ensuring data is not stale.

Error Handling for Invalid Tag Names

Given a user attempts to create a custom tag with an invalid name (e.g., empty or exceeding the character limit), when they try to save the tag, then an appropriate error message should be displayed, preventing the creation of the invalid tag.

Tag Group Filtering

"As a freelancer, I want to filter my expenses by custom tags so that I can quickly see where my money is going and adjust my budget accordingly."

Description

This requirement allows users to filter their financial data using the custom tag groups they have created. Users will be able to select specific tags to view only relevant expenses or income streams, facilitating targeted analysis and reporting. The filtering feature should be intuitive, providing users with results in real-time, enhancing their ability to swiftly assess their financial status. This functionality supports improved decision-making by offering tailored insights based on user-defined financial categories. Integration with the existing reporting tools will be necessary to ensure users can generate detailed reports based on their filtered data without manual adjustments.

Acceptance Criteria

User utilizes the tag group filtering feature to isolate expenses related to a specific project for analysis during a financial review meeting.

Given the user has created custom tag groups, when they select a specific tag group from the filtering options, then the dashboard should display only those transactions that match the selected tag group, and the total amount of filtered expenses should update accordingly.

User aims to generate a report based on filtered income streams to present to stakeholders.

Given the user has applied specific tag filters to their income data, when they request a report, then the system should generate a report that accurately reflects the income based on the selected tag groups without any missing transactions.

User selects multiple tag groups to analyze combined expenses to assess overall project costs.

Given the user is on the filtering page, when they select multiple tag groups from the available options, then the dashboard should update in real-time to reflect the cumulative total of all selected tag groups and display the relevant transactions.

User requires immediate insights on their recent expenses after applying tag filters for quick decision-making.

Given the user applies a tag filter, when the filter is activated, then the displayed expenses should refresh within 2 seconds, ensuring that the user receives immediate updates on their financial status.

User wants to save their current filtering preferences for future access and usage.

Given the user has configured their tag group filters, when they select the option to save the current filter view, then the system should allow the user to name this filter and save it for future access without losing the current data context.

User accesses the filtering feature from a mobile device to monitor expenses on-the-go.

Given the user is logged in through a mobile device, when they navigate to the tag group filtering section, then the interface should remain user-friendly and fully functional, allowing for seamless filtering of financial data at any time.

Tag Management Dashboard

"As an independent contractor, I want a dashboard to manage my custom tags so that I can keep my financial categorization organized and relevant to my needs over time."

Description

The requirement entails the development of a dedicated dashboard for managing tag groups, allowing users to edit, delete, and rename their custom tags easily. This dashboard will provide users with visual feedback on their current tags, usage statistics, and any dependencies between tags and existing financial reports. The management dashboard contributes to user empowerment, ensuring that users can maintain an organized and meaningful tagging system. The implementation will include responsiveness and accessibility considerations to ensure that all users can utilize the dashboard effectively, and feedback mechanisms will be established for continual improvement.

Acceptance Criteria

User creating a new custom tag group to categorize their expense types for better financial management.

Given the user is on the Tag Management Dashboard, when they select 'Create New Tag Group' and enter valid details, then the tag group should be successfully created and appear in the tag list.

User editing an existing custom tag group to refine their categorization of income sources.

Given the user has an existing tag group on the Tag Management Dashboard, when they select the tag group, edit its name, and save the changes, then the updated tag group should reflect the new name in the tag list.

User deleting a custom tag group that is no longer needed in their financial tracking.

Given the user is viewing their tag groups, when they select a tag group and confirm the deletion, then the tag group should be removed from the dashboard and should not appear in the tag list anymore.

User viewing the tag management dashboard to check their tag group usage statistics for informed decision-making.

Given the user is logged into the Tag Management Dashboard, when they navigate to the usage statistics section, then they should see a visual representation of each tag group’s usage statistics including number of entries and associated reports.

User renaming a tag group and needing visual confirmation of the change.

Given the user is renaming a tag group on the Tag Management Dashboard, when they save the changes, then a confirmation message should appear, and the tag's new name should be updated in the tag list immediately.

User seeking help with tag management through an integrated feedback mechanism.

Given the user encounters a problem while using the Tag Management Dashboard, when they select 'Feedback' and submit their comments, then the feedback should be recorded, and the user should receive a notification confirming the submission.

User navigating the Tag Management Dashboard on a mobile device to ensure responsiveness.

Given the user accesses the Tag Management Dashboard on a mobile device, when the dashboard is loaded, then it should display all elements correctly without the need for horizontal scrolling and maintain usability across various screen sizes.

Multi-Dimensional Analytics

By utilizing multi-dimensional analytics, this feature enables users to view their expenses from various angles. Users can filter by time period, category, or vendor, allowing them to drill down into specific details for more insightful financial reviews.

Requirements

Dynamic Expense Filtering

"As a small business owner, I want to filter my expenses by category and time period so that I can better understand my spending patterns and make data-driven decisions."

Description

This requirement enables users to filter expenses within the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature by various parameters such as time period, category, and vendor. By providing real-time filtering options, users can quickly modify their view to focus on specific data sets that matter most, enhancing their analysis by allowing tailored insights. This functionality is essential for users who need to conduct thorough financial reviews and generate specific reports on their spending habits, providing them the flexibility to analyze trends effectively. The implementation supports intuitive selections through dropdown menus or checkboxes on the dashboard, ensuring a seamless user experience designed to drive deeper financial insights.

Acceptance Criteria

User filtering expenses by specific time frame.

Given the user is on the Multi-Dimensional Analytics dashboard, when they select a time period from the dropdown menu, then the displayed expenses should update to reflect only those within the selected time frame.

User filtering expenses by category.

Given the user is on the Multi-Dimensional Analytics dashboard, when they select a category checkbox, then the displayed expenses should update to show only expenses belonging to the selected category.

User filtering expenses by vendor.

Given the user is on the Multi-Dimensional Analytics dashboard, when they select a vendor from the dropdown menu, then the displayed expenses should update to reflect only those associated with the selected vendor.

User applying multiple filters at once.

Given the user is on the Multi-Dimensional Analytics dashboard, when they select a time period, a category, and a vendor simultaneously, then the displayed expenses should update to reflect only those expenses that meet all selected criteria.

User resetting all filters.

Given the user has applied one or more filters on the Multi-Dimensional Analytics dashboard, when they click the 'Reset Filters' button, then all filters should be cleared and the dashboard should display all expenses.

User experiencing real-time updates during filtering.

Given the user is on the Multi-Dimensional Analytics dashboard, when they adjust the selected filters, then the displayed expenses should update in real-time without requiring a page refresh.

User navigating the dashboard seamlessly while filtering.

Given the user is on the Multi-Dimensional Analytics dashboard, when they filter expenses, then the interface should remain responsive and allow for smooth interactions without lag.

Customizable Reports Generation

"As an independent contractor, I want to generate reports based on my custom criteria so that I can present my financial performance to my clients and stakeholders effectively."

Description

This requirement outlines the capability for users to generate customizable financial reports based on selected filters such as timeframes, expense categories, and vendors. Customizable report generation will allow users to easily create and export reports that reflect their unique financial situations and requirements. This functionality is vital as it empowers users to share tailored insights with their stakeholders and aids in strategic decision-making. Users will have the option to choose from predefined report templates or create their own layouts, enhancing the adaptability of FundSweep to different business needs and preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to generate a customizable financial report that displays my expenses over the last quarter filtered by category, so that I can review my spending patterns and make informed decisions.

Given the user has selected the last quarter as the time period and specified expense categories, when the user clicks 'Generate Report', then a report is created that accurately reflects the selected filters and includes all relevant data.

As a freelancer, I need to generate an expense report filtered by vendor, so that I can identify my spending with specific suppliers for negotiation purposes.

Given the user has chosen a specific vendor and set a time frame of the last month, when the 'Generate Report' button is clicked, then the system will produce a report that lists all expenses for that vendor within the specified timeframe.

As an independent contractor, I want to create a customized financial report using a predefined template, so I can save time while ensuring I include all necessary information for my stakeholders.

Given the user has selected a predefined report template and made optional filter selections (like time period and categories), when the report is generated, then it should reflect the layout of the template and include accurate financial data based on the filters chosen.

As a business owner, I want the ability to save a customized report format for future use so that I don't have to redefine the layout each time I generate reports.

Given the user has created a customized report format, when the user saves the format, then it should be accessible from a 'Saved Templates' section for future report generation.

As a user of FundSweep, I want to export the generated financial report in multiple formats (PDF, CSV, XLSX), so that I can easily share it with stakeholders who might have different preferences.

Given the user has generated a report, when the user clicks the 'Export' button, then the system should provide options to export in PDF, CSV, and XLSX formats, ensuring the exported file is accurate and matches the on-screen report.

As a user, I want to view a summary of the generated report before exporting it, to ensure that all selected filters are correctly applied and the data is accurate.

Given the user has generated a report, when the user clicks on 'View Summary', then a summary modal should display the key details of the report, including total expenses and breakdowns by category to verify accuracy before export.

Real-time Data Synchronization

"As a freelancer, I want my financial data to synchronize in real-time so that I can always rely on accurate information for my budgeting and invoicing needs."

Description

This requirement ensures that all financial data displayed within the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature is synchronized in real time with both user inputs and external data sources, such as bank accounts and accounting software. Real-time synchronization is crucial as it keeps users informed with the latest financial information, eliminating discrepancies that could arise from stale data. This functionality will support users in making timely financial decisions and maintaining accurate budgeting and tracking of expenses, which is paramount for small business operations. Implementation will involve APIs and continuous data refresh mechanisms to uphold data integrity.

Acceptance Criteria

User inputs a new expense transaction while the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature is open, ensuring the expense is reflected immediately without delay.

Given the user has an open session on the Multi-Dimensional Analytics, when they input a new expense, then the expense should appear in the analytics dashboard within 2 seconds.

External bank account transaction data is updated, and the Multi-Dimensional Analytics should pull this new data in real time without manual refresh required by the user.

Given that the user has connected their bank account to FundSweep, when a new transaction occurs, then the transaction should be visible in the Multi-Dimensional Analytics within 5 seconds of the bank's update.

User wants to view expenses for a specific category, and the selected data must be current and accurate reflecting real-time updates consistently across all filters.

Given the user applies a filter for a specific category in the Multi-Dimensional Analytics, when they access the analytics, then all displayed expenses must reflect the latest data from the last synchronization.

While using the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature, the user selects a date range that includes both past and present transactions, analyzing the data's consistency.

Given the user selects a custom date range, when they view the filtered expenses, then all transactions within that date range must be synchronized and displayed accurately without any gaps in data.

User clones an expense entry for data consistency checks ensuring the copy process reflects real-time data accurately.

Given the user clones an existing expense entry, when the new entry is created, then it must synchronize and reflect any changes made to the original entry in real-time.

User has set up periodic updates for external software data synchronization to determine the frequency of these updates within the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature.

Given the user has set up automatic updates for external data sources, when the synchronization occurs, then the data must be refreshed every 10 minutes without user intervention.

User switches devices while accessing the Multi-Dimensional Analytics, and the state of the analytics should be consistent across devices.

Given the user logs into FundSweep from a different device, when they access the Multi-Dimensional Analytics, then all previously entered data and real-time updates must match across devices with no inconsistencies.

Visual Data Representation

"As a small business owner, I want to see my expenses presented visually so that I can quickly identify spending trends and areas that need attention."

Description

This requirement specifies the functionality to represent financial data visually through graphs, charts, and infographics within the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature. Utilizing visual aids increases user engagement and understanding of complex financial data, enabling users to quickly identify trends and outliers in their expenses. By incorporating interactive elements, users can drill down into details just by hovering or clicking on visual items. This capability supports users in making informed decisions at a glance and enhances the overall user experience by providing a clear and aesthetically appealing representation of their financial data.

Acceptance Criteria

User views a visual representation of their expenses in the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature after selecting a specific time period and category.

Given the user has navigated to the Multi-Dimensional Analytics section and selected a time range and expense category, When they click 'View', Then the system displays graphs and charts reflecting the selected parameters accurately and in real-time.

User interacts with the visual data representations to drill down into specific financial details, such as expenses from a particular vendor.

Given the user is viewing a pie chart showing expense distribution by vendor, When they hover over a segment, Then detailed information about expenses related to that vendor is displayed seamlessly in a tooltip without page refresh.

User compares expenses across different time periods using the visual analytics feature to identify trends.

Given the user selects two different time periods in the Multi-Dimensional Analytics, When they apply the comparison filter, Then the system generates side-by-side bar charts showing expense differences for the selected periods.

User saves a visual representation of their expenses for future review or sharing.

Given the user is viewing a chart in the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature, When they click on 'Save Chart', Then the system prompts to name the chart and confirms the saved chart is accessible under 'Saved Reports.'

User customizes the visual data representation settings to tailor their analysis experience.

Given the user is in the settings of the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature, When they choose different visual types (e.g., line, bar, pie) and color schemes, Then those preferences are applied instantly to the displayed graphics throughout the session.

User accesses the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature on a mobile device and views the visual representations.

Given the user has accessed the FundSweep app on a mobile device, When they navigate to the Multi-Dimensional Analytics section, Then all visual representations adjust responsively to the mobile screen size and maintain usability.

User Access Management

"As a business owner, I want to manage who can access my financial data so that I can ensure the privacy and security of my sensitive information."

Description

This requirement defines the ability to manage user access and permissions for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature, allowing primary users to assign roles and set permissions for team members. It is essential for businesses that operate with multiple users, ensuring that sensitive financial data is only accessible to authorized individuals. Users will be able to grant or revoke access based on roles — for instance, allowing view-only access versus editing rights. This functionality enhances the platform's security and usability, aligning with best practices for financial data management and fostering collaboration without compromising security.

Acceptance Criteria

Allowing primary users to grant view-only access to team members for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature.

Given a primary user is logged in, when they select a team member and assign them view-only permissions for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature, then the team member should not be able to edit the data but can view it.

Enabling primary users to revoke access rights for team members who no longer require access to the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature.

Given a primary user is logged in, when they revoke access for a team member to the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature, then the team member should no longer have access to view or edit any analytics data.

Facilitating the assignment of editing rights to team members for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature by primary users.

Given a primary user is logged in, when they select a team member and assign them editing rights for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature, then the team member should be able to edit the analytics data while retaining the ability to view it.

Allowing primary users to review the current access levels of all team members for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature.

Given a primary user is logged in, when they access the user management section of the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature, then they should see a list of all team members along with their current access levels clearly displayed.

Providing an audit trail of changes made to user access for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature.

Given a change is made to a team member’s access level by a primary user, when the primary user checks the audit log, then the action should be recorded with timestamps and the user’s previous and new access levels.

Integrating role-based access control that allows differentiated permissions among various user roles for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature.

Given that different user roles are defined, when a primary user assigns a role to a team member, then that team member should automatically receive the permissions associated with that role for the Multi-Dimensional Analytics feature.

Ensuring the application enforces multi-factor authentication for primary users performing administrative functions related to user access management.

Given a primary user attempts to manage user access, when they login, then the system should prompt for multi-factor authentication before allowing access to user management functionalities.

Smart Expense Alerts

Users receive instant notifications for significant expense changes or anomalies detected by AI tagging. This proactive feature keeps users updated on their financial health, helping them to react quickly and avoid potential budgeting issues.

Requirements

AI-Driven Expense Detection

"As a small business owner, I want to receive instant notifications for significant expense changes so that I can react quickly and maintain better control over my budgeting."

Description

The AI-Driven Expense Detection requirement outlines the system's capability to utilize machine learning algorithms to automatically analyze user transaction data and identify significant expense changes or anomalies. This functionality is crucial for enhancing financial oversight, as it allows users to receive proactive alerts on their financial health, thus enabling them to react quickly to unexpected budgetary challenges. The system will leverage historical spending patterns to recognize outliers and flag them for the user's attention, ensuring they stay informed and can make timely decisions. Integration with existing transaction tracking will ensure real-time updates, allowing for seamless user experience and improved financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an instant notification when their monthly expenses exceed the preset budget by 20% due to an unexpected large expense.

Given the user has set a monthly budget, when an expense is recorded that causes total expenses to exceed the budget by 20%, then the user should receive a notification alerting them of the exceeded budget.

User is alerted in real-time for anomalies detected in spending patterns, such as a 50% increase in spending compared to the average over the last three months.

Given the user’s historical spending data, when the AI detects a transaction which exceeds the average spending by 50%, then the user should receive an alert detailing the anomaly.

User reviews a summary report of detected anomalies and alerts over the past month to assess financial health.

Given the user accesses the summary report feature, when the report is generated, then it should display a list of all anomalies and alerts with actionable insights within the past month.

User customizes alert thresholds for expense notifications based on personal preferences.

Given the user navigates to the settings, when they adjust the threshold for receiving alerts (e.g., setting a 10% increase instead of 20%), then the system should save the new threshold and apply it to future expense alerts.

User receives a notification for recurring expenses that have increased beyond their normal variation.

Given the user has recurring expenses set up, when an expense is recorded that deviates from the historical average by more than 25%, then the user should receive an alert about the increased expense.

User wants to ensure that notifications are delivered promptly and not delayed.

Given the user has notifications turned on, when an anomaly is detected, then the notification should be sent within 5 minutes to the user’s registered communication channel.

User tests the functionality of AI expenditure detection through simulated transactions in a controlled environment.

Given the user inputs test transaction data reflecting various spending patterns into the system, when the system processes the data, then it should accurately flag anomalies according to the specified rules within the simulation environment.

Customizable Alert Settings

"As a freelancer, I want to customize my expense alert settings so that I receive notifications that matter most to me without feeling overwhelmed."

Description

The Customizable Alert Settings requirement allows users to tailor the parameters for the AI-driven alerts according to their preferences and financial thresholds. Users will be able to set specific thresholds for different categories of expenses, decide on alert frequency, and choose preferred communication channels (e.g., push notifications, emails) for receiving these alerts. This level of customization is intended to enhance user engagement and satisfaction, ensuring that users feel in command of their financial alerts rather than overwhelmed by excessive notifications. The feature will integrate seamlessly with the current user dashboard, allowing for easy modification of settings and immediate feedback on changes made.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes their alert settings for expense changes based on personal financial thresholds.

Given a user is logged into the platform, when they access the Customizable Alert Settings, then they should be able to set different expense thresholds for categories like 'Utilities', 'Supplies', and 'Travel' and save these settings successfully.

User chooses preferred communication channels for receiving alerts.

Given a user is in the alert settings section, when they select their preferred channels, such as 'Email', 'Push Notifications', or both, then these preferences should be saved and they should receive a confirmation message that settings have been updated.

User defines the frequency of alerts they wish to receive concerning expense notifications.

Given a user is customizing their alerts, when they choose from options including 'Immediately', 'Daily Summary', or 'Weekly Summary', then the system should allow them to save the selected frequency setting successfully.

User tests the alert settings after customization to validate functionality.

Given a user has set up their expense alerts, when an expense in a monitored category exceeds the defined threshold, then the user should receive an alert through their selected communication channel within the specified frequency.

User modifies their alert setting preferences and checks for immediate feedback on changes.

Given a user changes any alert parameter, when they save the new settings, then the system should display a message indicating the successful update and reflect the new settings immediately on their dashboard.

User interacts with the dashboard to ensure ease of use in customizing alert settings.

Given a user is viewing their dashboard, when they navigate to the alert settings, then the interface should be intuitive, allowing them to easily make modifications without confusion or error messages.

User wants to revert to default alert settings if needed after customizations.

Given a user has made several custom alert settings changes, when they choose the option to revert to defaults, then all custom settings should reset to the application's initial default values and a confirmation message should be displayed.

Historical Data Analytics

"As an independent contractor, I want to analyze my historical expense data so that I can understand my spending habits and improve my budget forecasts."

Description

The Historical Data Analytics requirement focuses on providing users with insights into past financial behavior, specifically related to expenses. This feature will analyze historical transaction data to identify trends, average spending patterns, and recurring expenses, and will generate reports to visualize this information. It aims to empower users by helping them understand their financial habits over time, thereby informing future budgeting decisions. This feature will integrate with the existing dashboard and allow users to access historical data insights quickly, enhancing their knowledge and facilitating better financial planning.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Transaction Analysis for Monthly Spending Trends

Given the user accesses the Historical Data Analytics feature, when they select a specific month, then the system shall present a visual report displaying total expenses, categorized spending, and a comparison to previous months' trends.

Identification of Recurring Expenses

Given the historical transaction data loaded into the system, when the user requests an analysis of monthly expenses, then the system shall automatically identify and categorize recurring expenses, presenting them to the user in a dedicated section of the report.

Visualization of Spending Patterns Over Time

Given a user navigates to the Historical Data Analytics section, when they engage with the visual graphs feature, then the system shall display interactive graphs that highlight average spending patterns and significant anomalies over selected periods.

Integration with Dashboard for Quick Access

Given the dashboard interface, when the user logs in, then there shall be a clearly labeled link to access the Historical Data Analytics feature, providing seamless navigation and immediate access to historical insights.

Generating Custom Reports on Financial Behavior

Given the user selects the report generation option, when they fill in their criteria (date range, expense categories), then the system shall produce a downloadable report in PDF format displaying the requested financial insights and analytics.

User-Friendly Interface for Historical Data Analysis

Given the Historical Data Analytics feature is live, when the user interacts with the analytics tools, then the interface shall offer intuitive navigation, clear labels, and on-screen guidance to enhance user experience.

Real-time Synchronization

"As a business owner, I want my financial data to sync in real-time across devices so that I can access the most current information anytime, anywhere."

Description

The Real-time Synchronization requirement ensures that any changes made to expenses or settings are instantly reflected across all devices and platforms that users access FundSweep. This feature is vital for providing users with the latest information at their fingertips, regardless of where they are working from. It supports mobile and desktop applications, ensuring users stay connected to their financial data at all times. Real-time synchronization also minimizes the risk of errors that could arise from using outdated information and enhances overall user trust in the system.

Acceptance Criteria

User updates an expense entry on the mobile app and verifies that the change is immediately reflected in the desktop app.

Given the user is logged into both the mobile app and desktop app, when they update an expense on the mobile app, then the updated expense should appear on the desktop app within 5 seconds.

A user modifies their account settings on their desktop application while accessing the service on a different device.

Given the user alters their account settings on the desktop app, when they switch to another device logged into the same account, then the changes to settings should be visible immediately without requiring a manual refresh.

Multiple users collaborate on the same financial document to track shared expenses.

Given two users are working on a shared document, when one user adds a new expense, then the other user should see the update in real-time without latency or synchronization errors.

A user checks their financial dashboard on a tablet after making changes on a laptop.

Given the user updates the financial dashboard on their laptop, when they access the same dashboard on their tablet, then the new information should load correctly and be displayed without discrepancies.

A user receives a notification when their expense report is updated from another device.

Given the user has the notification feature enabled, when an expense report is modified on another device, then the user should receive a real-time alert on their primary device indicating the change.

A user completes a transaction in one session and checks the balance on another device shortly after.

Given the user concludes a transaction on one device, when they check their account balance on another device, then the balance should reflect the recent transaction accurately within 3 seconds.

A user edits a recurring expense setting on their mobile device and expects all future occurrences to reflect the changes instantly.

Given the user modifies a recurring expense setting on their mobile device, when they later view the recurring expenses on their desktop, then all future instances should reflect the updates made without delay.

Multi-Currency Support for Alerts

"As a freelancer working with international clients, I want to receive my expense alerts in my preferred currency so that I can easily track my spending without confusion."

Description

The Multi-Currency Support for Alerts requirement enables users to receive expense alerts in multiple currencies, catering to the needs of users who operate in international markets or deal with foreign transactions. This feature will automatically convert expenses into the user's preferred currency based on real-time exchange rates, ensuring that expense alerts are relevant and accurate. By supporting multiple currencies, FundSweep enhances its usability for a wider audience and simplifies financial management for users with diverse transaction needs, thereby increasing user satisfaction and retention.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives notifications for expense alerts in their preferred local currency after a transaction exceeds the predefined limit set in their preferences.

Given a user has set a preferred currency and an expense limit, When an expense occurs that exceeds the limit, Then the user receives an alert in their preferred currency with the correct converted amount and original amount in the transaction currency.

A user operating in multiple currencies receives an alert for expenses that have notable fluctuations due to exchange rate changes.

Given a user has enabled multi-currency support, When the exchange rate for a currency fluctuates significantly impacting an expense, Then the user is notified via an alert indicating both the original and adjusted amounts in their preferred currency.

User can view a history of expense alerts received for multiple currencies in the reporting dashboard.

Given a user has received multiple alerts in different currencies, When the user accesses their expense alert history, Then all alerts are displayed with the correct currency conversions and timestamps, sorted by date.

A freelance user from a different country receives an alert for an expense incurred in a foreign currency while using the platform.

Given a user operates in a foreign currency, When an expense alert is generated for a transaction in that currency, Then the alert displays both the transaction amount in the foreign currency and the converted amount in the user’s preferred currency.

Alerts are generated correctly for converted amounts based on real-time exchange rates for users operating in a fluctuating financial environment.

Given a user operates in a volatile currency market, When an alert is generated for an expense creation, Then the alert reflects the most current real-time exchange rate used for conversion into the user’s preferred currency.

Users have the option to customize their expense alert settings by currency type and alert threshold.

Given a user accesses their alert settings, When they choose different currency types and set personalized alert thresholds, Then the system allows modifications and saves these settings successfully.

User can disable multi-currency alert notifications but maintain access to regular expense alerts.

Given a user opts to disable multi-currency notifications, When they save their notification preferences, Then they continue to receive alerts for transactions in their preferred currency without multi-currency alerts.

User Feedback & Improvement Loop

"As a small business owner, I want to provide feedback on the expense alert system so that my suggestions can help improve the feature for everyone."

Description

The User Feedback & Improvement Loop requirement establishes a mechanism for users to provide feedback on the expense alert feature, which the development team can utilize to make continuous improvements. This could include feedback on alert efficacy, desired features, and overall usability. The mechanism would involve a simple interface within the dashboard for users to submit their experiences and suggestions directly, facilitating a dynamic loop of user insights informing product development. This requirement emphasizes user-centric design, ensuring that FundSweep evolves according to user needs and preferences, leading to enhanced satisfaction and engagement.

Acceptance Criteria

User Interaction with Feedback Interface

Given that a user is logged into the FundSweep platform, When they navigate to the Smart Expense Alerts section and click on the feedback button, Then they should be able to access a simple form for submitting their feedback and suggestions regarding the expense alert functionality.

Feedback Submission Confirmation

Given that a user has filled out the feedback form, When they submit the form, Then they should receive a confirmation message indicating that their feedback has been successfully submitted.

User Feedback Accessibility for Developers

Given that feedback has been submitted by users, When the development team accesses the feedback dashboard, Then they should be able to see all submitted feedback organized by date, user, and category, allowing for easy review and prioritization.

Feedback Impact on Feature Updates

Given that user feedback has been collected over a quarter, When the development team reviews the feedback for trends and common themes, Then at least 70% of the identified user suggestions should be incorporated into the next planned update of the Smart Expense Alerts feature.

User Experience Improvement Tracking

Given that changes have been made based on user feedback, When users are notified of the updates, Then there should be a mechanism in place for users to report their satisfaction with the changes through a follow-up feedback request within the dashboard after the update.

Notification of New Features to Users

Given that the feature updates have been implemented based on user feedback, When a new feature is rolled out, Then all users should receive an in-app notification detailing the new features and how to utilize them.

Historical Spending Insights

This feature provides users with a comprehensive overview of their historical spending patterns based on tagged expenses. By visually presenting past data trends, users can make informed decisions about future budgeting and spending.

Requirements

Expense Tagging System

"As a small business owner, I want to tag my expenses so that I can easily categorize and analyze my spending patterns over time."

Description

The Expense Tagging System allows users to categorize their expenses by tagging them with predefined labels or custom identifiers. This functionality enhances the usability of the platform by enabling advanced filtering and reporting options. Users can easily visualize their expenses, making budgeting more straightforward and enabling them to identify costly habits. The system integrates seamlessly with the user’s expense input process, ensuring that tagging is intuitive and does not add complexity to their workflow. This feature is crucial for deriving meaningful insights from spending data, enabling users to optimize their financial management effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

User categorizes an expense using predefined tags while entering expense details in the FundSweep platform.

Given the user is on the expense entry page, when they select a predefined tag from the tag dropdown menu and submit the expense, then the expense should be saved with the selected tag and displayed under the correct category in the user’s expense report.

User utilizes custom tags to categorize their expenses for more precise tracking and analysis.

Given the user is on the expense entry page, when they enter a custom tag in the tag input field, then the custom tag should be saved with the expense and be available for future use in the tagging dropdown menu.

User reviews the tagging accuracy and effectiveness of the Expense Tagging System by generating a spending report.

Given the user has tagged a series of expenses, when they generate a historical spending report, then the report should accurately reflect the expenses sorted by tags, and the total amounts per category should match the tagged expenses.

User wants to filter their expenses by specific tags to analyze spending patterns.

Given the user is on the expense report page, when they apply a filter using one or multiple tags, then the displayed expense list should only show expenses that match the selected tags, and the total should update accordingly to reflect the filtered expenses.

User seeks to edit or remove tags from previously entered expenses for better classification.

Given the user is viewing their expense list, when they select an expense and edit its tags, then the changes should be saved and accurately reflected in the expense report after submission.

User attempts to search for a specific tag within the tagging system to ensure it is easily discoverable.

Given the user is on the tagging interface, when they type a part of the tag name in the search bar, then the system should display all tags that match the search criteria within 2 seconds.

User explores the system's performance when tagging multiple expenses quickly to ensure the user experience remains smooth.

Given the user is entering expenses in rapid succession, when they apply tags to each expense, then the system should allow smooth tagging with no noticeable delay, ensuring every tag is saved correctly.

Spending Trend Analysis Tool

"As a freelancer, I want to see visual representations of my spending trends so that I can identify areas where I can cut costs and improve my financial health."

Description

The Spending Trend Analysis Tool provides users with the capability to view their spending data over specified time periods, presented through visual graphs and charts. This tool will employ algorithms to analyze categorized expenses and generate insights about spending habits, such as monthly averages and peak expenditure periods. By offering a visual representation of historical spending trends, it empowers users to make informed financial decisions and adjust their budgets accordingly. The integration of this tool within the existing dashboard will provide a cohesive user experience, reinforcing the user’s ability to engage actively with their financial data.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Spending Trend Analysis Tool from the dashboard after logging into FundSweep.

Given the user is logged in, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see the option to access the Spending Trend Analysis Tool.

User selects a specific date range for analysis within the Spending Trend Analysis Tool.

Given the user is on the Spending Trend Analysis Tool page, when they select a date range and submit, then the system should display a graph of spending trends for the selected period.

User views the visual representation of their spending trends through charts and graphs.

Given the user has submitted their date range, when the graph is generated, then the chart should accurately reflect the categorized spending data within the selected period using bars or lines as appropriate.

User analyzes their spending habits through average and peak expenditure displays within the Spending Trend Analysis Tool.

Given the user has viewed the spending trends, when they review the average and peak expenditure periods, then the system should present these insights clearly, allowing the user to easily understand their spending habits.

User wants to export their historical spending analysis as a report.

Given the user is on the Spending Trend Analysis Tool page, when they select the export option, then the system should generate a downloadable report of the spending trends in a specified format (e.g., PDF or Excel).

User applies filters to refine their spending trend analysis based on expense categories.

Given the user is on the Spending Trend Analysis Tool page, when they apply specific category filters (e.g., 'Travel', 'Office Supplies'), then the graph should update to show only the selected categories for the specified date range.

User receives personalized recommendations based on their spending trends.

Given the user has viewed their spending trends, when the system analyzes their patterns, then it should provide tailored recommendations for budgeting adjustments or cost-saving measures based on identified spending habits.

Customizable Budgeting Forecasts

"As an independent contractor, I want to create customized budgets based on my spending history so that I can forecast my financial future and reach my savings goals."

Description

Customizable Budgeting Forecasts enable users to set specific financial goals and projections based on historical spending data. This functionality allows users to enter variable income and expense assumptions to generate a forecast tailored to their personal financial situation. Integrated with the Spending Trend Analysis Tool, users can compare their spending habits against their budgeted forecasts, thus gaining insights into their financial trajectory. This feature is essential for users looking to plan for future expenses accurately and achieve their financial targets efficiently.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to create a customizable budget forecast using historical spending data to plan for the upcoming year.

Given the user has historical spending data, when they input specific financial goals and variable income/expense assumptions, then the system generates a customized budgeting forecast that accurately reflects their inputs.

User needs to adjust their budget forecasts based on changes in their income or expenses during the month.

Given the user has an existing budget forecast, when they update their income or expense assumptions, then the system recalculates and updates their budget forecast in real-time without delays.

User wants to compare their spending habits against their budgeted forecasts to assess financial performance.

Given the user has a set budget forecast, when they view the Spending Trend Analysis Tool, then the system provides a visual comparison of actual spending versus budgeted expenses, highlighting variances.

User wants to set specific financial goals for different categories such as groceries, entertainment, and utilities within their budget forecasts.

Given the user is on the budgeting forecast setup page, when they define specific financial goals for categorized expenses, then the system allows users to save these goals and incorporate them into their overall budget projections.

User wants to receive alerts when approaching budget limits in specific categories to ensure disciplined spending.

Given the user has set budget limits for various spending categories, when their actual spending reaches a certain threshold (e.g., 90% of the budget), then the system sends real-time alerts to the user via email and app notifications.

User aims to review and analyze their budgeting forecasts over different time periods (monthly, quarterly, annually).

Given the user accesses their budgeting forecasts, when they request to view forecasts over different specified time periods, then the system retrieves and displays an accurate overview of past forecasts alongside current forecasts for comparative analysis.

User wants to visualize their budget forecasts with charts and graphs for easier understanding.

Given the user has defined budget forecasts, when they select the option to visualize their budget, then the system presents interactive charts and graphs that represent their budget data in a comprehensible format.

Automated Insight Notifications

"As a small business owner, I want to receive automated alerts about my spending habits so that I can make proactive adjustments to my budget and avoid potential financial issues."

Description

Automated Insight Notifications will provide timely alerts and insights based on user spending patterns and trends. Users will receive notifications for significant changes in their spending behavior, reminders for upcoming budget limits, and suggestions for optimizing expenses based on historical data. This personalized engagement feature enhances the user experience by keeping them informed and helping them stay on track with their financial goals, reducing the need for manual oversight of their accounts. The notifications will be customizable by the user, allowing them to choose which insights they wish to receive.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification about a significant decrease in monthly expenses compared to the previous month.

Given the user has a predefined threshold for expense change notifications, when the expenses drop below the threshold, then the user receives a notification detailing the decrease with an explanation.

User customizes their notification settings via the FundSweep dashboard.

Given the user accesses the notification settings, when they select or deselect specific insights and save their preferences, then the system updates their notification settings without errors.

User receives a reminder notification for reaching 80% of their preset budget limit.

Given the user has set a budget limit, when their expenses reach 80% of this limit within the defined time period, then the user receives a reminder notification about the budget status.

User is notified of personalized suggestions for optimizing expenses based on historical spending data.

Given the user has engaged with the spending insights feature, when the system identifies potential savings based on historical data, then the user receives a notification outlining the suggested optimizations.

User can view a history of notifications received about spending trends.

Given the user accesses the notifications history section, when they request to view past notifications, then the system displays a comprehensive list of notifications with timestamps and details.

User experiences a notification delay or failure due to network issues.

Given the user has experienced a network disruption, when they come back online, then the system should sync and send any missed notifications promptly.

User receives an alert for an upcoming bill payment based on their historical payment patterns.

Given the user has recurring expenses set up, when the due date for a payment approaches according to their historical data, then the user is notified of the upcoming payment with relevant details.

Multi-Currency Support

"As an independent contractor working internationally, I want to track my expenses in multiple currencies so that I can accurately manage my finances across different countries and currencies."

Description

Multi-Currency Support allows users to manage and analyze their expenses in different currencies. This feature is particularly beneficial for freelancers and small business owners operating in global markets. Users can input expenses in various currencies, and the platform will automatically convert these amounts to their preferred currency using real-time exchange rates for accurate reporting. This requirement is crucial for maintaining transparency in financial management and ensuring that users have a complete overview of their spending, regardless of the currency used.

Acceptance Criteria

User inputs an expense in a foreign currency while using FundSweep to track their finances.

Given the user has selected a foreign currency from the dropdown menu, when they input an expense, then the platform should display the converted amount in the user's preferred currency based on real-time exchange rates.

User reviews their historical spending insights in different currencies for the past year.

Given the user navigates to the historical spending insights section, when they select a specific date range and apply filters for different currencies, then the platform should accurately display the total expenses in each selected currency along with the equivalent amount in the user's preferred currency.

A user wants to see how fluctuating exchange rates impact their monthly expenses.

Given the user accesses the monthly expense report, when they toggle on the option to view expenses in the original currency, then the report should reflect both the original expense amounts and the converted amounts based on current exchange rates for each entry.

A user updates their preferred currency in the settings of FundSweep.

Given the user is in the account settings section, when they change their preferred currency and save the changes, then all previously entered expenses should automatically update to reflect the new preferred currency using the latest exchange rates.

User wants to export their financial data with multi-currency support for external analysis.

Given the user selects the export option in FundSweep, when they choose to export data that includes multiple currencies, then the exported file should list all expenses in their original currencies along with the converted amounts in the preferred currency.

User Feedback Mechanism

"As a user of FundSweep, I want to provide feedback on my experience so that the team can understand my needs and make the platform better for everyone."

Description

The User Feedback Mechanism enables users to provide input and suggestions on features, functionality, and overall user experience directly within the platform. This requirement emphasizes customer-centric development by gathering valuable insights for future iterations of the product. The feedback collected will be analyzed to identify trends and common requests, informing both feature enhancement and prioritization. This mechanism fosters a sense of community and encourages user engagement, ultimately leading to improved customer satisfaction and retention.

Acceptance Criteria

Users can easily access the User Feedback Mechanism from their dashboard to provide feedback on their experience with FundSweep.

Given the user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see a visible and accessible option for 'Provide Feedback' that opens a feedback form.

Users should receive confirmation after submitting their feedback through the User Feedback Mechanism.

Given the user has filled out the feedback form and clicked 'Submit', when they submit their feedback, then they should see a confirmation message stating 'Thank you for your feedback!'

Users can categorize their feedback to help FundSweep prioritize improvements effectively.

Given the user is on the feedback form, when they select a category (e.g., features, functionality, overall experience) from a dropdown menu, then the selected category should be recorded with their feedback submission.

Users can view a summary of feedback trends submitted by other users to foster community engagement.

Given the user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they click on 'Community Feedback', then they should see a summary of feedback categories and the number of suggestions made in each category over time.

FundSweep team can view and analyze user feedback data for actionable insights.

Given the FundSweep team accesses the feedback analytics dashboard, when they pull up feedback reports, then they should see data visualizations of trends, common requests, and user satisfaction ratings based on collected feedback submissions.

Users should be able to edit their submitted feedback within a certain time frame.

Given the user has submitted feedback, when they navigate to the 'My Feedback' section within 24 hours, then they should have the option to edit or delete their submitted feedback.

Users should have the ability to submit feedback anonymously if they prefer.

Given the user is filling out the feedback form, when they choose the option to submit feedback anonymously, then their personal information should not be collected or displayed in any feedback analytics.

Secure Document Sharing

This feature allows users to securely upload and share essential financial documents with clients directly through the portal. It enhances collaboration and transparency, ensuring that clients have easy access to important information while maintaining data privacy.

Requirements

Secure Document Upload

"As a small business owner, I want to securely upload my financial documents to the FundSweep platform so that I can keep them organized and accessible without worrying about data breaches."

Description

The Secure Document Upload requirement outlines the capability for users to upload financial documents securely to the FundSweep portal. It will ensure that all uploaded documents are encrypted and stored in compliance with relevant data protection regulations. This feature enhances user experience by providing a seamless and safe way to manage sensitive information. Users will benefit from being able to organize and keep track of important documents without the hassle of physical storage or the risk of data breaches. The implementation will involve creating an easy-to-use interface that guides users through the upload process, along with backend support for secure data handling and storage.

Acceptance Criteria

User uploads a PDF document containing financial records through the FundSweep portal.

Given the user is on the Secure Document Upload page, when they select a PDF file and click 'Upload', then the file should successfully upload without errors, and a confirmation message should be displayed.

User attempts to upload a document larger than the allowed limit.

Given the user is on the Secure Document Upload page, when they select a file larger than 10 MB and click 'Upload', then an error message should inform the user that the file exceeds the size limit and the upload should not proceed.

User uploads a sensitive document and checks for data encryption.

Given the user has successfully uploaded a document, when they check the document's properties in the FundSweep portal, then the document should show that it is stored with encryption enabled, complying with data protection regulations.

User shares an uploaded document with a client through the portal.

Given the user has uploaded a document, when they select the document and choose the option to 'Share with Client', then the document should be securely shared, and the client should receive a notification to access the document while maintaining data privacy.

User uploads a document and verifies its organization in the document management system.

Given the user uploads multiple documents, when they navigate to the Document Management section, then all uploaded documents should be organized logically, allowing the user to easily categorize and find them based on customizable tags or folders.

User tries to access an uploaded document after the sharing period has expired.

Given the user has shared a document with a client, when the client attempts to access the document after the defined sharing time period has expired, then an error message should indicate that access is no longer available and the document should not be accessible.

Client Document Access Control

"As a freelancer, I want to control which documents my clients can access so that I can safeguard sensitive information while still providing necessary details for my projects."

Description

The Client Document Access Control requirement provides the functionality to set permissions for clients to access specific documents uploaded by users. This feature will allow users to determine which documents are shared with which clients, enhancing privacy and ensuring that sensitive information is only available to authorized individuals. By implementing role-based access controls, users can feel confident that their data is secure while still collaborating effectively with clients. This requirement involves designing an intuitive permission management interface and ensuring that the underlying permissions system is robust and secure.

Acceptance Criteria

User uploads a sensitive financial document to FundSweep and assigns access permissions to specific clients based on project requirements.

Given a document is uploaded, when the user navigates to the permissions settings, then they must be able to select specific clients to share the document with, and the selected clients should receive an email notification of the access granted.

A user needs to revoke document access from a client who no longer requires it.

Given that a user wants to revoke access, when they select the document and choose to remove client access, then the client should no longer have visibility of the document immediately, and an email notification should be sent confirming the access revocation.

A client attempts to access a document they do not have permission to view.

Given a client tries to access a restricted document, when they attempt to open it, then they should be presented with an error message indicating that access is denied, without any details of the document itself.

The user wants to update the permissions for a document to allow additional clients access.

Given a document is already shared with certain clients, when the user updates the permissions to add another client, then the new client should receive an email notification and have access within 5 minutes of the update.

The user accesses the permission management interface to view who has access to a document.

Given a user is in the permission management section, when they select a document, then they should see a list of all clients who have access along with their access status (granted/ revoked), ensuring clarity on permissions.

The user wants to ensure the security of shared documents by implementing role-based access control.

Given that role-based access is implemented, when the user assigns roles to clients (e.g., viewer, editor), then those roles must restrict access accordingly, preventing unauthorized activities like downloading or editing based on the user's assigned role.

Audit Trail for Document Sharing

"As an independent contractor, I want to see a log of all actions taken on my shared documents so that I can maintain control and ensure compliance with legal data handling requirements."

Description

The Audit Trail for Document Sharing requirement allows users to track all interactions with shared documents, including uploads, downloads, and access changes. This feature is crucial for maintaining transparency and accountability, giving users a clear history of who accessed their documents and when. Additionally, it helps in ensuring compliance with various legal standards regarding data handling and sharing. Implementation will require a logging mechanism that captures all relevant actions and presents them in a user-friendly format within the dashboard, enabling users to easily monitor document activity.

Acceptance Criteria

Document Upload Logging

Given I am a user uploading a document, when I complete the upload, then the system must log the action with a timestamp, user ID, document name, and the action type (upload).

Document Download Access Tracking

Given I am a user and I have shared a document, when a recipient downloads the document, then the system must log the download action with a timestamp, user ID of the recipient, document name, and action type (download).

Access Change Notification Logging

Given I have shared a document and I change its access level, when the access level is changed, then the system must log the action with a timestamp, user ID of the individual making the change, new access level, old access level, and document name.

View Audit Trail

Given I am a user with access to the shared document, when I request to view the audit trail, then I must see a chronological list of actions (uploads, downloads, access changes) related to that document with detailed information including timestamps and user IDs.

Compliance with Legal Standards

Given the audit trail functionality, when it captures document interactions, then it must comply with relevant legal standards (e.g., GDPR, HIPAA) for data handling and sharing by securely storing logs and allowing for timely user access rights.

User-Friendly Audit Trail Interface

Given I want to monitor document activity, when I access the audit trail in the dashboard, then the interface must be intuitive and easy to navigate, allowing filtering by date, user, or action type.

Error Handling for Audit Logging

Given there may be an error during logging, when an action takes place (upload, download, access change), then the system must capture the error event and notify the user of the logging failure without compromising document security.

Document Sharing Notifications

"As a small business owner, I want to receive notifications whenever my clients access shared documents so that I can stay updated on important interactions without having to check the portal constantly."

Description

The Document Sharing Notifications requirement involves sending alerts to users and clients when documents are shared, accessed, or modified. This feature enhances collaboration by keeping all parties informed about important changes and actions regarding shared documents. Notifications will be customizable, allowing users to choose their preferred channels (e.g., email, in-app notifications) and frequency. The implementation will require integrating with a notification system that tracks document activities and triggers alerts based on user-defined preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

User uploads a financial document and wants real-time notifications about who accessed or modified the document.

Given a user uploads a document, when a client accesses or modifies that document, then an instant notification is sent to the user via their preferred channel.

User customizes their notification preferences for access and modification alerts.

Given the user accesses their notification settings, when they update their preferences for document sharing notifications, then those preferences are stored and applied to future document activities.

Client receives a notification when a document is shared with them.

Given that a document is shared with a client, when the document is successfully uploaded, then the client should receive a notification via their selected channel immediately.

User wants to manage the frequency of notifications received for document activities.

Given a user selects their notification frequency preferences, when documents are shared or modified, then notifications are sent according to the selected frequency (e.g., immediately, daily summary).

User reviews a history of document sharing notifications sent over the last month.

Given that a user requests their notification history, when they access the notification log, then they can view all document sharing notifications sent in the last 30 days.

User experiences a failure in the notification delivery system.

Given there is a failure in the notification system, when the user uploads a document, then an error message is displayed indicating notification delivery will be attempted later.

Automated Payment Reminders

Automated Payment Reminders sends customizable reminders to clients about upcoming invoices and due dates. This proactive communication reduces late payments and improves cash flow, allowing users to manage their invoicing process with less stress and ensuring timely payments.

Requirements

Customizable Reminder Settings

"As a small business owner, I want to customize the settings for my payment reminders so that I can tailor the communication based on my clients' preferences and ensure they receive timely notice about upcoming payments."

Description

This requirement allows users to customize their payment reminders based on their preferences. Users can set specific timeframes for reminders (e.g., 1 week, 3 days before the due date), choose the frequency of reminders, and select the communication method (email, SMS, or in-app notifications). This level of customization will enhance user satisfaction and ensure effective communication with clients regarding invoices, thereby reducing late payments and improving cash flow.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customization of Reminder Timeframes

Given a user has opened the customizable reminder settings, when they select a due date, they should be able to set reminder notifications for 1 week and 3 days before the invoice due date. Then the system should save these preferences effectively without errors.

Selection of Reminder Frequency

Given a user chooses the frequency of payment reminders, when they select options for daily, weekly, or bi-weekly reminders, then the system should store these selections and ensure that reminders are sent according to the chosen frequency.

Choice of Communication Method for Reminders

Given a user is configuring the reminder settings, when they select email, SMS, or in-app notification as their preferred communication method, then the system should send reminders using the chosen method without delay.

Testing Reminder Functionality for Multiple Clients

Given a user has multiple clients with different invoice due dates, when the user configures individual reminder settings for each client, then the system should successfully send reminders according to each client's specific settings without overlap or error.

User Interface for Customizing Reminder Settings

Given the user is on the reminder settings page, when they attempt to customize reminder timeframes, frequency, and communication methods, then the user interface should allow seamless navigation without any user experience hindrances.

Notification Feedback after Setting Reminders

Given a user has established their reminder preferences, when they save these settings, then the system should provide an immediate confirmation notification that the reminders have been successfully set up.

Validation of Reminder Settings upon Saving

Given a user submits their customized reminder settings, when the system processes these settings, then it should validate the configurations to ensure no conflicting reminders are set for the same invoice, returning an error if conflicts are detected.

Integration with Calendar Applications

"As a freelancer, I want my payment reminders to sync with my calendar app so that I can manage my schedule and due dates seamlessly without missing any important payments."

Description

This requirement involves integrating the automated payment reminder feature with popular calendar applications such as Google Calendar and Outlook. By allowing users to sync payment due dates and reminder notifications with their calendars, users can manage their schedule more effectively and stay on top of upcoming payments, leading to improved organization and reduced risk of late payments.

Acceptance Criteria

Syncing payment reminders with Google Calendar.

Given the user has linked their FundSweep account with Google Calendar, When a payment reminder is due, Then the reminder should automatically appear in the user's Google Calendar with the defined due date and time settings.

Syncing payment reminders with Outlook Calendar.

Given the user has linked their FundSweep account with Outlook, When a payment reminder is due, Then the reminder should automatically appear in the user's Outlook Calendar as an event with proper notification settings.

Customization of reminder notifications.

Given a user accesses the reminder settings, When customizing notifications for a payment reminder, Then the user should be able to set a specific time frame for reminders (e.g., 1 day, 3 days before) and save these preferences successfully.

Handling multiple calendars integration.

Given that a user has multiple calendars linked (e.g., Google Calendar and Outlook), When a payment due date is triggered, Then the reminder should be synced across all linked calendars without duplication or errors.

Testing integration functionality post-update.

Given FundSweep receives an update, When the user tries to sync their payment reminders again, Then the sync process should complete successfully without errors and retain all previous settings and reminders.

Notification of failed sync attempts.

Given a sync attempt fails due to connectivity issues, When the user tries to sync their payment reminders, Then an appropriate error message should be displayed, prompting the user to check connectivity and retry.

Multi-language Support for Reminders

"As an independent contractor, I want to send payment reminders in my clients' preferred languages so that they can easily understand the messages and I can reduce the chances of payment delays due to miscommunication."

Description

This requirement is focused on implementing multi-language support for payment reminders. Users will be able to set the language for their reminders based on their client's preference. This increases accessibility and improves communication with clients who may not be fluent in the default language, ensuring that all clients receive clear and understandable payment notifications, leading to better engagement and timely payments.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a language preference for payment reminders based on their client's needs.

Given a user is on the 'Reminder Settings' page, when they select a specific language from a dropdown menu, then the system should save the language preference and apply it to future payment reminders sent to that client.

User creates a payment reminder for a client who speaks a different language.

Given a user has set a language preference for a client, when they create a payment reminder, then the reminder should be sent in the chosen language, as specified in the client's settings.

User verifies the content of the payment reminder in the selected language.

Given a payment reminder is scheduled to be sent, when the reminder is generated, then the content of the reminder should be correctly translated and displayed in the client's selected language.

User tests the multi-language support feature during the payment reminder creation process.

Given a user is creating a payment reminder in a specific language, when they save and send the reminder, then the system should confirm that the reminder is dispatched in the selected language with no errors.

User receives notifications about payment reminders in their selected language.

Given a client speaks a specific language and has been set up to receive reminders, when a payment reminder is sent, then the client should receive the reminder in their preferred language without delay.

User updates the language setting for an existing client.

Given a user is on the client profile page, when they change the language setting for that client, then the change should be saved, and all future reminders should reflect the new language preference.

User generates a report of sent payment reminders including language data.

Given a user requests a report of sent reminders, when the report is generated, then it should include information about the languages used in the reminders along with their delivery status.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

"As a small business owner, I want to see analytics on my payment reminders so that I can assess their effectiveness and optimize my invoicing process to ensure timely payments."

Description

This requirement introduces a dashboard that provides analytics on the effectiveness of payment reminders. Users will be able to track metrics such as open rates, response rates, and average payment times after reminders are sent. This data helps users understand how well the reminders are performing, allowing them to make data-informed adjustments to their reminder strategies, thus enhancing the overall effectiveness of the payment reminder feature.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Performance Analytics Dashboard after sending automated payment reminders to clients.

Given the user has sent automated payment reminders, when they access the Performance Analytics Dashboard, then they should see metrics including open rates, response rates, and average payment times.

User checks the open rates of reminders on the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they view the open rates metric, then it should display the percentage of reminders opened by clients within the last 30 days.

User analyzes response rates to payment reminders from the dashboard.

Given the user accesses the response rates section of the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they check the response rate, then it should reflect the percentage of clients who responded to reminders over the last month.

User assesses average payment times after sending reminders via the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they look at the average payment times metric, then it should display the average time taken for clients to make payments after receiving reminders in the past month.

User customizes the time frame for viewing analytics on the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user selects a custom date range for the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they apply the changes, then the dashboard should refresh to show analytics for the selected period only.

User exports the performance analytics data from the dashboard.

Given the user is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, when they click the export button, then the system should generate a downloadable report of all displayed analytics for further analysis.

User receives notification of newly updated analytics on the dashboard.

Given the user is logged into their account and has sent reminders, when the Performance Analytics Dashboard updates with new data, then the user should receive a notification indicating the data has been refreshed with the latest metrics.

Client Response Tracking

"As a freelancer, I want to track whether my clients open my payment reminders so that I can determine the best time for follow-ups and improve my chances of receiving timely payments."

Description

This requirement adds the functionality to track whether clients open and respond to payment reminders. Users can see if reminders have been viewed or marked as important by their clients, providing valuable insight into client engagement. This feature can guide users on whether follow-ups are needed and improve their communication strategies, ultimately leading to faster payment turnaround periods.

Acceptance Criteria

Client opens an automated payment reminder email.

Given a payment reminder email has been sent, when the client opens the email, then the system should track the open status and update the user's dashboard accordingly.

Client marks the payment reminder as important.

Given a payment reminder email has been sent, when the client marks the email as important, then the system should register this action and display it prominently in the user's client engagement metrics.

Client responds to the payment reminder.

Given a payment reminder is sent, when the client replies to the email, then the system should capture the response and categorize it as positive, negative, or neutral, updating the user's dashboard accordingly.

User reviews client engagement metrics after sending reminders.

Given several payment reminders have been sent, when the user accesses the client engagement section of the dashboard, then they should see a summary of reminders opened, marked important, and responded to.

User receives a notification for reminders that have not been opened.

Given payment reminders have been sent, when the system detects reminders that have not been opened within a specified timeframe, then the user should receive a notification to follow up with those clients.

Automated Follow-up Notifications

"As a small business owner, I want automated follow-ups to be sent to clients who haven't paid after my initial reminder so that I can maintain consistent communication and reduce overdue invoices without having to manually remind each client."

Description

This requirement enables the system to automatically send follow-up notifications to clients who have not responded to or acted upon the initial payment reminders. Users can configure the timing and messaging of these automatic follow-ups based on their preferences. By automating this process, users can ensure consistent communication and prompt action regarding overdue payments, thereby enhancing their cash flow management.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated follow-up notifications are sent to clients who have not responded to payment reminders within three days of the initial reminder being sent.

Given the client profile has a valid email, When the initial payment reminder is sent, Then an automated follow-up notification should be sent after three days if no response is received.

Users can customize the timing and messaging of follow-up notifications based on their preferences within the application settings.

Given that the user is in the settings page, When they choose to configure notification preferences, Then they should be able to set the timing and edit the messaging for follow-up notifications.

The system logs all sent follow-up notifications for tracking and accountability. Users should be able to view the history of notifications sent for each invoice.

Given any invoice within the user's dashboard, When the user accesses the invoice details, Then they should see a log of all follow-up notifications sent along with timestamps.

The automated follow-up notifications can be sent via multiple channels, including email and SMS, based on user selection.

Given the user has opted for SMS notifications, When an automated follow-up notification is triggered, Then the notification should be sent via SMS in addition to email if both options are selected.

Users can enable or disable the automated follow-up notification feature at any time through their account settings.

Given that the user is on the account settings page, When they toggle the automated follow-up notification option, Then the feature should be enabled or disabled based on their selection immediately.

The automated follow-up notifications accurately reflect the content and tone set by the user in their configuration settings.

Given the user has customized messaging for notifications, When an automated follow-up is triggered, Then the content of the notification should match the user's settings exactly.

Client Feedback Integration

This feature enables clients to provide feedback on invoices and services directly within the portal. By facilitating open communication, users can instantly gather client input, catering their services to meet client expectations and enhancing overall satisfaction.

Requirements

Real-Time Feedback Loop

"As a small business owner, I want to receive client feedback directly on my invoices so that I can quickly address any concerns and improve my services based on their suggestions."

Description

The Real-Time Feedback Loop requirement allows clients to submit their feedback on invoices and services seamlessly within the FundSweep portal. This feature is essential for enhancing client engagement, as it provides users with immediate insights into client satisfaction levels and areas of improvement. By facilitating a direct channel of communication, this integration reduces the lag time between service delivery and client response, enabling users to adapt their offerings promptly to better meet client expectations. Furthermore, the feature will incorporate notifications to alert users when feedback is received, and include a reporting mechanism to analyze trends and feedback data, thereby integrating valuable client insights into the existing analytics framework.

Acceptance Criteria

Client submits feedback on an invoice after receiving a service through the FundSweep portal.

Given a client views an invoice, when they click on the 'Provide Feedback' button and submit their comments, then the feedback should be stored and linked to the specific invoice in the backend.

User receives notifications for client feedback submissions through the FundSweep portal.

Given a client submits feedback, when the submission is successful, then the user should receive a real-time notification indicating the feedback has been received.

Administrator analyzes feedback trends through the FundSweep analytics dashboard.

Given that there are multiple feedback entries in the system, when the administrator accesses the feedback reporting section, then the system should display trends, summaries, and key insights based on the submitted feedback.

Client attempts to submit feedback without any comments in the FundSweep portal.

Given a client is on the feedback submission form, when they try to submit without entering any text, then they should receive an error message indicating that feedback cannot be empty.

User retrieves historical feedback data linked to previous invoices in the FundSweep portal.

Given a user accesses the feedback history for a specific invoice, when they request to view the associated client feedback, then all previous feedback entries for that invoice should be displayed chronologically.

Custom Feedback Categories

"As a freelancer, I want to categorize the feedback I receive from clients so that I can easily analyze which areas of my services need improvement."

Description

The Custom Feedback Categories requirement enables users to define and organize specific categories for client feedback, such as service quality, timeliness, and overall satisfaction. This level of customization will provide users with the flexibility to tailor the feedback process to their unique business model and client relationships. This feature not only allows for enhanced organization of responses but also improves the ability to derive actionable insights from feedback gathered. By categorizing feedback, users can identify consistent patterns and prioritize actionable items more effectively, leading to a more structured approach to service improvement.

Acceptance Criteria

User defines a new custom feedback category for service quality and saves it.

Given the user is logged in and navigates to the feedback settings page, when they enter a new category name and click 'Save', then the new category should appear in the list of feedback categories available for clients.

User edits an existing custom feedback category to update its name.

Given the user is on the feedback settings page, when they select an existing category to edit, change the name and click 'Update', then the updated category name should be visible in the list of feedback categories.

User deletes a custom feedback category that is no longer needed.

Given that a user is viewing the list of custom feedback categories, when they select a category to delete and confirm the action, then the category should be removed from the list and no longer appear for clients.

User categorizes feedback submitted by a client under a defined custom category.

Given that a client has provided feedback through the portal, when the user assigns the feedback to a specific custom category, then the feedback should be retrievable under that category in the user’s dashboard.

User views aggregated feedback data organized by custom categories.

Given the user has received feedback from multiple clients, when they access the feedback analysis report, then they should be able to see a breakdown of feedback responses categorized by each custom category defined.

User attempts to create a custom feedback category with a duplicate name.

Given the user is on the feedback settings page, when they enter a category name that already exists and click 'Save', then an error message should appear indicating that the category name is already taken.

Feedback Analytics Dashboard

"As a contractor, I want to view a dashboard of my client feedback so that I can see trends over time and make improvements to my services accordingly."

Description

The Feedback Analytics Dashboard requirement provides users with a dedicated section within the FundSweep portal to visualize and analyze client feedback data. This dashboard displays feedback trends, highlights areas that require attention, and offers insights derived from aggregated client responses. By presenting data in a clear and comprehensible manner, users can more readily identify strengths and weaknesses in their service offerings and make informed business decisions based on historical feedback patterns. This feature ensures that user investment in client feedback yields tangible benefits through actionable insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Client views the Feedback Analytics Dashboard to assess the trends in client feedback received over the last three months.

Given the client is logged into the FundSweep portal, when they navigate to the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then they should see an overview of feedback trends presented in graphical format, along with summary statistics for easy interpretation.

User utilizes the Feedback Analytics Dashboard to identify areas requiring attention based on client feedback.

Given the user is on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when they interact with the data visualization tools, then they should be able to filter feedback by categories and time periods to pinpoint specific areas that need improvement.

User accesses detailed insights derived from aggregated client responses displayed on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard.

Given the user selects a specific feedback trend, when they click on it, then the system should display detailed qualitative and quantitative insights that explain the trend observed, including client comments and ratings.

User shares the insights obtained from the Feedback Analytics Dashboard with their team to enhance service delivery.

Given the user is viewing insights on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when they click on the 'Share' function, then they should be able to send a summary report via email or export it as a PDF without any errors.

Client provides feedback on an invoice, which the user then reviews on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard.

Given the client has submitted feedback on an invoice, when the user checks the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, then they should see the new feedback reflected in the dashboard under the relevant invoice section without delay.

User needs to evaluate historical feedback patterns to make data-driven decisions.

Given the user selects a historical time frame on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when they submit the query, then the dashboard should refresh and display a clear historical comparison of feedback trends across the selected periods.

User aims to measure the performance of their services against client feedback over time.

Given the user is on the Feedback Analytics Dashboard, when they enable a performance metric comparison feature, then they should be able to view how their service ratings correlate with feedback over defined cycles (monthly, quarterly, annually).

Client Feedback Notification System

"As a business owner, I want to receive notifications when clients leave feedback so that I can respond quickly and maintain client satisfaction."

Description

The Client Feedback Notification System requirement allows users to receive real-time alerts when clients provide feedback. This feature ensures that users are immediately aware of client responses, enabling timely interventions when negative feedback is received and fostering customer satisfaction. The notification system could be integrated via emails or push notifications within the platform, depending on user preferences. Immediate access to client feedback will empower users to respond proactively, thereby strengthening client relationships and trust.

Acceptance Criteria

Receiving real-time feedback notifications from clients via email or platform alerts.

Given a user has enabled notifications for client feedback, when a client submits feedback on an invoice, then the user receives an immediate notification via their preferred method (email or push notification).

Displaying client feedback within the FundSweep platform.

Given a user accesses the feedback section of the platform, when a client submits feedback, then the feedback is displayed in the user's dashboard with timestamps and client details for context.

Differentiating between positive and negative client feedback notifications.

Given a user has set up feedback categories, when a client submits feedback, then the notification clearly indicates whether the feedback is positive or negative, enabling the user to prioritize responses accordingly.

Allowing users to customize their notification preferences based on client segments.

Given the user has multiple clients, when they access notification settings, then they can select different notification preferences (email, push notification) for each client segment (high value, low value) separately.

Tracking user responses to client feedback over time.

Given multiple feedback entries logged, when a user interacts with a notification, then it is recorded in the system as an interaction, allowing for tracking of response rates and times.

Aggregating client feedback data for analysis within the platform.

Given the user wants to view feedback trends, when the user accesses the analytics dashboard, then they can view summarized data of feedback ratings over time, categorized by client, and export the data as needed.

Implementing a feedback acknowledgment system for users to respond to clients directly.

Given a user receives feedback from a client, when they choose to respond, then the system allows them to send an acknowledgment or response to the client directly through the platform with an option to notify the client via email.

Feedback Response Templates

"As a freelancer, I want to have response templates for client feedback so that I can quickly reply to clients and show that I appreciate their input."

Description

The Feedback Response Templates requirement provides users with a selection of customizable response templates they can use to thank clients for their feedback or to address specific concerns raised. This requirement enhances user efficiency by streamlining the communication process with clients. Having predefined responses allows users to maintain professionalism and consistency in their communication while ensuring that clients feel heard and valued, regardless of the feedback type. Additionally, this feature can help reduce response time and improve overall user productivity.

Acceptance Criteria

Client Submission of Feedback on Invoice

Given a client views an invoice, when they provide feedback using the available templates, then the response should be recorded in the system and an acknowledgment email should be sent to the client.

User Selection of a Feedback Response Template

Given a user receives client feedback, when they navigate to the feedback section and select a predefined response template, then the template should populate the response field for further customization before sending.

Customization of Feedback Response Templates

Given the user wants to tailor a response, when they select a template, then they should be able to edit the template text before sending it to the client, ensuring it meets their specific needs.

Review and Analysis of Client Feedback Trends

Given the user has received multiple feedback submissions, when they access the analytics dashboard, then the system should display trends based on client feedback, highlighting common themes or issues over time.

Automatic Response to Negative Client Feedback

Given the user receives negative client feedback, when they select the appropriate template, then the system should suggest additional resources or corrective measures related to the specific concern raised in the feedback.

Integration of User Feedback Responses into Client Profiles

Given a user has replied to a client's feedback, when they save the response, then the communication history should be updated in the client's profile, ensuring all interactions are logged.

Accessibility of Response Templates for First-Time Users

Given a new user accessing the feedback feature for the first time, when they click on the templates option, then they should see a tutorial or explanation of how to use the templates effectively within the portal.

Real-Time Invoice Tracking

Users can track the status of their invoices in real-time through the client portal. This feature allows for immediate updates on payments received and pending balances, empowering users to stay on top of their accounts and improving overall financial management.

Requirements

Real-Time Payment Notifications

"As a small business owner, I want real-time notifications of payments received so that I can manage my cash flow more effectively and avoid the anxiety of unpaid invoices."

Description

This requirement entails implementing a system that notifies users immediately when a payment is received on their invoices. Users will receive alerts via email or within the client portal, ensuring they have up-to-date information about their financial status. This feature minimizes the time spent manually checking for payments and enhances the user's ability to manage cash flow effectively. Additionally, the notifications will include summary details such as invoice numbers and amounts to provide clear context. The core functionality addresses the common challenge of keeping track of multiple invoices and payments, thus improving user experience and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a real-time email notification when a payment is made on their invoice.

Given an invoice has been marked as paid by a client, when the payment is processed, then the user should receive an email notification containing the invoice number and payment amount within 5 minutes of payment confirmation.

User views payment notifications in the client portal immediately after a payment is received.

Given a user is logged into the client portal, when a payment is received for an invoice, then the user should see a corresponding notification in their notification center within 2 minutes of the payment being recorded.

User checks the historical records of payment notifications in the client portal.

Given a user has previously received payment notifications, when the user accesses the notification history in the client portal, then they should be able to view all past notifications including details such as invoice numbers, payment amounts, and dates.

User customizes notification settings for payment alerts.

Given a user wants to adjust their notification preferences, when they navigate to the notification settings in the client portal, then they should be able to choose between receiving notifications via email or only through the client portal, and confirm the settings successfully have been saved.

User receives a summary notification for multiple payments received at once.

Given multiple payments have been processed on the same day, when the user receives notifications, then they should receive a bundled summary notification that lists all invoice numbers and total amounts received, rather than separate notifications for each payment.

User checks for notifications while offline and is informed of updates when they reconnect.

Given a user was offline and has now reconnected to the internet, when they log back into the client portal, then they should see all missed payment notifications displayed prominently on their dashboard.

User receives notifications on mobile devices about payments.

Given a user has the mobile application installed and is logged in, when a payment is made on any of their invoices, then they should receive a push notification on their mobile device with details of the payment.

Invoice Status Dashboard

"As a freelancer, I want to see a comprehensive dashboard of my invoice statuses so that I can quickly understand which invoices need my attention and optimize my invoicing strategy."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a dedicated dashboard view for users to monitor the status of all their invoices in one consolidated location. The dashboard will display crucial information such as due dates, amounts, payment statuses (paid, pending, overdue), and a visual representation of cash flow. This functionality will empower users to quickly assess their financial situation without the need to sift through emails or multiple reports. The goal of this dashboard is to enhance financial oversight and decision-making for users, making it easier to identify trends and address potential issues timely.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Invoice Status Dashboard to view their invoicing information after logging into the FundSweep client portal.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep client portal, when they navigate to the Invoice Status Dashboard, then the dashboard should display a summary of all invoices, including due dates, amounts, payment statuses (paid, pending, overdue), and a visual representation of cash flow.

User interacts with the Invoice Status Dashboard to filter invoices based on specific criteria such as payment status or due date.

Given the user is on the Invoice Status Dashboard, when they apply the filter for payment status as 'Pending', then the dashboard should only show invoices that are pending payment, and the total amount due should update accordingly.

User wants to receive a notification when an invoice is marked as paid or past due.

Given the user has enabled notifications in their profile settings, when an invoice status changes to 'Paid' or 'Overdue', then the user should receive an email and in-app notification regarding the status change immediately.

User wants to print or export the invoice status information for record-keeping or reporting purposes.

Given the user is viewing their Invoice Status Dashboard, when they select the print or export option, then the dashboard should generate a printable PDF or CSV file containing all relevant invoice information in a clear format.

User looks for trends in invoice payments over the past three months using the Invoice Status Dashboard.

Given the user is on the Invoice Status Dashboard, when they select the trend analysis option, then the dashboard should display a visual graph representing the payments received and outstanding invoices over the past three months.

User checks the dashboard for overdue invoices to follow up with clients.

Given the user accesses the Invoice Status Dashboard, when the dashboard is displayed, then all overdue invoices should be clearly highlighted, and their amounts should be shown separately to facilitate follow-up.

Client Portal Access Control

"As an independent contractor, I want to control who can see my invoice data in the client portal so that I can ensure that only authorized clients have access to sensitive information."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a robust access control system for the client portal where users can manage who has access to view their invoices and payment details. Users should be able to set permissions for clients, allowing them to view specific invoices or details while keeping sensitive financial data private. This feature is critical as it enhances security and user confidence in sharing financial information. Proper access control will not only protect sensitive data but also improve client trust and engagement by providing them with tailored information they need.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up access control for a new client in the client portal.

Given a user logged into the client portal, when they navigate to the access control settings, then they should be able to add a new client and set permissions for viewing specific invoices.

User modifies existing access control settings for an existing client.

Given a user logged into the client portal, when they select an existing client from the access control list, then they should be able to modify the permissions for that client and save the changes.

User checks the access permissions assigned to different clients.

Given a user logged into the client portal, when they review the access control settings, then they should be able to see the list of clients along with their specific permissions clearly displayed.

Client attempts to access an invoice they do not have permission to view.

Given a client accessing the client portal, when they try to open an invoice that they do not have permission to view, then they should receive an error message indicating insufficient permissions.

User reviews a detailed audit log of access control changes.

Given a user logged into the client portal, when they view the audit log, then they should see a complete history of changes made to access controls including who made the changes and when.

Client successfully accesses invoices for which they have been granted permission.

Given a client logged into the client portal, when they navigate to the invoices section, then they should only see invoices for which they have been granted access.

Recurring Invoice Scheduling

"As a small business owner, I want to set up recurring invoices for my regular clients so that I can save time and ensure I get paid on schedule without having to manually create each invoice."

Description

This requirement entails the ability for users to set up recurring invoices for clients, automating the invoicing process for repeat transactions. Users will be able to specify the frequency (daily, weekly, monthly) and can customize each invoice with specific details. This functionality will save users time and reduce manual errors, ensuring that regular payments are invoiced promptly and efficiently. Furthermore, it will improve revenue predictability for users and enhance the overall user experience by taking a repetitive task out of their hands.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up a monthly recurring invoice for a client with specified details like event date, invoice amount, and notes.

Given the user is on the 'Recurring Invoices' setup page, when they input the client details, frequency as 'monthly', and the necessary invoice details, then the system should generate the first invoice immediately and schedule subsequent invoices according to the specified frequency without errors.

User modifies an existing recurring invoice to change the amount and frequency.

Given the user accesses their list of recurring invoices, when they select an invoice to edit and change the amount and frequency, then the system should update the invoice details accordingly and notify the user of the successful update with a confirmation message.

User cancels a previously created recurring invoice.

Given the user is viewing their active recurring invoices, when they choose to cancel a specific recurring invoice, then the system should stop all future invoices from being generated for that client and provide a confirmation that the cancellation was successful.

User receives notification when a recurring invoice is generated for a client.

Given the user has set up a recurring invoice, when an invoice is generated, then the user should receive an email notification indicating the invoice has been created, including the invoice date, amount, and recipient details for reference.

User attempts to set a recurring invoice with an invalid frequency option.

Given the user is on the 'Recurring Invoices' setup page, when they select an invalid frequency option, then the system should display an error message indicating that the frequency selected is not valid and prevent the creation of the invoice.

User views a history of generated recurring invoices.

Given the user has created multiple recurring invoices, when they navigate to the 'Invoice History' page, then they should see an accurate list of all invoices generated from their recurring invoices, including dates, amounts, and statuses.

Multi-Currency Support for Invoices

"As a freelancer working with international clients, I want to send invoices in different currencies so that I can cater to my clients' needs without confusing them with extra conversion work."

Description

This requirement involves expanding the invoicing capabilities to support multiple currencies, enabling users to send invoices in their clients' preferred currencies. The system will automatically convert amounts based on real-time exchange rates, ensuring accurate billing. This feature is significant for users who conduct business in international markets and with clients from various countries, as it enhances user flexibility and expands their client base. By improving the invoicing process, this functionality will directly contribute to user satisfaction and help grow their business.

Acceptance Criteria

User sends an invoice to a client in a different country, selecting their local currency as the billing option.

Given the user has selected a specific client with a preferred currency, when the user generates the invoice, then it must display the total amount in the client's preferred currency with accurate conversion based on the latest exchange rates.

User checks the status of an invoice sent in a foreign currency through the client portal.

Given the user has accessed the client portal, when they navigate to the invoice tracking section, then they should see all invoices listed with their respective currencies and payment statuses clearly indicated.

User updates the invoice total due to a change in exchange rates after the invoice has been issued.

Given the user has issued an invoice in a foreign currency, when exchange rates fluctuate significantly before the payment is made, then the system must notify the user of the new exchange rate and allow them to update the invoice total if needed.

User has a client that defaults to their local currency when an invoice is created without specifying any currency.

Given the user creates an invoice without selecting a currency, when the invoice is generated, then it must default to the user's local currency without errors or discrepancies.

User generates an invoice summary report that includes multiple invoices issued in different currencies.

Given the user wants to analyze their invoicing performance, when they generate a summary report, then the report must accurately present the total amounts in their respective currencies and provide correct aggregated totals for financial analysis.

User wants to set a preferred currency for clients within their account settings.

Given the user accesses their account settings, when they select a client and set their preferred currency, then this preference must be saved and automatically applied to all future invoices for that client.

Customizable Client Profiles

This feature allows users to create and maintain detailed profiles for each client, including preferences, history, and communication notes. Customizable profiles enhance personalization and strengthen relationships, enabling users to tailor their services effectively.

Requirements

Profile Customization Options

"As a small business owner, I want to customize client profiles with specific notes and preferences so that I can tailor my communications and services to better meet their needs and enhance our working relationship."

Description

This requirement focuses on allowing users to customize various aspects of client profiles, including fields for client preferences, interaction history, and communication notes. By implementing these options, users can enhance personalization, which can lead to stronger relationships with clients. The customization capabilities will integrate seamlessly into the existing FundSweep dashboard, enabling users to easily view and edit profiles without navigating away from the main interface. It aims to improve user satisfaction and the quality of service delivered, ultimately driving loyalty and repeat business.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new client profile with customizable fields for preferences, interaction history, and communication notes.

Given the user is on the client profile creation page, when they enter data into the customizable fields and submit the profile, then a new client profile should be created with the entered data displayed accurately in the dashboard.

User edits an existing client profile to update client preferences and adds a new communication note.

Given the user is viewing an existing client profile, when they modify the preferences and add a communication note, then the updated information should be saved and reflected immediately in the profile view.

User views the client profile overview to ensure all customizable fields are displayed correctly.

Given the user is on the client profile overview page, when they select a specific client, then all customization options should be visible and correctly populated with the relevant data.

User deletes a communication note from an existing client profile.

Given the user is viewing a client's communication history, when they select a note to delete and confirm the action, then the communication note should be removed from the profile and no longer displayed in the history.

User attempts to access the client profile customization options on mobile devices.

Given the user is using FundSweep on a mobile device, when they navigate to the client profile section, then all customization options should be accessible and fully functional, displaying on-screen interfaces appropriately for mobile use.

User generates a report of client profiles with customized fields.

Given the user is in the reporting section of FundSweep, when they select the option to generate a report based on client profiles and include customizable fields, then the generated report should accurately reflect all selected fields and data for each client.

Client Interaction History Tracking

"As a freelancer, I want to track all my interactions with clients in their profiles so that I can maintain a clear record of our communications and provide more consistent support."

Description

This requirement entails developing a system to log and display a client’s interaction history in their profile. Users should be able to record important communications, meetings, and follow-ups directly within the client profile. This feature provides holistic insight into the client relationship, ensuring that users have all necessary information readily available for timely and informed interactions. By tracking historical data, the feature aims to improve strategic decision-making and elevate client service quality.

Acceptance Criteria

Client Interaction History Logging and Retrieval

Given a user is on the client profile page, when they add a new interaction entry, then the entry should be saved successfully and displayed in the interaction history section.

Viewing Interaction History

Given a user has logged interactions for a client, when they navigate to the interaction history tab, then all interactions should be listed in chronological order with timestamps and details.

Editing Interaction History

Given a user is viewing the interaction history, when they select an interaction entry to edit, then they should be able to update the entry and save changes successfully.

Deleting Interaction History Entries

Given a user is viewing the interaction history, when they select an interaction entry to delete, then that entry should be removed from the history and not displayed anymore.

Displaying Interaction Types

Given a user logs an interaction, when they categorize the interaction as a meeting, call, email, or note, then the entry should reflect the correct interaction type in the history list.

Integrating with Notification System

Given a user logs a follow-up reminder alongside an interaction, when the specified follow-up date arrives, then the user should receive a notification within the platform.

Searching Interaction History

Given a user is on the interaction history page, when they enter a keyword in the search bar, then the system should filter and display relevant interaction entries based on the keyword.

Automated Alerts for Client Engagement

"As an independent contractor, I want to receive automated alerts for upcoming client interactions so that I can stay organized and ensure timely follow-ups without missing important deadlines."

Description

The system should enable users to set automated alerts for crucial client engagement activities, such as follow-up reminders after meetings or deadlines for deliverables. This requirement enhances user adherence to timelines and strengthens client relationships by ensuring timely communication. The alerts will integrate with the existing notification system within FundSweep, ensuring users are prompted through various channels, including email and in-app notifications, keeping client engagement top-of-mind.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up automated alerts for following up with a client after a scheduled meeting within FundSweep, choosing the reminder time and notification channels.

Given a user is logged into FundSweep, when they create an automated alert for client follow-up, then the alert should appear in the dashboard and send notifications via email and in-app at the specified reminder time.

User receives an automated reminder notification for a deliverable deadline that has been set for a client engagement, ensuring timely communication.

Given an automated deadline alert is set for a deliverable, when the deadline approaches, then the user should receive an alert through both email and in-app notifications, 24 hours before the deadline.

User modifies an existing automated alert for a client follow-up to change the reminder time and notification method.

Given a user is managing their client alerts, when they update an existing follow-up alert for a client, then the changes should be saved, and the new alert time and method should reflect in the dashboard and notification settings immediately.

User checks the history of automated alerts for a specific client engagement to review all past notifications sent.

Given a user wants to view automated alerts history, when they access the client profile within FundSweep, then they should see a log of all past alerts, including dates, times, and types of notifications sent.

User receives an automated alert that is sent for a client engagement but does not appear as a notification on their devices.

Given an automated alert is set to be sent, when the user has not received the alert notification, then the system should log this incident for further investigation and provide an option for the user to resend the alert manually.

User creates multiple automated alerts for different clients and monitors their performance in terms of response rates and follow-up success.

Given a user has set multiple automated alerts for various clients, when they review the client engagement report, then they should see statistics showing response rates and follow-up successes correlated with the alerts sent within the reporting dashboard.

Data Import/Export for Client Profiles

"As a small business owner using multiple tools, I want the ability to import and export client profile data so that I can easily integrate information across platforms and maintain comprehensive records."

Description

This requirement focuses on the ability to import and export client profile data in various formats, such as CSV or Excel. By allowing users to easily transfer client information between systems, or backup their data, the feature enhances versatility and user control over their profiles. It is essential for users who may be migrating from other platforms or need data accessibility for reporting purposes. This functionality will integrate with existing data management tools within FundSweep to ensure a smooth user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User imports client profile data from a CSV file to FundSweep.

Given a valid CSV file containing client profile data, When the user initiates the import process, Then the system should successfully import all client profiles, and confirm the operation with a summary of imported profiles.

User exports client profile data to an Excel file for reporting.

Given the user is on the client profile management page, When the user selects the export option and chooses Excel format, Then the system should generate and download an Excel file containing all client profile data accurately.

User attempts to import invalid client profile data.

Given an invalid CSV file with incorrect formatting, When the user tries to import the file, Then the system should reject the import and display an error message indicating the issues with the file format and data.

User needs to backup client profiles using export functionality.

Given the user is on the client profile management page, When the user selects the backup option and initiates the export, Then the system should create a backup file containing all profiles and confirm successful backup with a notification.

User needs to edit client profiles after importing them.

Given the client profiles have been successfully imported, When the user accesses any of the imported profiles and makes edits, Then those changes should be saved correctly and reflected in the client management system without any data loss.

User migrates client profiles from an old system to FundSweep.

Given the user has exported client profiles from an old system in CSV format, When the user imports this data into FundSweep, Then all fields in the profiles should match the original data including client preferences and communication history.

Client Preferences Survey Tool

"As a freelancer, I want to send surveys to my clients about their preferences so that I can gather insights to enhance my service offerings and meet their expectations more effectively."

Description

This requirement will provide users with a built-in survey tool to collect client preferences and feedback directly through the platform. This tool allows users to send customized surveys to clients, capturing valuable insights about their needs and service experiences. The collected data will be stored within client profiles, enriching the personalization from which users can benefit. This survey feature aims to improve product offerings and client satisfaction by ensuring that services align closely with client expectations.

Acceptance Criteria

Creating a new client profile in FundSweep using the Client Preferences Survey Tool.

Given a user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the 'Client Profiles' section and select 'Create New Profile', then they should be able to access the survey tool to send a survey to the client for feedback.

Sending a customized survey to an existing client for preference collection.

Given a user has an existing client profile, when they click on the 'Send Survey' button in the 'Client Preferences Survey Tool', then the system must allow them to customize the survey content before sending it to the client.

Collecting and storing client feedback from the survey responses within the client profile.

Given a client has received a survey, when they submit their responses, then the feedback must be automatically stored within the respective client profile for future reference.

Viewing client preferences stored in the client profile after survey completion.

Given a user has populated client profiles, when they access a specific client's profile, then they should see the survey responses displayed under a 'Preferences' section in the profile.

Analyzing survey data for improving service offerings based on client feedback.

Given the user has collected multiple survey responses, when they access the 'Client Preferences Survey Tool' analytics dashboard, then they should see summarized data trends and insights based on client feedback.

Ensuring clients can easily access and complete their surveys.

Given a survey has been sent to a client, when they receive the email notification, then the email must contain a clear, clickable link to the survey that leads directly to the survey form without confusion.

Integrated Chat Support

Integrated Chat Support provides a direct communication line between users and their clients within the portal. This feature allows for immediate answers to queries and quick resolution of issues, enhancing the overall client experience and increasing satisfaction.

Requirements

Real-Time Message Notifications

"As a small business owner, I want to receive real-time notifications for client messages so that I can respond promptly and maintain strong client relationships."

Description

Real-Time Message Notifications enable users to receive instant alerts for new messages or updates from their clients within the FundSweep platform. This feature is crucial for maintaining effective communication, ensuring that users never miss important messages that may require immediate attention. By providing timely notifications, users can respond to client inquiries quickly, enhancing client satisfaction and fostering stronger relationships. The integration of this requirement within the FundSweep platform will streamline communication processes, encouraging proactive interactions and reducing response time for queries. Additionally, users will have the option to customize notification settings for their preferences, allowing for a tailored experience that suits individual work habits and communication needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Receiving Notifications for New Messages from Clients.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform, When a client sends a new message, Then the user should receive an instant notification on the dashboard and via email.

Customizing Notification Settings for Message Alerts.

Given the user accesses the notification settings, When the user selects their preferred notification methods (e.g., email, push notifications), Then the changes should be saved, and notifications should reflect the user's preferences.

Ensuring Notifications are Received During Active Sessions.

Given the user is actively using the FundSweep platform, When a new client message is received, Then the user should receive a real-time in-app notification without interruptions.

Verifying Visibility of the Notification History.

Given the user has received multiple notifications, When the user clicks on the notifications tab, Then all previous notifications should be listed with timestamps and message snippets.

Testing the Notification Delay Time upon Message Receipt.

Given a client sends a message, When the message is received by the FundSweep platform, Then the notification should be delivered to the user within 5 seconds.

Checking Default Notification Settings Upon User Registration.

Given a new user registers for the FundSweep platform, When the user accesses the notification settings, Then the default notification settings should be enabled and visible to the user.

Testing Notification Mute Functionality.

Given the user chooses to mute notifications for a specific time period, When the mute period ends, Then the user should start receiving notifications again without needing to adjust any settings.

Chat History Archive

"As a freelancer, I want to access my chat history with clients so that I can keep track of our discussions and find important information easily."

Description

The Chat History Archive feature allows users to easily access and review past conversations with clients within the FundSweep portal. This functionality not only serves as a record of exchanges but also enables users to track the progress of discussions and retrieve important information when needed. By archiving chat histories, users can quickly reference previous communications, ensuring that they stay informed and can provide informed responses to clients. This feature enhances organizational efficiency and reduces the chances of miscommunication or forgotten details, ultimately leading to improved operational effectiveness. Integration into the FundSweep platform will provide users with a searchable archive that is easily navigable, reinforcing its role as a comprehensive financial management tool.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Chat History Archive to review a past conversation with a client regarding an invoice dispute that occurred two weeks ago.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep portal, when they navigate to the Chat History Archive, then they should see a list of all past conversations sorted by date, along with the option to search by client name or keywords.

A user wishes to quickly find the chat history pertaining to a specific project discussed with a client several months ago.

Given the user is in the Chat History Archive, when they enter the project name in the search bar, then they should be able to retrieve all relevant conversations filtered by that project name.

A user wants to ensure that all chat histories are retained within the system for future reference and compliance reasons.

Given the user is an admin of the FundSweep portal, when they access the Chat History Archive settings, then they should be able to set a retention period for chat histories (e.g., 6 months, 1 year) and view the current retention settings.

A user needs to revisit a previous client conversation to check for a specific detail regarding payment terms discussed last week.

Given the user selects a conversation from the Chat History Archive, when they open the chat, then they should be able to scroll through the entire conversation and visually identify messages, highlighted with keywords according to any search criteria used.

A user is looking for assurance that the Chat History Archive is regularly and securely backed up to prevent data loss.

Given the user is an admin, when they check the system status dashboard, then they should see a confirmation that regular backups of the Chat History Archive are occurring as per the scheduled plan, with the last backup date displayed.

A user wants to delete obsolete chat histories that are no longer relevant to maintain an organized archive.

Given the user accesses the Chat History Archive, when they select conversations older than a specified date and click delete, then those conversations should be removed from the archive and a confirmation message should appear indicating successful deletion.

Client Feedback Mechanism

"As a client, I want to provide feedback on my chat experience so that the business can improve their service and address my needs better."

Description

The Client Feedback Mechanism feature enables built-in feedback collection from clients regarding their experience with the chat support. This requirement focuses on developing an intuitive interface where clients can provide ratings, comments, and suggestions after interactions. By gathering direct feedback, users can gain insights into service quality and identify areas for improvement. Implementing this feature within the FundSweep platform empowers users to continuously enhance their client interactions based on real-time feedback, ultimately leading to higher client satisfaction and retention rates. Additionally, the collected data provides valuable analytics that users can leverage to adapt their approaches and strategies accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Client Rating Submission After Chat Interaction

Given a client has just completed a chat interaction, when they are prompted to provide feedback, then they should be able to submit a rating on a scale of 1 to 5 stars and provide optional comments that can be saved successfully.

Display Confirmation of Feedback Submission

Given a client has submitted feedback after a chat interaction, when they click the submit button, then a confirmation message should appear stating that their feedback has been successfully recorded.

Reporting and Analytics for Client Feedback

Given feedback has been collected from multiple clients, when the user accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should be able to see aggregated feedback data including average rating and total number of feedback submissions over specified time periods.

Usability of Feedback Interface

Given a client is using the feedback interface after a chat, when they navigate the feedback section, then the interface should be intuitive and user-friendly, allowing for easy input of ratings and comments without prior instructions.

Client Feedback Data Storage

Given that clients have submitted feedback, when the feedback is recorded, then the data should be securely stored in the application database without any loss or corruption, ensuring data integrity.

Access Permissions for Feedback Data

Given feedback data is collected, when a user attempts to access this data, then the system should enforce role-based access control to ensure only authorized users can view or analyze this data.

Feedback Follow-Up Mechanism

Given a user has received client feedback that indicates dissatisfaction, when they view the feedback, then they should see an option to initiate a follow-up communication to resolve the identified issues.

User Availability Status

"As an independent contractor, I want to set my availability status in the chat so that clients understand when I am available to communicate."

Description

The User Availability Status feature allows users to indicate their availability for client communication through the chat interface. Users can set their status as available, busy, or offline, which informs clients of when they can expect a response. This feature is critical for managing client expectations, preventing miscommunication, and reducing frustration for both parties. By making availability clear, users can more effectively manage their time and client interactions, leading to improved collaboration. Implementation of this requirement within the FundSweep platform will include customizable status settings, allowing users to represent their availability accurately, while also keeping clients informed.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets their availability status to 'Available' during business hours to receive client messages seamlessly.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they select 'Available' from the availability options, then their status should reflect 'Available' and clients should be able to see this status in real time.

User updates their status to 'Busy' while working on another client's request, to inform clients of potential delays in responses.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they select 'Busy' from the availability options, then their status should change to 'Busy', and clients should receive a notification indication of their current status.

User goes offline at the end of the day to ensure clients know they are no longer available for communication.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they select 'Offline', then their status should reflect 'Offline', and clients should be unable to initiate new chat conversations.

User selects 'Available' and then immediately receives a chat message from a client, following which they update their status to 'Busy'.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform and has set their status to 'Available', when they receive a chat message, then they can change their status to 'Busy' without losing the chat history.

User customizes their availability status with a personalized message to provide context for clients.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they add a custom message with their status, then the custom message should be visible to clients alongside the availability status.

User switches between 'Available', 'Busy', and 'Offline' multiple times in a session without any issues or delays.

Given the user is actively engaged in the FundSweep platform, when they change their availability status back and forth, then the changes should reflect in real-time without delay or errors in status display.

A client views multiple users' availability statuses to assess who is currently available before initiating a chat.

Given a client is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they check the availability status of users, then they should see accurate and up-to-date statuses for all users they can chat with.

AI Chatbot Integration

"As a small business owner, I want to use an AI chatbot for initial client queries so that I can focus on more complex issues and improve efficiency."

Description

AI Chatbot Integration offers a preliminary support layer by allowing users to integrate an AI-powered chatbot to assist clients with basic inquiries within the chat interface. This requirement encompasses the development of a smart chatbot capable of handling frequently asked questions and providing instant responses, which will alleviate the workload for users. By facilitating quicker resolutions to common issues, clients receive immediate assistance, improving their overall experience. The integration of this feature will enable users to define the FAQ responses the chatbot can provide, ensuring that the support offered aligns with the services and offerings of their businesses, while adding value to the FundSweep platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the integrated chat support feature of FundSweep and configures the AI-powered chatbot with frequently asked questions relevant to their business services.

Given a user has access to the integrated chat support feature, when they configure the AI chatbot with their FAQ responses, then the chatbot should successfully store and display the FAQs during user interactions.

A client initiates a chat query through the FundSweep platform and the integrated AI chatbot responds to common inquiries using the pre-configured FAQs.

Given a client sends a common inquiry to the chat interface, when the inquiry matches one of the stored FAQs, then the chatbot should provide an accurate and relevant response within 3 seconds.

A user reviews the performance of the AI chatbot after it has been active for a week to assess its effectiveness in handling client inquiries.

Given the AI chatbot has been operational for one week, when the user checks the analytics dashboard, then they should see metrics indicating at least 70% of client inquiries were resolved by the chatbot without human intervention.

A user wants to update the FAQ responses of the AI chatbot to improve accuracy based on client feedback.

Given the user has accessed the chatbot configuration menu, when they update an FAQ response and save the changes, then the chatbot should immediately reflect the updated response without requiring system downtime.

A client sends a question to the AI chatbot that is not covered in the provided FAQs.

Given a client sends a query that is not stored in the FAQs, when the AI chatbot identifies the inquiry as unknown, then it should redirect the client to a human support agent within 5 seconds.

A user ensures that the integrated chat support functionality is accessible across different devices, including mobile and desktop.

Given the user accesses FundSweep on a mobile device, when they initiate the chat support feature, then the AI chatbot should display properly and functionality should remain consistent with the desktop experience.

Mobile-Friendly Interface

The Client Portal Pro offers a mobile-friendly interface, allowing clients to access their invoices and make payments from any device. This convenience improves user engagement and ensures that clients can manage their financial commitments anytime, anywhere.

Requirements

Mobile Access and Functionality

"As a small business owner, I want to access my invoices and make payments through my mobile device so that I can manage my financial responsibilities while on the go."

Description

The Mobile-Friendly Interface requirement focuses on optimizing the user experience for clients accessing the FundSweep platform through mobile devices. This includes designing a responsive layout that adjusts seamlessly to various screen sizes, ensuring that features such as invoice viewing and payment processing are fully functional on smartphones and tablets. The integration of touch-friendly navigation elements will enhance accessibility, allowing clients to manage their financial commitments with ease. The expected outcome is improved client satisfaction and engagement due to the convenience of accessing their accounts from anywhere, thus encouraging timely payments and ongoing usage of the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing the FundSweep platform from a smartphone to view an invoice while on-the-go.

Given a client is using a smartphone, when they log into the FundSweep portal, then they should be able to view all invoices with correct formatting, including itemized details and total amounts, without horizontal scrolling.

Using the FundSweep platform on a tablet to process a payment for an invoice.

Given a client is using a tablet, when they navigate to the payment section after selecting an invoice, then they should see a clear and accessible payment button that initiates the payment process without errors or delays.

Navigating the FundSweep platform via a mobile device to locate account settings and update personal information.

Given a client is on a mobile device, when they tap on the settings icon, then they should be able to access and edit their personal information easily with touch-friendly elements, and changes should save successfully without refresh issues.

Receiving a notification on a mobile device about an overdue invoice while using the FundSweep app.

Given a client has an overdue invoice, when they open the FundSweep app on their mobile device, then they should see a prominent notification on the dashboard indicating the overdue status with a link to directly view the invoice.

Using the search functionality on FundSweep mobile interface to find specific invoices quickly.

Given a client wants to find a specific invoice, when they use the search bar on the mobile interface, then the relevant invoices should display instantly, filtered accurately by keyword, date, or amount.

Accessing the FundSweep portal through a mobile browser to generate a report.

Given that a client is using a mobile browser, when they navigate to the report generation section, then the options should be displayed properly, allowing them to select parameters and generate the report without layout issues.

Logging into the FundSweep mobile app with biometric authentication.

Given a client has set up biometric login, when they open the FundSweep app, then they should be able to log in using fingerprint or facial recognition, accessing their account securely without needing to enter a password.

Streamlined Payment Process

"As a freelancer, I want a quick and secure way to pay my invoices from my mobile device so that I can ensure timely payments without hassle."

Description

The Streamlined Payment Process requirement entails developing a secure and efficient payment gateway within the mobile-friendly interface, allowing clients to settle invoices using various payment methods such as credit cards, debit cards, and digital wallets. This should include features like saved payment options for repeat users, providing an intuitive interface that minimizes the number of steps required to complete a payment. The integration of high-security measures, such as encryption and two-factor authentication, will ensure client data is protected. The outcome aims at reducing payment friction, thus increasing the likelihood of timely payments.

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile payment initiation by a client using a stored credit card on a smartphone.

Given a client is logged into the FundSweep mobile interface, when they select an outstanding invoice to pay, then they should see options to pay using saved credit cards, debit cards, or digital wallets. The saved payment method should auto-fill the payment details correctly without additional input.

Client completes a payment transaction using a digital wallet.

Given a client chooses to use a digital wallet for payment, when they confirm the transaction, then the system should successfully process the payment and display a confirmation message along with a digital receipt. The transaction should be recorded in the system with an up-to-date payment status for the invoice.

Ensuring payment security during the checkout process.

Given that the client initiates a payment, when they enter payment details, then the system should prompt for two-factor authentication before processing the payment to enhance security. The payment should only proceed once the client has successfully completed the two-factor authentication.

Checking payment processing feedback in real-time after submission.

Given that the client has submitted a payment, when they view the payment status on their interface, then they should see a real-time update indicating whether the payment is processing, successful, or failed with an appropriate message corresponding to the status.

Client attempts to pay without sufficient funds in their payment method.

Given a client attempts to make a payment and their selected payment method has insufficient funds, when they submit the payment, then the system should reject the payment, display an error message about insufficient funds, and suggest alternative payment methods.

Real-Time Notifications

"As a contractor, I want to receive real-time notifications for my invoices so that I can stay informed and avoid late payments."

Description

The Real-Time Notifications requirement involves implementing a notification system that alerts clients about important actions related to their accounts, such as new invoices, payment confirmations, and upcoming due dates. These notifications should be accessible via push notifications on mobile devices and through email, thereby keeping clients informed and engaged with their financial obligations. This feature is crucial for enhancing user engagement and ensuring that clients do not miss any critical payments or updates, ultimately leading to better financial management for users.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification for New Invoice Creation

Given the client portal user is logged in, when a new invoice is created and sent to the client, then the user should receive a push notification and an email alerting them about the new invoice.

Notification for Payment Confirmation

Given the client has made a payment, when the payment is processed successfully, then the user should receive a push notification and an email confirming the payment receipt.

Notification for Upcoming Due Date

Given a client has an unpaid invoice due within the next 3 days, when the date approaches, then the user should receive a reminder notification via push notification and email about the upcoming due date.

Notification Preferences Management

Given the client is accessing their notification settings, when they select their preferred methods of notification (push or email) and save changes, then the system should update and confirm these preferences without error.

Notification Display on Mobile Interface

Given the client accesses the mobile-friendly interface, when notifications are triggered, then all notifications should be clearly displayed in the notification center of the mobile application.

Notification Filtering Options

Given the user wants to manage their notifications, when they navigate to the notification settings, then they should have the option to filter notifications by type (invoices, payments, reminders).

Customizable Dashboard Widgets

"As a small business owner, I want to customize my dashboard to display the financial information that is most important to me so that I can manage my finances more efficiently."

Description

The Customizable Dashboard Widgets requirement aims to enhance the mobile-friendly interface by allowing users to personalize their dashboards with widgets that reflect their most relevant financial data, such as upcoming invoices, spending summaries, and key performance indicators. This customization feature will empower users by giving them control over their financial management experience, facilitating quicker access to the information that matters most. The expected outcome is a more engaging and relevant user interface that caters to the specific needs and preferences of individual users, ultimately improving their overall experience on the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes their dashboard by selecting and arranging widgets for upcoming invoices, spending summaries, and key performance indicators from their mobile device.

Given that the user is on the dashboard page, when they select widgets to add, arrange, and save their dashboard configuration, then the selected widgets should appear on the dashboard in the specified order after refreshing the page.

User removes a widget from their dashboard on their mobile device.

Given that the user has at least one widget displayed on their dashboard, when they click the remove icon on a widget, then the widget should be removed from the dashboard and no longer visible after refreshing the page.

User accesses their customized dashboard from different devices (e.g. mobile and tablet) to validate consistency in widget arrangement.

Given that the user has customized their dashboard on one device, when they log into their account on a different device, then the dashboard must reflect the same widgets in the same arrangement as configured previously.

User initiates a dashboard reset to default settings.

Given the user wants to reset their dashboard, when they select the reset option, then all customized settings and widgets should revert to the default dashboard layout, which includes only the standard widgets provided by the platform.

User attempts to customize their dashboard with widgets that are not available or compatible with mobile use.

Given that the user is customizing their dashboard, when they attempt to select an incompatible widget, then a notification should appear informing the user that the widget cannot be added to the mobile dashboard.

User inspects the performance of the dashboard widgets for load times and responsiveness on their mobile device.

Given that the user has customized their dashboard, when they load their dashboard, then all widgets should load within 3 seconds to ensure a seamless user experience without lag or performance issues.

Integration with Accounting Software

"As a freelance consultant, I want FundSweep to integrate with my accounting software so that I can easily track all my financial activities in one place."

Description

The Integration with Accounting Software requirement pertains to enabling seamless connectivity between FundSweep and popular accounting software solutions, allowing users to synchronize their financial data automatically. This feature will facilitate easy export of invoices and expense reports, ensuring that users have a comprehensive view of their finances across platforms. Enhanced compatibility with widely-used systems will significantly reduce manual entry and errors, saving users time and improving their overall financial tracking capabilities. The expected outcome is a richer, more efficient financial management experience for users.

Acceptance Criteria

User Synchronizes Data with Accounting Software

Given a user has connected their FundSweep account to an accounting software, When they make changes to their financial data in FundSweep, Then the updates should automatically synchronize with the accounting software within 5 minutes without errors.

User Exports Invoices to Accounting Software

Given a user has created an invoice in FundSweep, When they select the option to export the invoice to the accounting software, Then the invoice should be successfully exported and appear in the accounting software within 2 minutes.

User Views Financial Reports in FundSweep

Given a user has linked their accounting software to FundSweep, When they navigate to the reports section, Then they should see consolidated financial reports that include data from both FundSweep and the accounting software.

System Handles Multiple Accounting Software Connections

Given a user is trying to connect their FundSweep account to multiple accounting software accounts, When they successfully link more than one accounting software, Then the system should allow data synchronization for each software without conflicts or data loss.

User Receives Alerts for Synchronization Issues

Given a user has linked FundSweep with their accounting software, When there is a failure in the data synchronization process, Then the user should receive an alert notification indicating the issue and suggesting actions for resolution.

User Edits Financial Data Post-Synchronization

Given a user has synchronized their financial data with the accounting software, When they edit a financial entry in the accounting software, Then the corresponding data in FundSweep should update accordingly within 5 minutes or less.

User Accesses Multi-Currency Transactions

Given a user operates in different currencies, When they generate an expense report that includes multi-currency transactions, Then the report should display accurate conversions and totals reflecting the current exchange rates and their original currencies.

Goal Visualization Dashboard

This feature provides an interactive dashboard where users can visualize their financial goals through charts and progress bars. By tracking milestones visually, users gain a clearer understanding of their journey towards achieving their goals, motivating them to stay on course and make informed decisions.

Requirements

Dynamic Goal Tracking

"As a small business owner, I want to set and adjust my financial goals so that I can track my progress and stay motivated to reach my targets."

Description

The Dynamic Goal Tracking requirement involves creating an interactive system within the Goal Visualization Dashboard that allows users to set, modify, and track their financial goals. This includes customizable goal settings based on timeframes, amounts, and types of financial achievements users wish to monitor. The system will feature real-time updates and visual indicators, such as progress bars and notifications, to help users see how close they are to reaching their milestones. This functionality encourages goal-oriented behavior, making users more engaged with their financial status and more likely to achieve their desired outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a new financial goal for saving $5,000 in 6 months.

Given the user is on the Goal Visualization Dashboard, when they input a financial goal of saving $5,000 with a timeframe of 6 months, then the system should save the goal and display it with a progress bar indicating zero percent completion.

User modifies an existing financial goal from saving $5,000 to $7,000.

Given the user has previously set a goal of saving $5,000, when they change the amount to $7,000, then the updated goal should be reflected on the dashboard with the new target amount and adjusted progress bar according to the current savings achieved.

User tracks progress toward a financial goal in real-time.

Given the user has made deposits towards their savings goal, when the user refreshes the dashboard, then the system should automatically update the progress bar and milestone notifications based on the latest deposit data.

User receives a notification for hitting a milestone of $2,500 saved towards a $5,000 goal.

Given the user has set a goal to save $5,000, when their total savings reach $2,500, then the system should send a push notification and display a visual alert on the dashboard acknowledging the achievement of this milestone.

User deletes an existing financial goal.

Given the user has an existing goal on the dashboard, when they choose to delete the goal, then the system should remove the goal from the dashboard and provide a confirmation message that the goal has been successfully deleted.

User views a summary of all current financial goals.

Given the user is on the Goal Visualization Dashboard, when they navigate to the summary section, then the system should display all active goals with their respective target amounts, progress bars, and timeframes.

Interactive Charts and Analytics

"As a freelancer, I want to view my financial progress through interactive charts so that I can identify trends and adjust my spending habits effectively."

Description

The Interactive Charts and Analytics requirement will provide users with various visual representations of their financial data related to their goals. Users will be able to select from a range of chart types, such as bar graphs, line charts, and pie charts to visualize their progress, income, expenses, and overall financial health. This feature will integrate AI-driven insights, helping users identify trends and making suggestions for better financial decisions. The aim is to enhance user understanding and engagement with their financial data, allowing for informed decision-making and strategic planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a financial goal and opens the Goal Visualization Dashboard to track their progress and view analytics.

Given a user has an active financial goal and accesses the Goal Visualization Dashboard, When the user selects the desired goal type, Then the dashboard displays the selected goal with its corresponding visual representations including a bar graph, line chart, and pie chart reflecting current progress towards that goal.

Users generate AI-driven insights based on their financial performance presented in the interactive charts.

Given a user views their financial data in the Interactive Charts and Analytics section, When the user clicks on the 'Generate Insights' button, Then the system provides personalized recommendations based on the displayed charts that highlight identified trends and actionable suggestions for financial improvement.

User customizes the type of charts displayed in their Goal Visualization Dashboard to match their preferences for viewing financial data.

Given a user is on the Goal Visualization Dashboard, When the user selects the chart customization options and chooses 'Line Chart' and 'Pie Chart', Then the dashboard refreshes to display the selected chart types with the corresponding financial data visualized accurately.

Users check their overall financial health through an aggregated chart on the dashboard, designed to provide a summary of income and expenses.

Given a user accesses the Goal Visualization Dashboard, When the user views the overall financial health section, Then the dashboard presents an aggregated chart visualizing total income against total expenses over a specified time frame, accurately reflecting current financial status.

User completes a financial goal, utilizing the analytic features of the dashboard to review their achievement level directly post-completion.

Given a user successfully completes a financial goal, When the user views the completion notification on the Goal Visualization Dashboard, Then the system displays a summary chart showcasing the progress made, the time taken to achieve the goal, and suggestions for future financial goals based on historical analytics.

Users encounter an error while trying to load their financial data onto the dashboard.

Given a user attempts to load financial data on the Goal Visualization Dashboard, When there is an error in loading the data due to connectivity issues, Then the dashboard displays a clear error message informing the user of the issue and provides steps to troubleshoot the connection problem.

Milestone Notifications

"As an independent contractor, I want to receive notifications when I reach my financial milestones so that I can feel accomplished and motivated to continue my efforts."

Description

Milestone Notifications will alert users when they are approaching or have achieved significant financial milestones set in their Goal Visualization Dashboard. This feature includes customizable alerts for different milestones, allowing users to choose how and when they want to be notified, such as via email, SMS, or in-app alerts. This timely feedback mechanism not only keeps users informed about their progress but also boosts motivation by celebrating achievements, thereby promoting continued engagement with the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a customizable email notification when they achieve a specified financial milestone in their Goal Visualization Dashboard.

Given the user has set a milestone with email notifications enabled, When the milestone is achieved, Then the user receives an email notification within 10 minutes of achievement.

User can customize the type of notifications they receive for their milestones from a selection of options such as email, SMS, or in-app alerts.

Given the user accesses the notification settings, When the user selects their preferred notification types for milestones and saves the settings, Then the customization is reflected and active for all future notifications.

User approaches a financial milestone and receives a timely reminder notification to encourage them to stay on track.

Given the user has set a milestone with reminder notifications enabled, When the user's current financial status is within 10% of the milestone, Then the user receives a reminder notification 3 days prior to the milestone date.

User verifies the history of notifications received for milestones achieved or approaching milestones.

Given the user accesses the notification history section, When the user selects a specific date range, Then the system displays a list of all milestone notifications received during that period, including type and time.

User tests the SMS notification feature for milestone alerts to ensure they receive timely alerts on their mobile devices.

Given the user has opted for SMS notifications and has entered a valid mobile number, When a milestone is achieved, Then the user should receive an SMS alert within 10 minutes confirming the milestone achievement.

User can edit existing milestones and adjust their notification preferences accordingly.

Given the user selects an existing milestone to edit, When they change the milestone criteria and adjust the notification preferences, Then the new settings are saved and active for that milestone.

User receives a motivational message integrated into the milestone notification to enhance engagement.

Given the user receives a notification for achieving a milestone, When the notification is sent, Then it includes a personalized motivational message that acknowledges their achievement and encourages further progress.

Goal Comparison Feature

"As a small business owner, I want to compare my financial goals with my actual progress so that I can make necessary adjustments and improve my budgeting strategies."

Description

The Goal Comparison Feature will enable users to view their goals against their actual financial performance over time. This feature will allow users to compare different goals, visualize variances, and adjust their strategies as needed. By providing insights into why certain goals may not have been met, users will be able to make more informed decisions regarding their budget and financial strategies, ultimately leading to better financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

As a user, I want to compare my savings goal against my actual savings to see how close I am to achieving my target by the end of the month.

Given that I have set a savings goal, When I access the Goal Comparison Feature, Then I can view a chart that displays both my savings goal and my actual savings, highlighting the variance between them.

As a user, I want to track my spending against my budget goal so that I can identify areas where I may be overspending.

Given that I have established a budget goal for the month, When I view the Goal Comparison Feature, Then I should see a progress bar indicating my spending against that budget, with alerts if I exceed 80% of my budget.

As a user, I want to analyze the reasons for missing a financial goal in order to adjust my future strategies.

Given that I have goals that were not met, When I view the Goal Comparison Feature, Then I should see a detailed report outlining potential reasons for the variance, including missed budget areas or unexpected expenses.

As a user, I want the ability to filter my goals so that I can focus on specific financial objectives during my review.

Given that I have multiple financial goals, When I access the Goal Comparison Feature, Then I can use a filter to display specific goals based on criteria such as time frame or type of goal.

As a user, I want to receive notifications when my financial performance approaches a critical threshold relative to my goals.

Given that I have active financial goals set in the Goal Comparison Feature, When my performance is at 90% of my goal threshold, Then I will receive a notification to alert me to check my budget status.

As a user, I want to save my goal comparison settings so that I can easily access my preferred view in subsequent sessions.

Given that I have customized my view of the Goal Comparison Feature, When I log out and log back in later, Then my previous settings should be automatically loaded, reflecting my last preferences.

As a user, I want to share my goal comparison insights with my financial advisor so they can provide tailored advice based on my performance.

Given that I have completed a goal comparison, When I click on the share option, Then I can successfully send my insights report via email or directly through a secure link.

User-Friendly Customization Options

"As a user of FundSweep, I want to customize my dashboard's look and feel so that it aligns with my personal preferences and helps me focus on my financial goals effectively."

Description

The User-Friendly Customization Options requirement will allow users to customize the appearance and functionality of their Goal Visualization Dashboard. This includes the ability to select color schemes, layout options, and choose which metrics are displayed prominently. By enabling such customization, the feature aims to provide a personalized experience that enhances user satisfaction and allows them to engage with the information in a way that best suits their preferences and needs.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a color scheme for their Goal Visualization Dashboard through a dedicated customization menu.

Given the user is on the Goal Visualization Dashboard customization menu, when they select a color scheme and save changes, then the dashboard should reflect the new color scheme immediately without needing to refresh the page.

User rearranges the layout of the widgets on their Goal Visualization Dashboard according to their preferences.

Given the user is on the Goal Visualization Dashboard, when they drag and drop widgets to their desired positions and save the layout, then the widgets should retain their new positions upon reloading the dashboard.

User chooses which metrics to display prominently on their Goal Visualization Dashboard.

Given the user is customizing their Goal Visualization Dashboard, when they select which metrics to display and confirm the selection, then the dashboard should only show the selected metrics without displaying any others.

User attempts to revert their customizations back to default settings.

Given the user has customized their Goal Visualization Dashboard, when they click the 'Revert to Defaults' option, then the dashboard should reset to the original default settings and layout.

User accesses the Goal Visualization Dashboard on a mobile device to ensure responsiveness of customization options.

Given the user has customized their Goal Visualization Dashboard, when they view it on a mobile device, then all customizations should be displayed appropriately and adjust to fit the screen size without losing functionality.

User receives feedback after applying customizations to their Goal Visualization Dashboard.

Given the user customizes their Goal Visualization Dashboard, when the changes are saved, then the user should receive a confirmation message indicating that their customizations were applied successfully.

User explores the tutorial for customization options available on their Goal Visualization Dashboard.

Given the user is on the customization page, when they click on the tutorial link, then a step-by-step guide should open, explaining each available customization option and how to use them effectively.

Smart Goal Recommendations

Utilizing AI, this feature analyzes users' financial data and spending habits to suggest realistic and personalized financial goals. By providing tailored recommendations, users are better equipped to set achievable objectives that align with their financial capabilities and aspirations.

Requirements

AI-Powered Financial Analysis

"As a small business owner, I want an analysis of my spending habits so that I can identify areas where I can save money and make better financial decisions."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating an AI-driven analysis tool that reviews users' financial data, transaction history, and spending habits to identify patterns, trends, and opportunities. The analysis aims to deliver actionable insights that enable users to make informed financial decisions, such as identifying unnecessary expenses or potential savings. It enhances user engagement by providing personalized feedback and suggestions that align with their financial goals, thus increasing the likelihood of achieving these goals and improving overall financial health.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the AI-Powered Financial Analysis feature from their dashboard to receive insights on spending habits.

Given a user has connected their financial accounts, when they analyze their financial data, then they should receive a report detailing at least three key insights about their spending habits.

The user sets a financial goal based on the AI recommendations provided.

Given the user has obtained the financial analysis report, when they select a recommended goal, then the system should allow them to set that goal and confirm the details without errors.

The user reviews the suggested spending adjustments from the financial analysis.

Given the user has received insights on unnecessary expenses, when they access the adjustments section, then they should see at least two actionable adjustments with associated savings and a confirmation option for implementing those changes.

The user receives a notification about their progress towards the set financial goal after incorporating AI recommendations.

Given the user has set a financial goal, when they log back into the application after a week, then they should see a notification summarizing their progress and any further recommendations for improvement.

The user wants to compare their spending trends over a three-month period using the financial analysis tool.

Given the user has accessed the spending trends feature, when they select a date range of three months, then the system should display a comparative graph showing trends in their expenses and income for that period.

The user seeks help understanding the AI-generated financial recommendations.

Given the user is confused about a recommendation, when they click on the help icon next to the recommendation, then they should receive a clear explanation of the recommendation and its benefits.

The user wants to export their financial analysis report to share with their accountant.

Given the user has reviewed their financial analysis report, when they click on the export button, then they should successfully download the report in PDF format without formatting issues.

Goal Setting Interface

"As a freelancer, I want an easy way to set my financial goals and track them so that I can stay focused on achieving them and adjust if necessary."

Description

This requirement entails the development of a user-friendly interface where users can set, view, and manage their financial goals easily. The interface should be intuitive, allowing for quick input of goals, adjusting timelines, and tracking progress toward each goal. This feature is essential for promoting active user participation in their financial planning and motivating them to engage with the platform. Enhancements such as reminders and visual progress trackers would further encourage users to stay on track with their objectives.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a new financial goal through the Goal Setting Interface.

Given a user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the Goal Setting Interface and enter the details of a new financial goal, then the goal should be saved and displayed in the user’s goal list with the correct details.

User adjusts the timeline for a financial goal.

Given a user has an existing financial goal, when they select the goal and change its timeline, then the updated timeline should be reflected immediately in the user’s goal list and confirmation should be provided.

User tracks the progress of their financial goals.

Given a user has set financial goals, when they access the Goal Setting Interface, then they should see a visual progress tracker for each goal, showing percentage completion based on set targets.

User receives reminders for upcoming deadlines related to their financial goals.

Given a user has set a financial goal with a deadline, when the deadline approaches, then the system should send an automated reminder notification to the user via their chosen communication method.

User can delete an existing financial goal.

Given a user has an existing financial goal, when they choose to delete the goal from the Goal Setting Interface, then the goal should be removed from their goal list and the user should receive a confirmation of deletion.

User views personalized goal recommendations based on spending habits.

Given a user has provided their financial data, when they access the Goal Setting Interface, then they should see AI-generated personalized goal recommendations tailored to their spending habits and financial situation.

Personalized Recommendation Engine

"As an independent contractor, I want personalized goal recommendations based on my spending habits so that I can set realistic financial targets that align with my personal situation."

Description

This requirement aims to create a sophisticated recommendation engine that utilizes AI algorithms to analyze collected user data and generate personalized financial goals based on individual user profiles, financial situations, and spending behavior. The engine will provide users with customized suggestions that are achievable and relevant, encouraging more strategic financial planning. This capability will not only help users grow their understanding of financial management but also keep them engaged with the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Personalized Recommendation Engine after logging into FundSweep and navigates to the Smart Goal Recommendations feature.

Given the user is logged into FundSweep, when they select 'Smart Goal Recommendations' from the dashboard, then the personalized financial goals based on their financial data and spending habits are displayed within 3 seconds with a clear explanation of each goal's relevance.

A user updates their financial data by entering new expenses and income, and then re-accesses the Personalized Recommendation Engine to check if the recommendations have changed.

Given the user has inputted new financial data into FundSweep, when they navigate back to 'Smart Goal Recommendations', then the recommendations should reflect the latest data within 5 seconds and highlight any changes from previous suggestions.

A user reviews their personalized financial goals generated by the Recommendation Engine and provides feedback about the relevance and realism of the suggestions.

Given the user is viewing their generated financial goals, when they select the option to provide feedback, then a feedback form should appear allowing them to rate the suggestions from 1 to 5 and offer comments, with the option to submit this feedback seamlessly.

The user has not interacted with the FundSweep platform for an extended period and logs back in to see if the Personalized Recommendation Engine still provides relevant goals.

Given the user returns after 30 days of inactivity, when they access the Smart Goal Recommendations feature, then they should receive updated personalized financial goals based on their previous data and recent marketplace trends within 3 seconds.

A user who frequently travels abroad and has multi-currency transactions wants to ensure the recommendations from the engine consider their multi-currency spending.

Given the user has a profile with multi-currency transactions recorded, when they access the personalized goal recommendations, then the goals should explicitly account for currency conversions and provide insights relevant to their multi-currency financial behavior.

Real-Time Progress Updates

"As a freelancer, I want to receive real-time updates on my financial goal progress so that I can stay motivated and make timely adjustments if needed."

Description

The Real-Time Progress Updates requirement is focused on providing users with continuous feedback on their progress toward financial goals. This feature would update users in real time, showing how close they are to achieving their goals, with alerts or notifications for milestones reached. This capability is vital to maintaining user motivation and encouraging consistent engagement with the platform as they see their financial objectives materialize.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives real-time updates on their progress toward their financial goals on the dashboard while using the FundSweep platform.

Given a user with established financial goals, when they log into the platform, then they should see a progress bar displaying their current achievement status and the percentage completed towards each goal.

User is notified when they reach a preset financial milestone related to their goals.

Given a user nearing a financial milestone, when they approach that milestone, then the system should send an alert notification to the user via email and in-app notifications.

User can view historical progress on their financial goals over time.

Given a user has been tracking their financial goals for at least one month, when they look at their goal history, then they should see a timeline with details of their past progress updates and milestones reached.

User can customize the frequency of notifications they receive about their financial progress.

Given a user has access to notification settings, when they adjust the frequency of updates, then the system should respect these settings and only notify the user according to their preferences.

User can provide feedback on the relevance of the progress updates received.

Given a user has received at least three progress updates, when they click on the feedback option, then they should be able to rate the helpfulness of the updates and submit their comments.

Users can compare their progress with peers using the FundSweep platform, enhancing motivation.

Given a user has opted into peer comparison, when they view their progress dashboard, then they should see a comparison chart of their progress against anonymized peer data.

User Feedback and Adjustment System

"As a small business owner, I want to give feedback on my financial recommendations so that my goals can be adjusted to better fit my evolving business needs."

Description

This requirement will implement a system that allows users to provide feedback on their financial goals and recommendations. Based on user input, the system will adjust recommendations, timelines, and goals accordingly. This iterative approach to goal management ensures that the feature remains relevant and valuable to users, accommodating changing financial situations. The ability to adapt goals based on user experience will enhance the reliability of the recommendations and improve user satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User provides feedback on financial goals after an initial recommendation is made by the AI-driven system.

Given a user has received financial goal recommendations, when they provide feedback indicating that a goal is unrealistic, then the system must update the recommendations to reflect more achievable goals within 24 hours of feedback submission.

User adjusts their financial situation, impacting their spending habits and goals, and provides updated feedback to the system.

Given a user has updated their financial situation through the platform, when they submit new feedback reflecting these changes, then the system will adjust all related recommendations within 48 hours to align with the new financial state.

User resistance to adjusting financial goals and the impact this has on their satisfaction with the recommendations.

Given a user consistently declines to accept suggested financial goal adjustments, when they provide feedback indicating dissatisfaction with the recommendations, then the system must log this feedback and notify the product team for further analysis.

User seeks clarification on how goals are determined and the role of their feedback in shaping future recommendations.

Given a user requests information about how their feedback impacts goal recommendations, when they view the feedback response guide within the platform, then the guide must provide clear and concise explanations of the recommendation process and feedback integration.

User completes a set of financial goals and provides feedback on their experience with the goal recommendation system.

Given a user has completed their financial goals, when they submit feedback on the effectiveness of the goal recommendations, then the system must analyze this feedback and highlight key success stories in the user community within the next update cycle.

User inputs conflicting goals reflecting different financial priorities, leading to feedback on the feasibility of these goals.

Given a user submits conflicting financial goals that may not be realistically attainable, when they provide feedback regarding their priority, then the system will highlight potential conflicts and suggest alternative solutions to resolve them within the next goal review.

User experiences a change in financial circumstances due to external factors (e.g., economic shifts, personal situations) and modifies their feedback accordingly.

Given a user reports external financial changes through the platform, when they submit feedback reflecting new priorities, then the system must assess these changes and revise the current goal recommendations within 72 hours.

Milestone Alert System

The Milestone Alert System sends notifications to users when they reach significant milestones in their financial goals. These alerts serve as positive reinforcement, encouraging users to maintain their momentum and celebrating their progress along the way.

Requirements

Milestone Trigger Configuration

"As a small business owner, I want to set custom financial milestones so that I can receive alerts when I achieve my goals and maintain my motivation."

Description

The Milestone Trigger Configuration requirement allows users to set and customize their financial milestones within the FundSweep platform. Users can define specific financial thresholds or goals that, once reached, will activate the Milestone Alert System. This feature benefits users by enabling personalized financial tracking according to their unique needs, ensuring they remain motivated and aware of their progress. The configuration integrates seamlessly with the existing dashboard, providing an intuitive interface for users to easily input and modify their milestone criteria, which enhances user engagement and satisfaction with the tool.

Acceptance Criteria

User is able to access the Milestone Trigger Configuration from the FundSweep dashboard to set financial milestones based on specific thresholds.

Given the user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the Milestone Trigger Configuration section, then they should see an intuitive interface to input their financial thresholds.

User sets a financial milestone for reaching $5,000 in savings through the Milestone Trigger Configuration and saves it successfully.

Given the user inputs the threshold of $5,000 and clicks 'Save', when they revisit the Milestone Trigger Configuration page, then they should see the saved milestone reflect the $5,000 threshold accurately.

User modifies an existing financial milestone from $10,000 to $12,000 in the Milestone Trigger Configuration.

Given the user changes the milestone amount from $10,000 to $12,000 and clicks 'Update', when they view the milestone configuration again, then the displayed milestone should show the updated amount of $12,000.

User receives a notification upon reaching their set milestone of $12,000.

Given the user has set a milestone of $12,000, when their account balance reaches $12,000, then they should receive a notification confirming that they have achieved their financial milestone.

User attempts to set an invalid milestone amount in the Milestone Trigger Configuration.

Given the user enters a milestone amount of $-1 and attempts to save it, when they try to submit the configuration, then the system should display an error message indicating that the milestone amount must be positive.

User accesses the Milestone Trigger Configuration from a mobile device.

Given the user is using the FundSweep mobile app, when they navigate to the Milestone Trigger Configuration section, then they should see a responsive design that allows them to set milestones easily.

Milestone Notification Customization

"As a freelancer, I want to customize the notifications I receive when I hit my financial milestones so that I feel more connected to my progress."

Description

The Milestone Notification Customization requirement allows users to personalize the notifications they receive once they reach their financial milestones. Users can choose the type of alerts they want (e.g., email, SMS, in-app) and customize the content of the messages to reflect their preferences. This flexibility enhances user experience by making notifications more meaningful and relevant. The customization integrates with the existing notification system, ensuring that users receive timely reminders and encouragement that align with their financial journey.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes Notification Method

Given a user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they navigate to the Milestone Notification settings, then they should be able to select between email, SMS, or in-app notifications as their preferred method.

User Customizes Notification Content

Given a user has selected their preferred notification method, when they edit the content of the notification, then the system should save the changes and reflect the new message in the preview section immediately.

User Receives Customized Notification

Given a user has reached a financial milestone and has set up customized notifications, when the milestone is achieved, then the user should receive the notification through their selected method (email, SMS, or in-app) with the custom message they set.

User Edits Notification Preferences

Given a user is on the Milestone Notification settings page, when they change their notification preferences from SMS to email, then the system should update their preferences and confirm through an on-screen alert.

User Sees Notification History

Given a user reaches multiple financial milestones, when they access the Milestone Notification history, then they should see a list of all notifications sent, including the milestone reached and the date they were sent.

System Validates Notification Preferences

Given a user has configured their notification settings, when they submit their preferences, then the system should validate the selections to ensure at least one method is selected before allowing the user to save.

User Receives Notification Prefilled Templates

Given a user is customising their notification content, when they access the editing interface, then the user should see a list of prefilled message templates as options for quick selection or customization.

Milestone Progress Dashboard Widget

"As an independent contractor, I want to see a visual progress bar for my financial milestones on my dashboard so that I can easily track my achievements and stay motivated."

Description

The Milestone Progress Dashboard Widget requirement introduces a visual representation of users' progress toward their financial milestones directly on their dashboard. This widget displays a progress bar or percentage indicating how close users are to achieving their set goals. By providing a visual cue of their accomplishments, users are motivated to stay on track with their financial planning. This feature integrates with the user dashboard, ensuring it is easily accessible and updates dynamically as users make progress towards their milestones.

Acceptance Criteria

User Views Milestone Progress on Dashboard

Given a user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they access the dashboard, then the Milestone Progress Dashboard Widget should be visible and display the user's current progress towards their financial milestones.

Dynamic Updates to Milestone Progress Widget

Given a user updates their financial entries or completes tasks related to their milestones, when the system processes these changes, then the Milestone Progress Dashboard Widget should automatically refresh to reflect the updated progress immediately.

Visual Notification of Milestone Achievement

Given a user achieves a financial milestone, when this milestone is reached, then the Milestone Progress Dashboard Widget should visually highlight this achievement with a celebratory animation or graphic indicating that the milestone has been reached.

Multiple Milestones Display in One Widget

Given a user has set multiple financial milestones, when the user views the Milestone Progress Dashboard Widget, then the widget should display progress for each milestone clearly, along with an overall progress percentage for all milestones combined.

Accessibility of Milestone Progress Widget

Given a user has accessibility needs, when the Milestone Progress Dashboard Widget is viewed, then it should be compatible with screen readers and provide alt text for visual content, ensuring all users can access milestone information

Customization of Widget View Settings

Given a user has preferences for how they view their progress, when they access widget settings, then they should be able to customize the display to show either percentage complete or visual bar representation for their milestones.

Save Customization Settings for Future Sessions

Given a user customizes the Milestone Progress Dashboard Widget, when their session ends and they log back in, then the widget should retain and display the previously saved customization settings upon re-entry.

Milestone Achievement Encouragement Messages

"As a user of FundSweep, I want to receive motivational messages when I achieve my financial milestones so that I feel encouraged to continue my financial management efforts."

Description

The Milestone Achievement Encouragement Messages requirement provides users with motivational messages or tips when they reach significant milestones. These messages can include words of encouragement, financial advice, or suggested next steps, which support users in maintaining their financial momentum. This feature strengthens user retention by reinforcing positive behaviors and providing value-added content that enhances the overall user experience. The messages are integrated into the alert system to ensure timely delivery upon milestone achievement.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a motivational message after achieving their first financial milestone.

Given that the user has successfully achieved their first financial milestone, when they log into FundSweep, then they should receive a motivational message that acknowledges their achievement and provides relevant financial tips.

User receives timely encouragement messages after hitting multiple financial milestones.

Given that the user has reached multiple financial milestones within a month, when each milestone is achieved, then the user should receive a distinct encouragement message for each milestone promptly via the Milestone Alert System.

User can customize the type of encouragement messages they receive.

Given that the user is in the settings section of FundSweep, when they select their preferences for the types of encouragement messages they wish to receive, then the system should save these preferences and deliver messages aligned with their chosen categories.

User can track their progress through the encouragement messages they receive.

Given that the user has reached various milestones, when they view their milestone achievement history, then the messages received should be listed alongside each milestone indicating the content and date of delivery.

User engagement is measured through the response to encouragement messages.

Given that encouragement messages are sent to users, when users interact with these messages (e.g., by clicking on tips or advice), then the system should track and report engagement metrics to evaluate their effectiveness for future improvements.

User can opt-out of receiving encouragement messages.

Given that the user is receiving encouragement messages, when they choose to opt-out through the account settings, then they should immediately stop receiving these messages and confirmation should be displayed to them.

Milestone Achievement Report Generation

"As a small business owner, I want to create reports of my financial milestones so that I can see my progress over time and understand where I can improve."

Description

The Milestone Achievement Report Generation requirement allows users to generate comprehensive reports detailing their financial progress and milestone achievements over time. Users can choose specific date ranges and types of milestones to include in the report. This functionality helps users reflect on their journey, understand their financial growth, and make informed decisions moving forward. The report generation feature is integrated with the analytics section of FundSweep, enabling users to access their data in a digestible format.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a Milestone Achievement Report for the first quarter of the financial year, selecting specific milestones related to revenue growth.

Given a user is logged into their FundSweep account, When they navigate to the report generation section and select the first quarter of the financial year with revenue growth milestones, Then a report is generated that includes all milestones achieved within that date range, displayed in a clear format with relevant analytics.

User wants to generate a Milestone Achievement Report that includes expenditures and savings milestones for the last six months.

Given a user is logged into their FundSweep account and selects to generate a report for the last six months, When they choose the options to include expenditures and savings milestones, Then the report accurately reflects all milestones related to expenditures and savings achieved during that period, with a visual representation of progress.

User attempts to generate a Milestone Achievement Report with an invalid date range.

Given a user is on the report generation interface, When they input an invalid date range (e.g., start date after end date), Then an error message is displayed indicating that the date range is invalid and the report is not generated.

User generates a Milestone Achievement Report and shares it via email with their financial advisor.

Given a user successfully generates a Milestone Achievement Report, When they choose the option to share it via email, Then the report is sent to the specified email address, and the user receives a confirmation notification.

User generates a Milestone Achievement Report and previews it before downloading.

Given a user has selected the options for their Milestone Achievement Report, When they click on the preview button, Then a preview of the report is displayed where the user can review the contents before proceeding to download.

User accesses the Milestone Achievement Report Generation feature through the main dashboard.

Given a user is logged into their FundSweep account, When they navigate from the main dashboard to the analytics section, Then they should find and access the Milestone Achievement Report Generation feature without any issue.

Goal Breakdown Feature

This feature allows users to break down larger financial goals into smaller, manageable tasks or sub-goals. By segmenting their objectives, users can focus on incremental successes, making goal achievement feel more attainable and less overwhelming.

Requirements

Goal Creation Interface

"As a small business owner, I want to create specific financial goals so that I can organize and track my financial progress more effectively."

Description

The Goal Creation Interface allows users to input and create specific financial goals within the platform. This interface should provide fields for goal title, description, target amount, targeted deadline, and priority level. Users should be able to save these goals, edit them as needed, and delete those that are no longer relevant. This feature ensures that users have a clear understanding of their financial objectives and can manage them effectively, aligning with the overarching goal of simplifying financial management for small business owners and freelancers.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new financial goal using the Goal Creation Interface.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they navigate to the Goal Creation Interface and fill in the goal title, description, target amount, targeted deadline, and priority level and click save, then the new goal should be saved and displayed in the user's goals list.

User edits an existing financial goal.

Given the user has an existing financial goal, when they select the edit option for that goal, update the goal details (title, description, target amount, targeted deadline, or priority level), and click save, then the updated goal should reflect the new details in the user's goals list.

User deletes a financial goal that is no longer relevant.

Given the user has a financial goal they wish to delete, when they select the delete option for that goal and confirm the deletion, then the goal should be removed from the user's goals list and no longer visible in the interface.

User views all created financial goals at once.

Given the user has multiple financial goals saved in the system, when they navigate to the goals section of the dashboard, then all active goals should be displayed in a list format with relevant details (title, target amount, deadline, and priority level).

User attempts to create a financial goal without filling in all required fields.

Given the user accesses the Goal Creation Interface, when they leave any required fields blank and attempt to save the goal, then an error message should be displayed indicating the missing required fields and the goal should not be saved.

User checks the system's response time when creating a goal.

Given the user is using the Goal Creation Interface, when they fill in all fields and click save, then the system should save the goal and respond within 2 seconds, confirming that the goal has been created successfully.

User assigns a priority level to a financial goal.

Given the user is setting up a new financial goal, when they select a priority level (high, medium, low) from the dropdown menu and save the goal, then the goal should reflect the selected priority level in the goals list.

Sub-goal Segmentation

"As a freelancer, I want to break my financial goals into sub-goals so that I can feel accomplished with each small victory along the way to my larger target."

Description

The Sub-goal Segmentation feature enables users to break down their financial goals into smaller, manageable tasks or sub-goals. Each sub-goal can have its own deadline and monetary amount, allowing for incremental achievement and a clearer path to the overall goal. This segmentation aids users in forming actionable steps, making the overall objective feel less overwhelming while boosting motivation through small successes. The feature should seamlessly integrate into the user's goal profile, providing an intuitive method for tracking multiple achievements.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to break down their financial goal of saving $10,000 into smaller sub-goals to track progress more effectively.

Given a user is on their goal profile, when they select 'Add Sub-goal', then they should be able to input a sub-goal name, deadline, and amount, and see it reflected in their goal summary.

User has created multiple sub-goals and wants to adjust the deadlines for specific tasks.

Given the user views their list of sub-goals, when they select a sub-goal and change its deadline, then the updated deadline should be saved and displayed correctly.

User is monitoring their progress towards their main financial goal and wants to see how much of the total has been completed based on the completed sub-goals.

Given the user has completed several sub-goals, when they view their main goal progress, then the percentage of completion should reflect the sum of the completed sub-goals relative to the main goal.

User wants to delete a sub-goal that they no longer wish to pursue.

Given the user is on their list of sub-goals, when they choose to delete a sub-goal, then the sub-goal should be removed from the list and the overall goal should adjust accordingly.

User intends to view detailed analytics of their progress across sub-goals to motivate further actions.

Given the user selects the analytics option for their goal, when they analyze the sub-goals, then they should see visual representations (e.g., charts) of their progress and achievements.

User wants to ensure that the sub-goals feature integrates smoothly with the existing financial management system.

Given the user navigates from the financial dashboard to their goal profile, when they access the sub-goals feature, then it should load without errors and display all functionalities as expected.

Progress Tracking Dashboard

"As an independent contractor, I want to view my financial goal progress on a dashboard so that I can track my accomplishments and stay motivated toward my objectives."

Description

The Progress Tracking Dashboard visually presents users' progress toward their financial goals and sub-goals. This dashboard should include visual aids such as progress bars or pie charts, reflecting the completion percentage of each goal and sub-goal. The feature should provide notifications for upcoming deadlines and reminders for tasks associated with the sub-goals. This functionality assists users in staying focused on their financial objectives while offering insights into areas that may require additional effort, enhancing user engagement and motivation.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Progress Tracking Dashboard to assess their financial goal progress for the first time after setting their goals and sub-goals within the FundSweep app.

Given that the user has set at least one financial goal and its associated sub-goals, when they navigate to the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then they should see visual aids that accurately reflect the completion percentage of each goal and sub-goal (using progress bars or pie charts).

A user is notified about an upcoming deadline for one of their financial sub-goals in the Progress Tracking Dashboard.

Given that a sub-goal has a deadline approaching within the next week, when the user accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then they should receive a notification indicating the upcoming deadline and reminders for associated tasks of the sub-goal.

The user wants to track their progress after completing a few tasks associated with their financial sub-goals.

Given that the user has completed task(s) associated with a sub-goal, when they refresh the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then the visual aids should update immediately to reflect the new completion percentage of the sub-goal.

A user wants to explore their progress on multiple financial goals simultaneously.

Given that the user has set multiple financial goals, when they view the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then they should be able to see all of their goals and sub-goals represented clearly with individual progress indicators for each, allowing for easy comparison of their progress.

The user accesses help documentation through the Progress Tracking Dashboard for better understanding of the visual aids.

Given that a user is unsure how to interpret the visual aids on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they click on the help icon, then they should be presented with help documentation that clearly explains how to read and understand the progress indicators.

The user effectively uses the dashboard to optimize their efforts towards their financial goals.

Given that a user is viewing their Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they analyze the insights provided about areas needing attention, then they should be able to identify specific actions to take to improve their progress on goals that are lagging.

Goal Adjustment Alerts

"As a small business owner, I want to receive alerts when I'm falling behind on my financial goals so that I can take corrective action before it's too late."

Description

The Goal Adjustment Alerts feature provides users with notifications when they are off track to meet their financial goals or if their deadlines are approaching without sufficient progress. This feature should allow users to set personalized thresholds for alerts, considering their specific financial situations and preferences. These alerts will encourage timely adjustments to their plans, promoting proactive financial management. The benefit lies in enhancing user accountability by keeping them informed and engaged with their financial aspirations.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification alert when their financial goal deadline is approaching without satisfactory progress.

Given that the user has set a financial goal and a deadline, when the system detects that the user is not making progress towards that goal, then the user should receive a notification alert 7 days before the deadline.

User sets personalized thresholds for receiving goal adjustment alerts based on their financial situation.

Given that the user is on the Goal Adjustment Alerts settings page, when they input their preferred threshold values for alerts, then those values should be saved and reflected in the notification settings immediately.

User receives an alert when they exceed their personalized threshold without meeting the goal milestone.

Given that the user has set a threshold for notifications, when the user fails to meet their goal milestone after exceeding the threshold, then an alert should be triggered and sent to the user immediately.

User can view a history of past alerts related to their financial goals.

Given that the user navigates to the alert history section, when they request to view past alerts, then they should see a chronological list of all alerts received, including the type of alert and timestamp.

User can disable goal adjustment alerts for individual goals if desired.

Given that the user is viewing their active financial goals, when they select an individual goal and choose to disable alerts, then the alerts for that specific goal should be turned off successfully and confirmed via a message.

User receives a summary of their goal adjustment alerts at the end of each month.

Given that the user has received multiple alerts throughout the month, when the end of the month is reached, then the user should receive a consolidated summary report of all goal adjustment alerts sent during that month via email.

User can customize the frequency of the alerts they receive about financial goals.

Given that the user is in the Goal Adjustment Alerts settings, when they select their desired frequency for receiving alerts (daily, weekly, or monthly), then the system should save this preference and apply it to all future alerts going forward.

Goal History Log

"As a user, I want to access my past financial goals so that I can learn from my previous successes and failures to set better objectives in the future."

Description

The Goal History Log maintains a record of users' past goals, allowing them to reflect on their financial journey over time. This log should display completed goals alongside those that were modified or canceled, providing insights into users' decision-making processes and financial growth. It can offer valuable analytics on goal completion rates and effectiveness, assisting users in learning from past experiences. This feature encourages a continuous improvement mindset in financial goal-setting and management.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to view their complete financial journey including all past goals in the Goal History Log.

Given a user accesses the Goal History Log, When they view the log, Then it displays a chronological list of all completed, modified, and canceled goals with respective dates and statuses.

A user is reflecting on their goal completion rates over a specified period using the Goal History Log.

Given a user selects a date range in the Goal History Log, When they apply the filter, Then the log updates to show only goals from that specific date range along with completion analytics.

User modifies a previously set goal and expects to see changes in the Goal History Log.

Given a user modifies an existing goal, When they save the changes, Then the Goal History Log reflects the updated goal information and indicates that it has been modified.

User cancels a financial goal and reviews the Goal History Log to find this action documented.

Given a user cancels a goal, When they check the Goal History Log, Then the log displays the canceled goal along with a reason provided by the user for the cancellation.

User is looking to analyze their goal-setting performance over the past year.

Given a user is on the Goal History Log, When they request analytics on goal completion rates for the past year, Then the system generates and displays a summary of completion rates and insights derived from past goals.

A user wants to quickly navigate to their most significant milestones in their financial journey.

Given a user accesses the Goal History Log, When they sort the goals by significance, Then the log reorders to show significant goals at the top, clearly indicating their impact and completion status.

Customized Goal Strategies

Users can create customized strategies for each financial goal based on their unique circumstances. This feature provides actionable insights and steps tailored to individual goals, empowering users to develop a concrete plan that enhances their chances of success.

Requirements

Custom Goal Creation

"As a small business owner, I want to create personalized financial goals so that I can track my progress and stay motivated to achieve my desired financial outcomes."

Description

This requirement allows users to formulate personalized financial goals by providing an intuitive interface for inputting goal-specific details such as target amounts, deadlines, and associated categories. Custom Goal Creation enhances user engagement by empowering users to set tailored objectives aligned with their unique financial situations. It integrates seamlessly with the FundSweep platform to ensure that users have a centralized approach to goal management, facilitating better financial planning and accountability.

Acceptance Criteria

User successfully creates a customized financial goal with target amount and deadline.

Given the user is on the Custom Goal Creation page, when they fill in the target amount as $5000, set the deadline to '2024-06-30', and select the category 'Savings', then the system should validate the input and display a success message indicating the goal has been created.

User tries to create a goal with a missing target amount.

Given the user is on the Custom Goal Creation page, when they leave the target amount field empty and fill in the rest of the details, then the system should display an error message indicating that the target amount is required.

User edits an existing financial goal to change the target amount and deadline.

Given the user has an existing goal with a target amount of $3000 and a deadline of '2024-03-15', when they update the target amount to $4000 and change the deadline to '2024-05-01', then the system should reflect the updated goal details accurately and display a confirmation message.

User attempts to create a goal with an invalid target amount (negative value).

Given the user is on the Custom Goal Creation page, when they enter a negative value for the target amount, then the system should provide an error indicating that the target amount must be a positive number.

User views the list of created goals to confirm successful creation.

Given the user has created a goal successfully, when they navigate to the 'My Goals' section, then the new goal should be displayed in the list with the correct details including target amount, deadline, and category.

User receives personalized insights based on their created goals.

Given the user has created multiple goals, when they access the insights dashboard, then the system should analyze the goals and provide tailored recommendations for improving their savings strategy based on their goal attributes.

Goal Strategy Recommendations

"As a freelancer, I want to receive personalized advice on how to achieve my financial goals so that I can make informed decisions and take effective actions to improve my financial situation."

Description

This requirement involves developing an algorithm that analyzes user data to offer tailored strategies for achieving each financial goal. The recommendations will include specific steps, tips, and best practices based on the user’s financial history, preferences, and goals. This feature enhances the user experience by providing actionable insights that increase the likelihood of successful goal attainment. By leveraging AI, it continuously improves suggestions over time based on user feedback and outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the FundSweep platform to create a financial goal, such as saving for a new computer, and wants to receive tailored strategy recommendations that align with this goal.

Given the user has successfully logged into FundSweep and created a financial goal, When the user requests strategy recommendations, Then the system should provide at least three customized strategies that include actionable steps, timelines, and tips for achieving the specified goal.

After the user receives strategy recommendations for saving for a new computer, they provide feedback on the recommendations, indicating which steps they found helpful and which were not.

Given the user provides feedback on the strategy recommendations, When the feedback is submitted, Then the algorithm should analyze this feedback to improve future recommendations for that user and display a confirmation message that their feedback was received.

A user has multiple financial goals simultaneously and needs to prioritize them based on their unique financial situation and past spending behavior.

Given the user has multiple financial goals, When they request prioritization, Then the system should analyze their financial history and preferences and return a ranked list of goals with recommended focus areas and actionable strategies for each.

The user wants to see how the customized strategies for their financial goals improve over time based on their interactions and progress within the FundSweep platform.

Given the user interacts with FundSweep over time, When they check the progress of their financial goals, Then the system should display an overview of how the strategy recommendations have adapted and improved based on their past behavior and success rates.

A new user joins FundSweep and has no financial history, yet seeks personalized strategies for their goals based on a questionnaire about their financial situation.

Given a new user signs up for FundSweep and completes the initial questionnaire, When they select a financial goal, Then the system should generate tailored strategy recommendations based solely on the information provided in the questionnaire, ensuring relevance and usability.

The user experiences a significant life event (e.g., job loss) that necessitates a change in their financial goals and strategies.

Given the user reports a significant life change in FundSweep, When they request updated strategy recommendations, Then the system should prompt the user to reevaluate their financial goals and offer new, relevant strategies based on the updated situation.

Progress Tracking Dashboard

"As an independent contractor, I want to visualize my progress towards my financial goals so that I can stay organized and make necessary adjustments to my plans."

Description

This requirement encompasses the creation of a visually engaging dashboard that allows users to monitor their progress towards each financial goal in real-time. Users will have access to graphical representations of their milestones, financial contributions, and timelines, making it easier to understand their journey towards goal completion. The integration of this feature within the existing FundSweep platform will provide users with a holistic view of their financial landscape, thereby enhancing motivation and accountability.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard to view their financial goals after logging into the FundSweep platform.

Given the user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of each financial goal, including progress bars indicating the percentage of completion.

User adds a new financial goal to the Progress Tracking Dashboard and inputs relevant financial contributions and timelines.

Given the user selects 'Add New Goal' on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they input goal details and save, then the new goal should appear on the dashboard with accurate contributions and updated progress calculations reflected.

User wants to review their progress on financial goals over various time frames using the Progress Tracking Dashboard.

Given the user is on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they select different time frames (e.g., daily, weekly, monthly) for progress tracking, then the visual representations of milestones and contributions should update accordingly to reflect the selected time frame.

User interacts with the graphical representations on the Progress Tracking Dashboard to gain deeper insights into their financial journey.

Given the user hovers over specific milestones on the dashboard graphs, then detailed tooltips should appear, displaying exact figures for contributions and timelines associated with each financial goal.

User uses the Progress Tracking Dashboard to assess their overall financial health in relation to their goals.

Given the user views the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then an overall financial health summary should be displayed, indicating total contributions towards all goals and average progress percentage across all goals.

User monitors any changes made to their financial goals on the Progress Tracking Dashboard.

Given the user has edited a financial goal, when they return to the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then the updated information must be reflected immediately without requiring a page refresh.

User sees notifications on the Progress Tracking Dashboard if they are falling behind on any financial goal.

Given the user has goals with deadlines, when the system detects that a goal's completion date is approaching without meeting the contribution milestones, then a notification should be displayed on the dashboard highlighting the specific goal at risk and suggested actions to improve progress.

Milestone Alerts

"As a user, I want to receive alerts when I achieve important milestones in my financial journey so that I can celebrate my successes and stay motivated to continue pursuing my goals."

Description

This requirement aims to implement a notification system that alerts users when they reach significant milestones related to their financial goals. These alerts will serve as motivational reminders and can also suggest next steps or adjustments to their strategies. This feature not only celebrates user achievements but reinforces user engagement within the platform, encouraging consistent interaction and commitment to financial planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert upon reaching a predefined financial goal milestone, such as saving 50% of their target amount for a new equipment purchase.

Given the user has set a financial goal and has reached 50% of that goal, when the alert system is triggered, then the user should receive a notification through email and within the application notifying them of the milestone.

User logs into the FundSweep application after reaching a milestone and views a motivational message celebrating their achievement and suggesting next steps.

Given the user has received a milestone alert, when they log into the application, then they should see a prominent banner displaying a celebratory message and suggested next steps relevant to their goal.

The alert system respects user preferences regarding notification frequency and methods, including options to receive alerts via SMS, push notification, or email.

Given the user has customized their notification preferences in the settings, when the milestone is reached, then the system should deliver the alert through the selected method(s) only.

User can view a log of past milestone alerts to track their progress over time.

Given the user has a history of reaching milestone alerts, when they access the milestones section in the application, then they should see a chronological list of all past alerts with achievement dates and descriptions.

User can customize the thresholds for milestone alerts based on their personal financial strategy.

Given the user is in the settings section for their financial goals, when they adjust the threshold for milestone alerts, then the system should save the new threshold and apply it to future milestone calculations.

The system accurately calculates and updates the progress towards financial goals every time a transaction is recorded.

Given the user has entered a new transaction, when the financial goal progress is recalculated, then the milestone alerts should be accurately triggered based on the updated financial data.

Users receive a reminder alert if they have not interacted with their financial goals within the last month, reinforcing engagement.

Given the user has not logged any activity related to their goals in the last month, when the time condition is met, then the system should send a reminder alert via their preferred notification method encouraging them to revisit their financial strategies.

Integration with Expense Tracking

"As a small business owner, I want my financial goals to be linked to my spending habits so that I can manage my finances more effectively and reach my objectives."

Description

This requirement involves the seamless integration of the customized goal strategies with existing expense tracking functionalities. Users will have the option to align their spending habits with their financial goals, creating budget categories specifically for their goals. This integration will promote a comprehensive financial management experience, ensuring that users can maintain awareness of their expenditures relative to their goals, ultimately fostering better financial discipline.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets a financial goal for saving $1,000 for a new laptop and creates a customized strategy to allocate budget for this goal.

Given the user has created a financial goal for $1,000, when they categorize their expenses, then they should be able to see a new budget category for 'Laptop Savings' reflecting their goal amount and remaining balance.

User integrates their existing expense tracking data with the new customized goal strategies feature.

Given the user has existing expense tracking data, when they opt to link this data to their customized goal strategies, then the system should accurately reflect the user's past expenses against their specified goals.

User receives feedback on their spending habits in relation to their financial goals after one month of tracking.

Given one month has passed since the user aligned their expenses with their goals, when they check their dashboard, then they should receive actionable insights highlighting discrepancies between their spending habits and their financial goals.

User creates a budget for their financial goal but exceeds it in spending.

Given the user has set a budget for their goal-related expenses, when their actual spending exceeds the budgeted amount, then the system should prompt the user with a warning alert indicating they are over budget and suggest adjustments to meet their goal.

User wants to modify their customized strategy for a financial goal based on changing circumstances.

Given the user wishes to revise their strategy, when they access the goal settings, then they should be able to easily adjust their budget categories and expense allocations without losing previous data.

User seeks to review their progress towards financial goals over a specified period.

Given a selected date range, when the user requests a progress report for their customized strategies, then the system should generate a report showing the percentage of goal completion and key metrics related to their expenses.

Peer Accountability Network

The Peer Accountability Network allows users to connect with friends or other FundSweep users to share their financial goals and progress. This social feature fosters a supportive environment where users can motivate each other, share advice, and celebrate successes together.

Requirements

User Connection Profiles

"As a FundSweep user, I want to create a connection profile so that I can share my financial goals with others and receive support from my peers."

Description

This requirement enables individual FundSweep users to create and customize their connection profiles within the Peer Accountability Network. Users can set their financial goals, share their progress and interests, and indicate their desire to collaborate with peers. The profiles should include secure personal information, goal tracking metrics, and the ability to set privacy levels for shared information. This feature enhances the social aspect of the platform, encouraging users to engage more deeply with their community. It should integrate seamlessly with existing user accounts on FundSweep and provide a user-friendly interface for customizing profiles. The implementation will lead to increased user interaction and satisfaction, as members can find and connect with like-minded individuals for mutual support and motivation.

Acceptance Criteria

User Profile Creation and Customization

Given a user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they navigate to the Peer Accountability Network section and select 'Create Profile', then they should be able to enter their financial goals, share progress, and select privacy settings for their profile.

Profile Visibility Controls

Given a user has created a connection profile, when they save their privacy preferences, then the settings should effectively restrict or allow visibility of their profile information to other selected users.

Integration with Existing Accounts

Given a user has an existing FundSweep account, when they access the Peer Accountability Network profile setup, then the connection profile should automatically pull and display their relevant existing account information without requiring additional data entry.

Goal Tracking Metrics Display

Given a user has input financial goals in their connection profile, when they save and view their profile, then they should see the goals represented with clear metrics (e.g., percentage completed) in a visually appealing format.

Collaborative Features Access

Given that a user has created and customized their profile, when they connect with other users, then they should be able to view peers’ goals and progress if those peers have designated their profile to be visible to them.

Profile Edit Functionality

Given a user has an existing connection profile, when they navigate to the profile settings, then they should be able to update their financial goals, privacy settings, and interests without issues.

Notification Settings for Peer Updates

Given a user has friends connected through the Peer Accountability Network, when their peers update their profiles or make progress towards goals, then the user should receive notifications according to their notification settings.

Goal Sharing Mechanism

"As a peer accountability network member, I want to share my financial goals and updates with my friends so that we can motivate each other to reach our targets."

Description

This requirement establishes a feature that allows users to publicly or privately share specific financial goals and progress with their peers on the Peer Accountability Network. The feature should permit users to choose different levels of visibility for their goals, from completely private to shared with all followers. Users will receive notifications when those they follow reach milestones or update their goals. This encourages accountability and provides users with the chance to collectively celebrate achievements, thus fostering a supportive community. The implementation should ensure robust data privacy compliance while enhancing user engagement on the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects to share a financial goal privately with specific friends from their Peer Accountability Network.

Given the user has set a financial goal, When they choose 'Share Privately' and select friends, Then the goal should only be visible to the selected friends and not to other users.

User shares a financial goal publicly within the Peer Accountability Network.

Given the user has set a financial goal, When they choose 'Share Publicly', Then the goal should be visible to all users in the Peer Accountability Network and updates should be visible as they progress.

User receives a notification when a friend reaches a milestone on their shared goal.

Given the user is following a friend with a shared financial goal, When the friend updates their goal to indicate a milestone has been reached, Then the user should receive a notification within the application.

User updates the visibility of an already shared financial goal.

Given the user has an existing financial goal that is shared, When they choose to change its visibility from public to private or vice versa, Then the system should successfully update the goal's visibility status as selected by the user.

User opts to delete a financial goal they had previously shared.

Given the user has shared a financial goal, When they choose to delete the goal, Then the goal should be removed from both their profile and visibility to all peers it was shared with.

System enforces data privacy compliance when users share goals.

Given the user is sharing a financial goal, When they share the goal, Then the system must comply with data privacy regulations, ensuring that data is handled securely and appropriate consent is in place.

Progress Tracking Dashboard

"As a FundSweep user, I want to view a dashboard that highlights my progress and the progress of my peers, so I can feel motivated and inspired to achieve my financial goals."

Description

This feature requirement entails creating a dashboard that visually represents users' financial progress towards shared goals. The dashboard will aggregate data from multiple users to showcase trends, average progress, and overall community achievements. It will include customizable graphs and metrics that can be filtered by user or goal type. This visual representation aims to keep users motivated by displaying not only their achievements but also the collective progress of their peer network. The dashboard must integrate with existing features in FundSweep, utilizing real-time data synchronization for accuracy and up-to-date information.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard to view their financial progress and the progress of their peers during a monthly review meeting.

Given a user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they navigate to the Progress Tracking Dashboard, then they should see a visual representation of their individual financial progress as well as the aggregate progress of their peer network, updated in real-time.

A user customizes their dashboard to filter the displayed data based on specific financial goals like "Savings" and "Expense Tracking" during a financial planning session.

Given a user is on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they apply filters to view data specifically for 'Savings' goals, then the dashboard should update the graphs and metrics to only reflect savings-related financial data.

The user wants to compare their financial progress against the peer average during their weekly check-in.

Given a user is on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they select the option to view peer averages, then the user should see a comparative overview graph displaying their progress against the average progress of their peers for each goal type.

A user receives a notification about their peer's achievements that can be viewed from the Progress Tracking Dashboard.

Given a user is on the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they receive a notification about a peer's financial milestone, then the relevant peer's achievement should be displayed in a notifications area of the dashboard with an option to view detailed progress.

The user regularly monitors the dashboard to stay motivated and see how others are achieving their goals.

Given a user accesses the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they check the dashboard, then the last updated timestamp should indicate that the information is current within the last 5 minutes, ensuring that users are always seeing the most recent progress data.

The user completes a financial goal and wants to share this achievement with their peers through the dashboard.

Given a user has completed a financial goal, when they share this achievement, then the dashboard should update to reflect this completion visually and notify the user's peers within their network about the achievement.

A user navigates the dashboard to spot trends and insights related to community achievements over the past quarter.

Given a user is looking at the Progress Tracking Dashboard, when they select the 'last quarter' option for viewing trends, then the graphs should display the trends and metrics of community achievements for the past quarter accurately, allowing the user to analyze progress over time.

Gamification Elements

"As a FundSweep user, I want to earn rewards and badges for achieving my financial goals, so that I stay motivated and engaged in my financial journey."

Description

This requirement includes implementing gamification features within the Peer Accountability Network to enhance user engagement and motivation. Users can earn badges, rewards, and points for achieving milestones, supporting others, and completing specific challenges within the network. These gamified elements can be showcased in profiles, encouraging social sharing and competition among users. The implementation will incorporate user feedback to tailor the challenges and rewards, ensuring relevance and appeal. Incorporating gamification is expected to significantly increase user interaction and sustain long-term engagement with FundSweep.

Acceptance Criteria

User joins the Peer Accountability Network and accesses the gamification features to set personal financial goals and challenges.

Given a registered user, when they access the Peer Accountability Network, then they should see an option to set up personal financial goals and choose from available challenges, with an option to receive notifications for progress updates.

User successfully completes a financial challenge and receives a badge to display on their profile.

Given a user who has completed a financial challenge, when the challenge is marked as complete, then the system should award a badge and update the user’s profile to display the new badge.

User earns points for supporting peers in the network by providing advice and feedback.

Given a user who engages with a peer’s financial goal, when they provide actionable feedback or advice, then the system should grant points to the user, which can be tracked in their gamification dashboard.

User wants to view their gamification progress and achievements over time.

Given a user in the Peer Accountability Network, when they navigate to their profile, then they should be able to view a comprehensive dashboard displaying their earned points, badges, and completed challenges in chronological order.

User refers a friend to join the network and earns a referral reward for it.

Given a user who refers a friend to join the Peer Accountability Network, when the referred user registers, then the referrer should automatically receive the specified referral points as a reward.

User provides feedback on their experience with gamification elements, influencing future updates.

Given a user who actively participates in the gamification features, when they submit feedback through a designated feedback form, then the system should log the feedback and allow for it to be reviewed for future gamification updates.

Peer Feedback System

"As a FundSweep user, I want to receive feedback on my financial strategies from my peers, so that I can gain new insights and improve my approach to achieving my goals."

Description

This requirement focuses on establishing a peer feedback system whereby users can provide constructive input and suggestions on each other’s financial goals and strategies. The system should facilitate both private and public feedback options, allowing users to give and receive guidance in a respectful and supportive manner. Additionally, it should have mechanisms for users to report any inappropriate feedback, ensuring a safe and positive community environment. The implementation of this system is crucial for enhancing user experience and creating a culture of shared learning and accountability within the network.

Acceptance Criteria

User provides feedback on a friend's financial goal within the Peer Accountability Network, utilizing both the private and public feedback options available.

Given a user is logged into FundSweep and has access to a friend's financial goals, when the user selects the feedback option and submits feedback, then the feedback should be successfully recorded and visible to the intended recipient as per the selected visibility option (private or public).

User attempts to report inappropriate feedback received from another FundSweep user within the Peer Accountability Network.

Given a user receives feedback that they deem inappropriate, when the user selects the report option next to the feedback comment and submits a report, then the system should log the report and notify the moderation team for review.

A user receives feedback from multiple peers on their financial strategy, tracking the responses through the Peer Accountability Network.

Given a user has received feedback from at least three peers, when they navigate to their feedback section, then they should see a consolidated view of all received feedback categorized by public and private comments.

A user wants to view the feedback history given to them on their financial goals over the past month.

Given a user selects the feedback history option, when they filter the history by the last month, then they should see a complete list of all feedback received during that time period along with the feedbacker's name and date.

Users interact to give feedback on financial strategies during a group accountability session within the Peer Accountability Network.

Given that a user is participating in a group accountability session, when they provide feedback to another user's strategy, then the feedback should be recorded in the session summary for all participants to view later.

Progress Insights Report

The Progress Insights Report compiles data on users' progress towards their financial goals in a comprehensive report format. By reviewing their achievements over time, users gain valuable insights into their financial behaviors and trends, helping them refine their strategies and maintain focus.

Requirements

Data Aggregation Engine

"As a small business owner, I want a system that automatically consolidates my financial data into one report so that I can easily track my progress toward my financial goals without manually gathering information from multiple sources."

Description

The Data Aggregation Engine is responsible for seamlessly collating data from various sources, including transactions, expense records, and budget forecasts. This engine will automatically pull data in real-time, ensuring users are presented with the most up-to-date information in their Progress Insights Report. By centralizing data, users can gain a holistic view of their financial activities, allowing them to track progress toward their goals effectively. The integration with AI-driven analytics will enhance the report's value by identifying trends and anomalies, ultimately empowering users to make data-driven decisions based on comprehensive insights.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives real-time updates of their financial transactions and budgets in the Progress Insights Report.

Given the user logs into FundSweep, when they access the Progress Insights Report, then they should see the most current financial data reflecting all recent transactions and budget changes within the last hour.

User can view historical data trends in their Progress Insights Report for better financial analysis.

Given the user selects a time frame of the last three months, when they view the Progress Insights Report, then they should see a clear graphical representation of their financial data over that period, including income, expenses, and budget adherence.

User receives notifications for any unusual financial activity captured by the Data Aggregation Engine.

Given the user has set alerts for anomalies, when the Data Aggregation Engine detects any unusual spending patterns, then the user should receive a notification in their dashboard and via email detailing the activity.

User can filter their Progress Insights Report based on different categories such as income sources, expense types, and time periods.

Given the user selects filters for specific income sources and expense types, when they generate the Progress Insights Report, then they should only see financial data relevant to those filters applied, ensuring clarity in their financial overview.

User's data in the Progress Insights Report automatically syncs across all devices without manual intervention.

Given the user updates any financial data in FundSweep, when they access the Progress Insights Report on a different device, then the updated information should appear in real-time without the need for a manual refresh.

The Data Aggregation Engine accurately reflects multi-currency transactions in the Progress Insights Report.

Given the user has transactions in multiple currencies, when they view the Progress Insights Report, then the report should accurately convert and display the total amounts in the user's selected base currency using the latest exchange rates.

User can export their Progress Insights Report into a PDF format for sharing or record-keeping purposes.

Given the user is viewing their Progress Insights Report, when they select the export option, then they should successfully download a PDF version of the report that includes all charts and data in a well-formatted document.

Customizable Reporting Format

"As a freelancer, I want to customize my Progress Insights Report layout so that I can focus on the most important financial metrics that matter to my business."

Description

The Customizable Reporting Format allows users to tailor their Progress Insights Report according to their specific needs and preferences. Users can choose different metrics to display, alter the layout, or select visual representations such as graphs and charts. This flexibility accommodates various user preferences, enhancing user engagement and making it easier for them to understand their financial position at a glance. By providing this capability, FundSweep ensures that the insights are relevant and user-friendly, significantly improving the value users derive from their reports.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes Metrics in the Progress Insights Report

Given the user selects the 'Customize Report' option, when they choose specific financial metrics to include, then those metrics should appear in the generated report and reflect the user-selected criteria accurately.

User Modifies Layout of the Progress Insights Report

Given the user opts to change the layout of the report, when they select a new layout style (e.g., grid, single column), then the report should be generated in the chosen layout without loss of data accuracy.

User Selects Visual Representation for the Data

Given the user chooses different visual representations for their data (e.g., pie chart, bar graph), when the report is generated, then it should accurately display the selected visual format corresponding to the chosen data metrics.

User Saves Custom Report Settings for Future Use

Given that the user customizes their report settings, when they select the 'Save Settings' option, then those settings should be stored and used as the default for future reports, retrievable upon request.

User Reviews Generated Progress Insights Report

Given the user has generated a Progress Insights Report, when they review the report, then all selected metrics, layouts, and visual formats should be present, accurate, and clearly understandable.

User Exports the Customized Progress Insights Report

Given the user finalizes their custom report, when they select the 'Export' option, then the report should export accurately in a specified format (e.g., PDF, Excel) without any loss of information or formatting.

User Receives Confirmation for Changes Made in the Report

Given the user has made changes to the report settings, when they apply these changes, then a confirmation message should display informing the user that their settings have been successfully updated.

Automatic Progress Notifications

"As an independent contractor, I want to receive alerts about my progress toward financial goals so that I can stay motivated and make timely adjustments to my spending and saving habits."

Description

Automatic Progress Notifications will alert users periodically regarding their advancement towards specified financial goals. These notifications will be generated based on the data analytics performed by the system, identifying trends and progress rates while considering the user's predefined objectives. Users will receive reminders or insights when approaching a milestone or if they are lagging behind, enabling proactive financial management. The notifications will help keep users accountable and motivated, reinforcing positive financial habits and encouraging continuous evaluation of their strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when their progress towards a financial goal reaches 75% of the target amount.

Given a user has set a financial goal, when their current progress reaches 75% of the goal, then they should receive an automatic notification via email and in-app alert informing them of their progress.

User receives a reminder notification when they are lagging behind their financial goal and are at 50% of the target amount with less than one month left to the deadline.

Given a user has a financial goal with a deadline, when their progress is at 50% or less with one month remaining, then they should receive a reminder notification via email and push notification.

User can customize the frequency of progress notifications for their financial goals based on their preferences.

Given a user is in the notification settings section, when they select how often they wish to receive progress notifications for each goal, then the system should save their preferences and adjust notifications accordingly.

User's notification settings influence the type and frequency of progress notifications they receive regarding their financial goals.

Given a user has defined their notification settings, when the notification criteria are met, then the user should only receive notifications that correspond with their selected preferences (e.g., weekly, bi-weekly).

User receives a summary report every month that includes all notifications sent regarding their financial goals for accountability.

Given that a month has passed since the last summary report, when the report generation is triggered, then the user should receive a consolidated report via email listing all notifications sent about their financial progress.

User has the ability to opt-out or change their notification settings at any time.

Given a user is on the notification settings page, when they opt-out of progress notifications or change the settings, then the system should update their preferences immediately and confirm the changes to the user.

User receives feedback based on their financial progress with actionable recommendations following notifications.

Given the user receives a notification about their financial progress, when they view the related report, then the report should include actionable recommendations based on their progress and trends identified by the system.

Goal Setting Framework

"As a user of FundSweep, I want to set specific financial goals within the platform so that I can track my progress and adjust my strategies to meet my objectives effectively."

Description

The Goal Setting Framework enables users to establish, edit, and track financial goals directly within the FundSweep platform. Users can define specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound (SMART) goals linked to their financial targets. This feature will integrate with the Progress Insights Report to provide relevant analyses and updates on goal progression. By empowering users to set personalized goals, FundSweep facilitates a more targeted approach to financial management, fostering better commitment and focus on financial achievements.

Acceptance Criteria

User establishes a new financial goal using the Goal Setting Framework within the FundSweep platform.

Given a logged-in user, When they navigate to the Goal Setting section, Then they should be able to create a new SMART goal with fields for specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound attributes and save it successfully.

User edits an existing financial goal set within the FundSweep platform.

Given a user with an existing goal, When they select the goal from their dashboard, edit the goal's details, and submit the changes, Then the updated goal should be reflected accurately in both the Goal Setting Framework and the Progress Insights Report.

User views their financial goals progress through the Progress Insights Report.

Given a user with established financial goals, When they generate a Progress Insights Report, Then the report should display relevant analyses and updates on the user’s progress towards each goal, clearly indicating the percentage of completion and any trends over time.

User sets a financial goal that is unattainable based on existing data.

Given a user entering a new financial goal into the system, When the user attempts to set the goal beyond reasonable constraints indicated by their financial data, Then the system should display an error message indicating that the goal must be achievable based on their financial behavior.

User deletes a financial goal they no longer wish to track.

Given a user in the Goal Setting section, When they select a goal and choose to delete it, Then the goal should be removed from their list and not appear in the Progress Insights Report anymore.

User receives personalized insights based on their financial goals.

Given a user who has set financial goals, When they interact with the dashboard, Then they should receive personalized insights and recommendations based on their goal performance and financial behaviors, derived from AI-driven analytics.

User views a full history of changes made to their financial goals.

Given a user who has made changes to their financial goals over time, When they select the option to view the history of their goals, Then the system should display a detailed log of all changes made, including timestamps and the nature of changes.

Integrated AI-driven Insights

"As a small business owner, I want AI to analyze my spending behaviors and offer me personalized recommendations so that I can improve my financial management skills and use my resources more efficiently."

Description

Integrated AI-driven Insights will leverage machine learning algorithms to analyze users' financial data trends over time and provide actionable recommendations tailored to each user's situation. This feature will produce insights on areas such as expense management, investment opportunities, and budgeting strategies. By interpreting complex data into user-friendly advice, this requirement enhances the overall user experience and ensures that users feel supported in their financial planning. This capability is vital for maintaining user engagement and helping them achieve their financial goals strategically.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Progress Insights Report to view AI-driven insights on their financial behaviors and trends.

Given that I am a user logged into FundSweep, when I navigate to the Progress Insights Report, then I should see an AI-generated summary of my financial behaviors for the last quarter, including visual charts and key trends.

User receives personalized recommendations based on their financial data analysis within the Progress Insights Report.

Given that the AI has analyzed my financial data, when I view the Progress Insights Report, then I should receive at least three tailored recommendations regarding expense management and investment opportunities based on my past spending patterns.

User checks the accuracy of data presented in the Progress Insights Report generated by the AI.

Given that I have provided accurate financial data, when I review the Progress Insights Report, then I should find that the financial trends and recommendations accurately reflect my spending and savings behavior within a 95% accuracy margin.

User utilizes the insights from the Progress Insights Report to adjust their financial strategies over time.

Given that I have access to the Progress Insights Report, when I implement changes recommended by the AI in my budgeting strategy, then I should show a measurable improvement in my financial metrics (e.g., reduced expenses by 15% in the next month).

User experiences the seamless integration of AI-driven insights with the existing dashboard functionality during the report review.

Given that I am reviewing the Progress Insights Report, when I switch between the report and other dashboard metrics, then the insights should load within 2 seconds without delays or errors, ensuring a smooth user experience.

User assesses the customization options for the insights provided in the Progress Insights Report.

Given that I am in the settings section of the Progress Insights Report, when I select the customization options, then I should be able to choose specific categories (e.g., expenses, income, savings) to refine the AI insights according to my preferences.

User receives notifications for new insights available in the Progress Insights Report.

Given that new insights have been generated by the AI, when I log into FundSweep, then I should receive a notification alerting me to view the updated Progress Insights Report and the newly available recommendations.

Multi-currency Support

"As an entrepreneur dealing with international clients, I want to manage my financial reports in multiple currencies so that I can accurately track my income and expenses no matter where my business transactions occur."

Description

Multi-currency Support allows users to view financial data and reports in different currencies, depending on their business needs and customer interactions. This feature will automatically convert currencies using real-time exchange rates, ensuring users have accurate insights regardless of transaction origins. Such capability is crucial for businesses operating in a global context, providing inclusivity and ease of financial understanding. It will enhance the utility of the Progress Insights Report for international users, fostering broader adoption and satisfaction with the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to view their financial report in different currencies based on their international transactions.

Given the user has transactions in multiple currencies, when they access the Progress Insights Report, then the report displays all financial data converted to the user's selected currency using the latest exchange rates available.

User needs to compare their financial performance across different currencies over a specified time period.

Given the user selects a date range and two different currencies, when they generate the Progress Insights Report, then the report shows a comparison of financial metrics in the selected currencies clearly stating the conversion rates used.

An international user accesses their Progress Insights Report to analyze their expense trends in their local currency.

Given the user is from a different country and has set their preferred currency, when they retrieve their Progress Insights Report, then all expenses are displayed in the user's local currency with real-time conversion details included.

User requests a summary of their progress towards financial goals with insights presented in their chosen currency.

Given the user has set up their financial goals in the platform, when they generate and review the Progress Insights Report, then the report summarizes their progress towards goals in the user's selected currency, incorporating real-time conversion rates.

User needs to ensure the accuracy of exchange rates provided in the report.

Given the user generates a report, when the report is displayed, then it includes a timestamp indicating when the exchange rates were last updated to ensure transparency and reliability of financial data.

User explores the impact of fluctuating exchange rates on their financial performance over time.

Given the user has selected historical data for a specific currency, when they view the Progress Insights Report, then the report illustrates how exchange rate changes over time have impacted their financial results with clear visualizations.

User shares their Progress Insights Report with stakeholders in a different currency format.

Given the user generates a PDF version of the Progress Insights Report, when they export it, then the report exports correctly in the chosen currency, maintaining the accuracy of financial details presented.

Dynamic Document Editing

This feature allows multiple users to edit financial documents simultaneously in real-time. Changes made by one user are instantly visible to others, enhancing collaboration and ensuring that everyone is on the same page. This reduces the risk of errors and miscommunication, leading to quicker decision-making and more cohesive teamwork.

Requirements

Real-time Collaboration

"As a small business owner, I want to collaborate with my accountant in real-time on financial documents so that we can make quicker and more informed decisions together without the risk of outdated information."

Description

The Real-time Collaboration requirement facilitates simultaneous editing of documents by multiple users within the FundSweep platform. This feature ensures that all changes made by any user are instantly reflected to all other users, enhancing teamwork and collaboration. This real-time capability helps eliminate version control issues, reduces miscommunication, and enhances overall productivity. It leverages WebSocket technology to provide instant updates, thereby allowing users to operate more cohesively and efficiently, ultimately leading to faster decision-making processes and improved accuracy in shared financial documents.

Acceptance Criteria

User A and User B are collaborating on a financial report. User A makes edits to the document, and User B should see those changes in real-time without needing to refresh the page.

Given that User A is editing the document and User B is also viewing it, when User A saves their changes, then User B should see those changes reflected in their view within 1 second.

A user attempts to edit a financial document that is currently being edited by another user. The system should handle this scenario gracefully without data loss.

Given that User A is editing the document, when User B tries to edit the same section simultaneously, then User B should receive a notification that the document is being edited by User A and should see a read-only version of that section.

Multiple users are editing different sections of a financial document at the same time. The system should allow for seamless simultaneous editing without overwriting each other’s changes.

Given that User A is editing Section 1 and User B is editing Section 2, when both users save their changes, then both updates should be reflected in the document accurately without any data conflict.

In a scenario where a user disconnects from the internet while editing a document, the system should handle the transition smoothly once the user reconnects.

Given that User A is editing a document and loses internet connection, when User A reconnects after a few minutes, then their previous unsaved changes should be restored and visible in the document.

The application should provide users the ability to see who is currently editing the document in real-time to enhance collaborative efforts.

Given that multiple users are editing a document, when a user views the document, then they should see a list of users currently editing alongside their cursor position highlighted in real-time.

Users should have the ability to leave comments on specific parts of the document for additional communication and feedback.

Given that User A wants to add a comment on a specific section, when they click on the comment button, then a comment box should appear allowing them to add feedback, which should be instantly visible to other users in real-time.

The platform should ensure that all edits during a session are securely saved and can be retrieved later.

Given that multiple users are editing a document over a session, when the session ends, then all changes made should be stored securely without any loss, and users should be able to retrieve the latest version upon reopening the document.

Version Control System

"As a freelancer, I want to be able to access previous versions of my financial documents so that I can recover any lost information and ensure accuracy in my records."

Description

The Version Control System requirement is essential for tracking changes made to financial documents within FundSweep. It provides a comprehensive history of document edits, allowing users to review past versions, compare changes, and restore previous iterations if necessary. This feature enhances accountability and ensures that users can revert to earlier versions when needed, minimizing risks associated with incorrect edits. It integrates seamlessly into the document editing workflow and allows users to maintain a clear understanding of document evolution, enhancing overall document management.

Acceptance Criteria

Simultaneous editing of a financial budget document by multiple users, ensuring all changes are reflected in real-time across all user interfaces.

Given multiple users are editing a budget document, when one user makes a change, then all other users should see the updated document within two seconds.

Reviewing the history of changes made to a financial report by different users to ensure transparency and accountability in document management.

Given a financial report has been edited multiple times, when a user accesses the version history, then they should see a complete list of changes made, including timestamps and user identities for each edit.

Restoring a previous version of a financial document after an incorrect edit has been made, allowing users to revert to a stable state.

Given a financial document has several saved versions, when a user selects a previous version and confirms the restore action, then the document should revert to the selected version and display an alert confirming the restoration.

Comparing the current version of a document against the last saved version to identify specific changes made during the editing process.

Given a user is viewing a financial document, when they activate the compare feature, then the system should highlight all differences between the current version and the last saved version for clarity.

Enabling users to annotate versions within the version control system to provide context for specific edits and changes.

Given a user is on the version history page, when they add an annotation to a specific version, then that annotation should be saved and displayed next to the respective version for future reference.

Notifying users of changes made to a document they are collaborating on, ensuring they stay informed about edits that could affect their work.

Given a user is collaborating on a document, when any other collaborator makes a change, then a notification should be sent to all users involved, summarizing the changes made.

Commenting and Tagging

"As an independent contractor, I want to comment on specific numbers in my financial reports so that I can clarify any uncertainties with my accountant without changing the original document."

Description

The Commenting and Tagging requirement enables users to leave comments on specific sections of a financial document without altering the content itself. This feature allows for asynchronous communication among users, letting team members provide feedback or ask questions regarding parts of the document. Additionally, users can tag other collaborators in comments to ensure that specific individuals are notified about important discussions. This functionality enhances clarity in communication and streamlines the review process, empowering users to collaborate effectively and address issues promptly.

Acceptance Criteria

User leaves a comment on a specific section of a financial document during a team review meeting.

Given the document is open for editing, when a user selects a text section and enters a comment, then the comment should be visible to all users currently editing the document in real-time.

User tags a team member in a comment to request their feedback on a financial document.

Given a user has accessed the commenting feature, when they enter a comment and tag another user using '@username', then that user should receive a notification about the tag and the comment's content.

User edits a comment on a financial document to clarify their feedback.

Given a user has previously left a comment, when they select the edit option on their comment, then they should be able to modify the text and save the changes, which should reflect instantly to all collaborators.

Multiple users are reviewing a financial document and leaving comments simultaneously.

Given multiple users are active on the same document, when one user adds a comment, then all other users should see the new comment appear without having to refresh the document.

User wants to track the history of comments on a document for accountability.

Given that comments are added to a document, when a user chooses to view the comment history, then the system should display all comments made on the document along with the timestamps and the authors' names.

User attempts to leave a comment without selecting any text in a document.

Given a user is on a document, when they try to submit a comment without highlighting text, then the system should display an error message prompting the user to select text before commenting.

Document Permissions Management

"As a business owner, I want to control who can edit or view my financial documents so that I can protect sensitive information and ensure that only authorized personnel can make changes."

Description

The Document Permissions Management requirement enables administrators to set specific access levels for different users interacting with financial documents. This feature ensures that sensitive financial information is protected by restricting editing, viewing, or commenting rights based on user roles. By implementing granular permissions, FundSweep fosters a secure collaborative environment where sensitive data is handled appropriately, mitigating risks associated with unauthorized access or changes. It is vital for maintaining confidentiality and control over financial information.

Acceptance Criteria

As an administrator, I want to set user permissions on financial documents to ensure only authorized personnel can view or edit sensitive information.

Given an administrator is managing document permissions, when they set a user to 'view-only' access, then this user should be unable to edit the document and should only see the content without modification options available.

As a team member, I want to see the access level assigned to my role on a financial document so that I know what actions I can perform.

Given a team member has access to a financial document, when they view the document settings, then they should see their assigned permissions (edit, view, comment) clearly stated.

As an administrator, I want to update user permissions across multiple documents at once for efficiency in managing access rights.

Given an administrator selects multiple financial documents, when they change the user roles in bulk, then the permission changes should apply to all selected documents and the new permissions should be confirmed through a success message.

As a project lead, I want to revoke access to a financial document from a user who is leaving the organization to ensure data security.

Given a project lead decides to revoke user access, when they select the user and confirm the action, then the user should no longer have access to the document and should receive a notification of their access being revoked.

As an auditor, I need to review the permission changes made to financial documents to ensure compliance with organizational policies.

Given an auditor is reviewing a financial document, when they access the permissions audit log, then they should see a detailed history of all changes made to user permissions, including timestamps and the administrator who made the change.

As a user with editing permissions, I want to know if my changes to a financial document are being saved in real-time to avoid losing work due to permission issues.

Given a user with editing permissions is modifying a financial document, when they make changes, then there should be a notification confirming the changes have been saved in real-time without permission errors.

As an administrator, I want to configure default permission settings for new financial documents to streamline the document creation process.

Given an administrator is configuring default settings, when they create a new financial document, then the default permissions should automatically apply as configured prior to document creation.

Notification System for Changes

"As a freelancer, I want to receive notifications when my client makes changes to our shared financial documents so that I can promptly review updates and address any discrepancies."

Description

The Notification System for Changes requirement alerts users whenever there are modifications made to shared financial documents. Users will receive timely notifications via email or in-app alerts, informing them of edits, comments, or other important activities related to the documents they are collaborating on. This feature ensures that all collaborators stay up-to-date with the latest changes, which enhances transparency and minimizes misunderstandings or miscommunications among team members.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification of document changes while collaborating in real-time.

Given a user is collaborating on a shared financial document, when another user makes a change, then the first user receives a notification via email and in-app alert within 5 seconds of the change being made.

Visibility of all changes made to financial documents.

Given a user receives a notification about a document change, when they access the document, then they can see all recent changes highlighted and the timestamp of each change.

User preferences for notification settings.

Given a user accesses their account settings, when they configure their notification preferences, then their choices are saved and effectively change the notifications they will receive.

Multi-user collaboration alerts for comments on a document.

Given multiple users are viewing a shared financial document, when one user adds a comment, then all other users receive an immediate notification within 5 seconds of the comment being posted.

Unsubscribe option for notifications.

Given a user no longer wishes to receive notifications for a specific document, when they select the unsubscribe option, then they stop receiving notifications for that document immediately.

Notification logs for changes in documents.

Given a user requests to view their notification history, when they access the log, then they can see a chronological list of all notifications related to document changes for the past month.

Commentary Corner

A built-in commenting system enables users to leave feedback and notes on specific sections of documents. This feature encourages open discussion, allowing team members to pose questions, make suggestions, and resolve issues directly within the document, streamlining communication and promoting accountability.

Requirements

Real-time Comment Notifications

"As a team member, I want to receive real-time notifications for comments on documents so that I can respond immediately and engage in discussions effectively."

Description

This requirement entails implementing a real-time notification system that alerts users when new comments are added to documents in the Commentary Corner. Notifications will enable users to stay updated on discussions and feedback, fostering timely responses and enhancing collaboration. The feature will support desktop and mobile notifications, allowing users to stay engaged with their team regardless of their location. The notifications will be customizable, allowing users to set preferences for what types of comments they would like to be notified about, thus enhancing their ability to manage tasks effectively and ensuring no critical feedback is overlooked.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives notifications for all new comments added to a document in Commentary Corner

Given a user is logged into FundSweep, When a new comment is added to a document in Commentary Corner, Then the user should receive a real-time notification on both desktop and mobile devices.

User can customize notification preferences for comment types in Commentary Corner

Given a user is in the settings menu, When the user selects comment notification preferences, Then the user should be able to choose between receiving notifications for all comments, only comments tagged as questions, or comments containing specific keywords.

User receives a summary notification of comments every day at a specified time

Given a user has set a daily summary notification, When the time for the summary notification occurs, Then the user should receive a digest email containing all the new comments added that day.

User is not notified for comments made after they have dismissed a specific notification

Given a user has dismissed a comment notification, When a new comment is added, Then the user should not receive another notification for subsequent comments until they next access the document.

User can view all notifications in one consolidated place within FundSweep

Given a user accesses the notifications section, When the user views the notifications list, Then the user should see all previous notifications related to comments, including timestamps and content summaries.

Notifications are timely and delivered within a specific time frame

Given a user is actively using the platform, When a new comment is added, Then the notification should be delivered within 5 seconds to ensure real-time communication.

User can mute notifications for specific documents

Given a user is viewing a document, When the user selects the option to mute notifications for that specific document, Then the user should no longer receive notifications for any new comments added to that document until unmuted.

Comment Filtering Options

"As a project manager, I want to filter comments by user and status so that I can prioritize the most critical discussions and track the progress of resolutions."

Description

Users should be able to filter comments in the Commentary Corner based on various criteria such as date, user, or status (resolved/unresolved). This capability will allow teams to focus on specific discussions, streamline their review process, and prioritize addressing outstanding issues. By providing a robust filtering mechanism, users can easily manage and navigate through the comments, ensuring that important discussions do not get lost in the noise. This feature will integrate seamlessly within the user interface, ensuring a smooth user experience while providing significant value to team management and accountability.

Acceptance Criteria

As a team member reviewing comments in the Commentary Corner, I want to filter comments by date to focus on the most recent discussions relevant to our current project phase.

Given that I have accessed the Commentary Corner, when I apply the date filter to comments, then I should only see comments that were made within the selected date range.

As a project manager, I want to filter comments by user so that I can see all feedback provided by a specific team member and address their concerns more efficiently.

Given that filters are enabled in the Commentary Corner, when I select a specific user to filter comments by, then I should only see comments associated with that user displayed in the comment list.

As a team member involved in a project, I want to filter comments by their resolution status, allowing me to prioritize unresolved issues during our review session.

Given that I am in the Commentary Corner, when I select the filter for unresolved comments, then I should only see comments that are marked as unresolved.

As a user utilizing the Commentary Corner, I want to apply multiple filters simultaneously (date, user, and status), so that I can streamline the review of specific comments that align with our current focus.

Given that I am in the Commentary Corner, when I apply multiple filters (date, user, and status) at the same time, then I should see a filtered list that accurately reflects the combination of all selected criteria.

As a user exploring the Commentary Corner, I want to quickly reset all applied filters to view all comments without having to refresh the page.

Given that I have applied one or more filters in the Commentary Corner, when I click the reset button, then all filters should be cleared, and I should see all available comments listed again.

As a member of the team, I want to receive visual indicators (such as highlighting or badges) on comments that are unresolved, enabling me to easily identify which comments require immediate attention.

Given that I am in the Commentary Corner, when I enable the unresolved comment filter, then all unresolved comments should have a visual indicator to denote their status clearly.

Comment Attachment Support

"As a team member, I want to attach files to my comments so that I can provide better context and examples for my feedback."

Description

This requirement involves allowing users to attach files and links directly within their comments in the Commentary Corner. Users often need to share relevant documents or resources to support their feedback, and by providing this capability, the system will enrich discussions and enable better-contextualized responses. This feature will enhance the usability of the Commentary Corner, making interactions more productive and informative. Support for various file types, including documents, images, and links, must be ensured, along with appropriate security measures for file handling and access.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to attach a document to their comment in the Commentary Corner for better context.

Given the user is viewing a document in Commentary Corner, when they click on the attach file button, then they should be able to upload a document and see it linked in their comment.

User wants to include a link to an external resource in their comment to provide additional information.

Given the user is composing a comment, when they paste a link into the comment box, then the system should automatically format the link and make it clickable within the comment.

A user wants to attach an image to illustrate their feedback in the Commentary Corner.

Given the user is adding a comment, when they select an image file to attach, then the image should successfully upload and display as a thumbnail in their comment.

A user needs to ensure only allowed types of files can be attached to comments.

Given the user is trying to upload a file, when the file type is not supported, then an error message should indicate that the file format is not allowed and the upload should fail.

An admin needs to review the comments and attached files for security compliance.

Given an admin is checking comments in the Commentary Corner, when they access any attached files, then the system should log this access for audit purposes.

A user wants to edit their comment to add additional files after it has been posted.

Given the user is viewing their posted comment, when they click on the edit button and attach new files, then the updated comment should reflect the new attachments without losing the original content.

Multiple users are commenting on the same document and need to see and access attachments seamlessly.

Given users are collaborating on the Commentary Corner, when one user attaches a file to their comment, then all other users viewing the document should be able to see and access the attachment immediately.

Comment History Tracking

"As a lead user, I want to view the comment history within a document so that I can understand past decisions and discussions which impact current feedback."

Description

Implement a feature that tracks and displays the history of comments on each document, allowing users to see previous discussions and resolutions tied to specific comments. This history will provide valuable context for current conversations and decisions, enabling users to understand the evolution of discussions over time. The functionality will also support version control, allowing users to reference changes in comments inline. This will improve accountability and foster deeper understanding during project development, minimizing repetitive questions and enhancing clarity among team members.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the comment history on a shared document to understand the context of previous discussions before adding their own comments.

Given a user is viewing a document with existing comments, when they access the comment history, then they should be able to see a chronological list of all previous comments linked to the document along with timestamps and usernames.

A user adds a new comment to a document while referencing a previous comment in the history.

Given a user is viewing the comment history of a document, when they click on a previous comment to add a new comment, then the new comment should reference the previous comment and be displayed in the comments section with appropriate contextual linkage.

Team members resolve a comment, and the status of that comment is updated in the comment history.

Given a comment within the history is marked as resolved, when the user accesses the comment history, then the resolved comment should display a status indicator (e.g., 'Resolved') and include notes on resolution when applicable.

A user needs to track changes in comments over different document versions.

Given a user accesses a document with multiple versions, when they navigate to the comment history, then they should be able to select each document version and view comments tied to that version distinctly.

New users are onboarded and need to understand how to navigate and utilize the comment history feature effectively.

Given a new user is accessing the comment history feature for the first time, when they view the comment history section, then they should see a tooltip or guide explaining how to use the feature, including how to add comments and view history.

Team leads review past discussions to create summaries for the next project phase.

Given a team lead is preparing for a meeting, when they access the comment history, then they should be able to filter comments by active discussions, resolutions, or unresolved issues, aiding in summarizing previous discussions effectively.

Commenting Permissions Management

"As a document owner, I want to manage who can comment on my documents so that I can ensure that only relevant team members participate in discussions related to sensitive information."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a permissions system that allows document owners to manage who can comment on specific documents. By determining which users or roles have commenting rights, document owners can control the quality of feedback and discussions, ensuring that only relevant stakeholders contribute to sensitive or critical documents. The permissions management system will integrate with user roles within FundSweep to provide a fine-grained level of control, which is essential for teams where document confidentiality is paramount. This will help enhance team collaboration while maintaining security and order.

Acceptance Criteria

Document owner wants to restrict commenting on a financial report to only the finance team members to maintain confidentiality.

Given that the document owner has selected the document and specified the finance team as the only allowed commenters, when the changes are saved, then only members of the finance team should have commenting permissions for that document.

A user attempts to comment on a document not assigned to their role to check the system's response to unauthorized access.

Given that a user who is not part of the allowed commenting group tries to leave a comment on the document, when the user submits the comment, then the system should display an error message indicating insufficient permissions to comment.

Document owner reviews the commenting permissions to ensure changes have been correctly applied after updating the permissions for a document.

Given that the document owner has modified the commenting permissions, when they review the permissions settings again, then the system should reflect the updated permissions accurately showing the allowed commenters list.

A project manager wants to ensure that only specific roles can comment on project documentation during active discussions.

Given that the project manager has assigned specific roles to comment on the project documentation, when members of those roles access the document, then they should be able to comment while others with no permissions should be restricted from commenting.

Admin needs to oversee and audit the commenting permissions against the user roles defined in the system.

Given the admin has access to the permissions management tool, when they generate a permissions report for all documents, then the report should accurately display all current commenting permissions aligned with the defined user roles.

Version History Tracker

This feature keeps a comprehensive log of all changes made to documents, allowing users to view previous versions and restore them if necessary. This transparency fosters trust among collaborators, as users can easily track contributions and ensure that vital information is not lost, enhancing the integrity of the decision-making process.

Requirements

Comprehensive Change Log

"As a small business owner, I want to be able to review all changes made to my financial documents so that I can ensure accuracy and accountability in my financial records."

Description

The Comprehensive Change Log requirement ensures that every modification made to financial documents within the FundSweep platform is automatically recorded. This log will not only capture details such as the date and time of changes, the user who made the change, and a description of what was altered, but it will also allow users to filter changes based on date ranges and user actions. This feature promotes transparency and accountability, enabling users to understand the evolution of their financial documents and facilitates easier audits. Additionally, the ability to view and compare different versions will empower users to make informed decisions when restoring previous iterations, thus maintaining the integrity of their financial data.

Acceptance Criteria

User views a financial document that has been edited multiple times and wants to see all changes made to understand the history of the document.

Given the user accesses the financial document, when the user opens the Change Log, then all changes made to the document should be listed in chronological order, displaying the date, time, user, and description of each change.

A user needs to restore a previous version of a financial document after realizing an error was made in the latest update.

Given the user dialogs with the Change Log, when the user selects a previous version of the document, then the system should successfully restore that version and confirm to the user that restoration was completed.

The user makes multiple changes to different financial documents throughout the day and wants to review changes made within a specific date range.

Given the user accesses the Change Log, when the user applies a date filter, then only the changes made within the specified date range should be displayed, reflecting accurate results.

Collaborators on a financial document want to track who made specific changes to understand contributions.

Given the user accesses the Change Log, when the user sorts changes by user name, then the system should display all changes associated with the selected user, including their respective timestamps and descriptions.

A user is required to perform an audit on a financial document and needs to ensure all changes are logged.

Given the user accesses the financial document’s Change Log, when the user exports the Change Log to a report format, then the report should include all changes, with no missing entries, in a structured format.

A user wants to compare two versions of a financial document to understand the differences before deciding which one to keep.

Given the user selects two different versions of the financial document, when the user initiates a comparison, then a side-by-side view of the changes between the two versions should be displayed, highlighting all differences effectively.

Version Comparison Tool

"As a freelancer, I want to compare different versions of my invoices so that I can easily spot any discrepancies before sending them to clients."

Description

The Version Comparison Tool requirement allows users to select two versions of their financial documents and view a side-by-side comparison of the changes made. This functionality will highlight additions, deletions, and any modifications, making it easy for users to understand the impact of adjustments over time. This tool is essential for users who need to quickly identify what has changed in their financial records, enabling them to make quick and efficient decisions. It improves user experience by simplifying the review process for frequent updates to documents and ensures that users maintain a clear overview of their financial history.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects two previous versions of a financial document to compare changes made over time.

Given that the user has selected two versions of the document, When they activate the Version Comparison Tool, Then the tool displays the selected versions side-by-side highlighting additions in green, deletions in red, and modifications in yellow.

User requires clarification on what changes were made between two versions of a document prior to making a final decision.

Given the user is viewing the comparison of two versions, When they hover over highlighted changes, Then tooltips display detailed descriptions of each change including the original text and the modified text.

User wants to revert to a previous version of their financial document after reviewing the comparison.

Given that the user has reviewed the changes and decided to restore a previous version, When they click on the 'Restore' button next to the desired version, Then the system should restore that version and notify the user of the successful restoration.

User needs to print or export the comparison report for documentation purposes after reviewing the changes.

Given that the user has completed the comparison, When they choose to print or export the comparison report, Then the system provides a formatted document outlining changes with options for PDF or CSV formats.

User is collaborating with team members and requires to track who made specific changes between versions.

Given the comparison view shows highlighted changes, When the user clicks on the changes, Then the system displays the user who made each specific change along with the timestamp of the modification.

User wants to ensure that the comparison tool is responsive on a mobile device.

Given that the user accesses the Version Comparison Tool on a mobile device, When the user selects two versions, Then the tool displays a mobile-optimized view that maintains functionality without loss of information or readability.

Restore Previous Version Functionality

"As an independent contractor, I want the ability to restore earlier versions of my expense reports so that I can quickly recover from potential errors without starting over from scratch."

Description

The Restore Previous Version Functionality enables users to revert their documents to a previous state with a simple action. This requirement emphasizes user control over their financial data, allowing them to recover information that may have been erroneously altered or deleted. This process will include a confirmation step to prevent accidental restores, improving security and user trust in the restoration process. By integrating this functionality, users have peace of mind knowing they can easily correct mistakes, enhancing the overall usability of the FundSweep platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to restore a deleted version of a financial report after realizing that important figures were unintentionally altered.

Given the user is on the Version History page, when they select a previous version and click 'Restore', then the document should revert to the selected version, and the user should receive a confirmation notification that restoration is successful.

User wishes to restore a document version from a week ago to recover lost data that was mistakenly overwritten.

Given the user is viewing the list of version histories, when they choose the version dated a week ago and confirm the restore, then the system should display the document as it appeared on that date, with a timestamp of the restoration action.

A team member needs to check what changes were made before restoring a version of a document to ensure accuracy.

Given the user is on the Version History page, when they click on the 'View Changes' link next to a specific version, then the system should display a comparison view showing the differences between the selected version and the current version.

User accidentally clicks restore without intending to, and must confirm their action to prevent errors.

Given the user has clicked the 'Restore' button, when the confirmation prompt appears asking 'Are you sure you want to restore this version?', then the system should allow the user to proceed with either confirming or canceling the action without performing the restore until confirmation is received.

User needs to know how many versions of a document are available for restoration.

Given the user is on the Version History page, when they view the list of available versions, then the user should see the total count of restored versions displayed clearly at the top of the list. The list should also be paginated if there are more than 10 versions.

User wants assurance that restoring a version will not affect other users currently editing the document.

Given a user initiates a restore while other collaborators are editing the document, when the restore process is executed, then all users should receive a notification that the document has been updated to a previous version, and their changes should be saved prior to the restore being completed to prevent data loss.

User Access Permissions for Version Control

"As a business administrator, I want to control who can access the version history of our financial documents so that I can protect sensitive information and maintain data integrity."

Description

The User Access Permissions for Version Control requirement will allow administrators to set specific permissions for users regarding access to version history features. This includes determining who can view, compare, or restore previous versions of financial documents. By establishing roles and permissions, FundSweep enhances security and ensures that sensitive information is only accessible to authorized personnel, thus preventing unauthorized changes and maintaining the integrity of financial data.

Acceptance Criteria

User Roles and Permissions Setup for Version Control Access

Given an administrator is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the User Permissions section, then they should be able to set specific access levels for users regarding version history features (view, compare, restore) and see the updated permissions reflected immediately.

User Access to View Previous Document Versions

Given a user with view permissions for version history accesses a document, when they select the version history, then they should be able to see a list of previous versions along with the date and time of each save.

User Access to Compare Document Versions

Given a user with compare permissions for version history accesses a document, when they select two versions from the version history, then the system should display a side-by-side comparison of the selected versions highlighting the differences.

User Access to Restore Previous Document Versions

Given a user with restore permissions for version history accesses a document, when they select a previous version and click the restore option, then the system should restore the document to that version and notify the user of the successful restoration.

Audit Logging of Change in User Permissions

Given an administrator changes the access permissions for a user regarding version history features, when the change is saved, then the system should log the action in the audit trail with a timestamp and details of the change.

Validation of Unauthorized User Access Attempt

Given a user without the appropriate permissions attempts to access a restricted version history feature, when they try to view or restore version details, then the system should display an error message indicating they do not have access.

Notification of Document Changes

"As a team member, I want to be notified when changes are made to our shared budget documents so that I can stay updated and contribute effectively to discussions."

Description

The Notification of Document Changes requirement establishes a system where users receive alerts whenever a change is made to shared financial documents. Notifications can be configured based on user preferences (e.g., email alerts, in-app notifications) to inform them of significant updates, giving users immediate awareness of modifications. This functionality fosters better collaboration among team members and assures that all parties stay informed, which is crucial for timely decision-making and responsiveness to financial changes.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an email notification when changes are made to a shared financial document.

Given a user is subscribed to email notifications, when a change is made to a financial document they have access to, then the user should receive an email alert within 5 minutes of the change.

User receives an in-app notification upon changes to shared documents they are collaborating on.

Given a user is logged into the application, when a change is made to a document they are currently collaborating on, then the user should see a real-time in-app notification displayed prominently within 2 minutes.

Users can configure their notification preferences for document changes.

Given a user has accessed their notification settings, when they adjust their preferences for document change alerts (selecting either email alerts, in-app notifications, or both), then those preferences should be saved and applied to future notifications without error.

Users receive notifications only for significant changes to documents as defined by the settings.

Given a user has defined what constitutes a significant change (e.g. changes to total amounts, new sections added), when a change occurs that meets these criteria in a document they have access to, then the user should receive a notification as per their preferred setting.

Notification links redirect users to the relevant document.

Given that a user receives an email or in-app notification regarding a document change, when the user clicks the notification link, then they should be redirected to the specific document that has been altered.

Audit Trail Reports

"As a small business owner, I want to generate audit trails for my financial documents so that I can ensure compliance and prepare for potential audits."

Description

The Audit Trail Reports requirement provides users with the ability to generate detailed reports that summarize all changes made to their financial documents over a specified period. This feature is vital for users who need to conduct financial reviews or audits since it offers a transparent overview of all document interactions, including user actions and timestamps. By creating comprehensive reports, FundSweep not only supports compliance with financial regulations but also enhances user confidence in the accuracy and authenticity of their financial records.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates an audit trail report for the past month to review all changes made to financial documents before an internal audit.

Given the user has logged in and navigated to the Audit Trail Reports section, when they select the date range for the past month and click 'Generate Report', then a detailed report is created that lists all changes made, including user actions and timestamps.

A user attempts to restore a previous version of a financial document after reviewing the audit trail report.

Given the user has accessed the audit trail report showing previous document versions, when they select a version and click 'Restore', then the current document should be updated to reflect the selected version with a confirmation notification displayed to the user.

A user needs to export the audit trail report to share with stakeholders during a quarterly review meeting.

Given the user is viewing the generated audit trail report, when they click on the 'Export' button and choose their desired file format (PDF or CSV), then the report should be successfully downloaded in the selected format and should match the displayed report content.

The system logs all user interactions with financial documents as part of the audit trail to ensure compliance and maintain security.

Given a user makes any changes to a financial document (edit, delete, create), when the action occurs, then the system records the user ID, action type, timestamp, and relevant document metadata to the audit trail without any errors.

The user wants to filter the audit trail report to view only actions taken by a specific user.

Given the user is in the audit trail report section, when they select a specific user's name in the filter options and apply the filter, then the report should update to display only the actions taken by that user within the specified date range.

Task Assignment Board

Users can assign specific tasks related to document creation or analysis within the Collaboration Hub. This feature adds clarity to responsibilities, ensuring that all team members know their roles and deadlines, which improves project management and keeps objectives clear.

Requirements

Task Viewer

"As a team member, I want to view all my assigned tasks and their statuses in one place so that I can efficiently manage my workload and meet project deadlines."

Description

The Task Viewer requirement allows users to access an overview of all tasks assigned to them and their team members within the Collaboration Hub. It provides a visual layout that displays task status, deadlines, and priority levels, thereby enhancing transparency and enabling better tracking of project progress. This requirement is crucial to ensure that users can quickly assess their responsibilities and workloads, facilitating improved time management and efficiency in project execution. By integrating with user notification systems, Task Viewer will also alert users of approaching deadlines, fostering accountability among team members. Users will experience reduced confusion and increased collaboration as they can easily reference task details and assignments in one centralized location.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Task Viewer to check all assigned tasks for their team.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they navigate to the Task Viewer section, then they should see a list of all tasks assigned to them and their team members, sorted by priority levels and deadlines.

User receives a notification for an approaching deadline on a task they are assigned to.

Given the user is within the Task Viewer and has tasks with approaching deadlines, when the deadline is within three days, then a notification alert should be triggered to remind the user of the upcoming deadline.

User filters tasks within the Task Viewer based on priority levels.

Given the Task Viewer displays all tasks, when the user selects a filter option for high-priority tasks, then only tasks marked as high priority should be displayed in the view.

Team leader checks the overall status of tasks assigned to their team.

Given the team leader accesses the Task Viewer, when they view their team's tasks, then they should see a summary of task statuses (completed, in progress, overdue) on the dashboard for quick assessment.

User updates the status of a task in the Task Viewer.

Given the user is viewing their assigned tasks, when they change the status of a task from 'in progress' to 'completed', then the task status should be updated in real-time and reflected in the Task Viewer dashboard.

User sees detailed information for a specific task in the Task Viewer.

Given the user is in the Task Viewer and clicks on a specific task, when they open the task details, then all relevant information such as description, due date, priority, and assigned team members should be displayed.

User accesses the Task Viewer on a mobile device.

Given the user is using the FundSweep mobile application, when they navigate to the Task Viewer, then they should see a mobile-optimized view of their assigned tasks without loss of functionality.

Deadline Notifications

"As a team leader, I want to receive notifications about task deadlines so that I can remind my team and ensure timely project completion."

Description

The Deadline Notifications requirement involves implementing a system of alerts that notify users about upcoming deadlines for their assigned tasks. These notifications will be customizable, allowing users to select how far in advance they want to be notified (e.g., 1 day, 3 days, 1 week prior). This feature serves to enhance users' time management skills and ensures that critical tasks are completed on time. By integrating with email and mobile notifications, users can receive timely reminders regardless of whether they are logged into the platform. This feature not only enhances individual accountability but also promotes team efficiency by ensuring that all members are aware of approaching deadlines.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives notifications for tasks due tomorrow after selecting the 1-day notification option.

Given the user has selected a 1-day advance notification for their tasks, When a task's deadline is set for tomorrow, Then the user should receive a notification at the scheduled time via email and/or mobile app.

User is prompted to select their preferred notification time in the settings menu.

Given the user is in the settings menu, When the user navigates to the notification preferences, Then the user should be able to select notification times (1 day, 3 days, or 1 week) and save their preferences successfully.

A user receives no notifications for a task that is due today if they have disabled notifications for that task.

Given the user has disabled notifications for a specific task, When the task's deadline is reached, Then the user should not receive any notifications for that task.

Notification includes task details such as name and due date when sent to the user.

Given the user has tasks with deadlines approaching, When notifications are sent, Then each notification should include the task name and the due date clearly displayed.

Notifications are sent consistently across all devices when the user is logged into multiple devices.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform on multiple devices, When a deadline notification is triggered, Then the user should receive the notification on all logged devices without omission.

Users can customize notification frequency for each task individually.

Given the user is assigning tasks within the Collaboration Hub, When the user sets a deadline for a task, Then the user should be able to customize the notification frequency for that specific task independently of other tasks.

Task Priority Assignment

"As a project manager, I want to assign priority levels to tasks so that my team can focus on the most important tasks first and improve our overall efficiency."

Description

The Task Priority Assignment requirement allows users to categorize tasks based on their urgency and importance within the Collaboration Hub. Users can assign priority levels such as high, medium, or low to each task, facilitating effective prioritization of work processes. This capability helps teams focus on the most critical tasks first, optimizing productivity and ensuring that significant deadlines are met. The integration with the Task Viewer enables users to visualize tasks by priority, which can enhance decision-making and resource allocation during collaborative projects, ultimately leading to improved outcomes and efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Assigning Task Priorities in the Collaboration Hub

Given a user is logged into the Collaboration Hub, when they select a task, then they should be able to assign a priority level (high, medium, low) to the task and save the changes successfully.

Visualizing Task Priorities in the Task Viewer

Given that tasks have been assigned priority levels, when a user accesses the Task Viewer, then they should be able to see tasks listed according to their priority levels, with high priority tasks displayed at the top.

Filtering Tasks by Priority Levels

Given a user is in the Task Viewer, when they apply a filter to display tasks by a specific priority level, then the system should only show the tasks that correspond to the selected priority (high, medium, low).

Notifications for High-Priority Tasks

Given a user has assigned high priority to a task, when the deadline for that task approaches, then the user should receive a notification reminding them of the upcoming deadline for that high priority task.

Editing Task Priority After Assignment

Given a user has assigned a priority to a task, when the user decides to change the priority of that task, then they should be able to update the priority and see the changes reflected immediately in the Task Viewer.

Tracking Changes to Task Priorities

Given a user has change history enabled, when they assign or edit the priority of a task, then the system should log this change and allow users to view the history of priority changes for accountability.

Task Comments and Feedback

"As a team member, I want to leave comments on tasks so that I can share updates and raise questions directly related to my work, fostering collaboration and clarity."

Description

The Task Comments and Feedback requirement will allow users to leave comments and feedback on specific tasks within the Collaboration Hub, facilitating communication and collaboration among team members. This feature enables users to provide updates, raise questions, and discuss challenges related to their tasks directly on the platform. By streamlining communication, the Task Comments and Feedback feature will help teams stay aligned, resolve issues quickly, and maintain clarity throughout the project timeline. This integration is essential for enhancing teamwork and ensuring that all members are informed about progress and concerns.

Acceptance Criteria

User leaves a comment on a task assigned to them in the Collaboration Hub.

Given a task is assigned to a user, when the user leaves a comment on that task, then the comment should be visible to all team members assigned to the task.

User should receive a notification when a comment is added to a task they are following.

Given a user is following a task, when a comment is added to that task, then the user should receive a notification in their notification center.

User should be able to edit their own comments on a task within the Collaboration Hub.

Given a user has left a comment on a task, when the user chooses to edit that comment, then the edited comment should replace the original, and the timestamp of the edit should be updated.

User should be able to delete their own comments on a task.

Given a user has left a comment on a task, when the user chooses to delete that comment, then the comment should be permanently removed and not visible to any team members.

Team members can view the comment history of a task to track discussions and updates.

Given a task has comments, when a user views the comments section of that task, then they should see a list of all comments in chronological order, including user names and timestamps.

Task Status Updates

"As a team member, I want to update the status of my tasks so that my team knows where I am on my assignments and can plan accordingly."

Description

The Task Status Updates requirement enables users to update the status of their assigned tasks within the Collaboration Hub, providing real-time insights into project progress. Users can set task statuses such as 'Not Started', 'In Progress', 'Completed', or 'On Hold'. This visibility will help team members and leaders alike understand where each task stands and facilitate timely interventions if necessary. By promoting transparency and accountability, this feature enhances overall project management effectiveness and ensures that everyone is aware of the current state of the project.

Acceptance Criteria

Updating Task Status by a Team Member

Given a team member has access to the Task Assignment Board, when they select a task and update its status to 'In Progress', then the status of that task should be reflected as 'In Progress' for all team members viewing the board.

Viewing Task Status by Team Leaders

Given a team leader checks the Task Assignment Board, when they view the task list, then they should see the current status of all tasks, including those marked as 'Not Started', 'In Progress', 'Completed', and 'On Hold'.

Filtering Tasks by Status

Given a user is on the Task Assignment Board, when they apply a filter to show only 'Completed' tasks, then only tasks with the status 'Completed' should be displayed.

Real-time Synchronization of Task Updates

Given multiple users are accessing the Task Assignment Board, when one user updates the status of a task, then all other users should see the updated status within 5 seconds of the change.

Setting Task Status to 'On Hold'

Given a team member has access to the Task Assignment Board, when they update a task's status to 'On Hold', then the system should allow this status change without errors and provide a prompt for optional comments about the hold reason.

Tracking Task Updates History

Given a user has access to a task on the Task Assignment Board, when they view the task details, then they should be able to see the complete history of status changes for that task.

Notification of Task Status Changes

Given a user is assigned to a task, when the status of that task is updated by another user, then the assigned user should receive a notification about the status change.

Live Data Analytics Integration

Incorporates advanced data analytics tools that allow users to visualize financial data in real-time within shared documents. Team members can collaborate on projections and financial reports while instantly seeing the impact of their changes, leading to more informed discussions and better strategic planning.

Requirements

Real-time Data Sync

"As a small business owner, I want real-time synchronization of my financial data so that I can collaborate with my team seamlessly and make better-informed decisions based on up-to-date insights."

Description

The Real-time Data Sync requirement involves integrating live data streaming capabilities that allow users to visualize financial data in real-time within their shared documents. This enhancement will enable multiple users to make and view updates simultaneously, ensuring that all team members have access to the latest financial information from various sources without delays. By implementing this feature, users can collaborate effectively, making more informed decisions based on accurate and current data, which ultimately enhances strategic planning and operational efficiency. Furthermore, such integration will support various data formats and ensure compatibility with other financial tools and software within the FundSweep ecosystem.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time updates during collaborative financial analysis meetings where multiple users assess budget forecasts and make adjustments simultaneously.

Given that multiple users are accessing a shared document, When one user makes a change to a data point, Then the other users should see the updated information within 3 seconds without needing to refresh.

Visualization of financial data in real-time when users are creating joint reports and presentations for stakeholders.

Given that users are creating a shared financial report, When data is updated, Then all visualizations (charts, graphs) should reflect the most current data within 2 seconds of the change.

Users are analyzing monthly expenses in a shared workspace with real-time inputs from various team members.

Given that real-time data sync is enabled, When a team member adds a new expense, Then the updated expense data should appear on all users' screens, and the monthly total should recalculate automatically.

Multiple users are discussing sales projections and adjusting figures in real-time during a strategy planning session.

Given a real-time data connection, When changes are made to sales figures, Then users should receive notifications of changes made by others within 5 seconds to ensure collaborative awareness.

Users need to ensure that changes made on one device are synchronized and visible on all team members' devices.

Given simultaneous access from different users, When a change is made on one device, Then that change must be reflected across all devices within 3 seconds to confirm the reliability of data sync.

Users are utilizing third-party financial tools that integrate with FundSweep for real-time synchronization of data.

Given that the integration with other financial tools is active, When users update data in a third-party tool, Then the corresponding data in the FundSweep platform should update in real-time without user intervention.

Users need to collaborate on financial reports that utilize data from multiple formats and software.

Given that various data formats are supported, When users share documents containing mixed data sources, Then all data should be integrated and displayed correctly in real-time, enabling effective analysis without data loss.

Interactive Visualization Tools

"As a freelancer, I want interactive visualization tools to easily understand my financial trends and projections so that I can make informed decisions about my projects and budgeting."

Description

The Interactive Visualization Tools requirement focuses on providing users with advanced analytics features such as charts, graphs, and dashboards that visually represent financial data trends and projections. Users will be able to customize visualizations according to their specific needs and preferences, thus promoting a better understanding of complex data sets. This requirement not only enhances user engagement but also enables quick identification of significant financial patterns, risks, or opportunities. Through these tools, FundSweep aims to empower users to interpret their financial data more effectively and to facilitate discussions that can lead to informed strategic decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes a Financial Dashboard with Interactive Visualizations

Given that the user is on the customization page, when they select a financial metric and choose a visualization type, then the selected metric should display correctly in the chosen format on their dashboard.

Team Member Collaborates on Financial Report Using Real-Time Data Visualizations

Given that two team members are working on a shared financial report, when one member updates a data point, then the other member should see the update in real time without needing to refresh the document.

User Identifies Financial Trends Using Visualization Tools

Given that the user has selected a range of financial data, when they apply the line graph visualization, then the resulting graph should accurately reflect the trends in the selected data over time, with correctly labeled axes.

User Saves Customized Visualization Settings for Future Use

Given that the user has created a customized financial chart, when they save the settings, then the next time they access the visualization tool, their saved chart settings should be available and applied automatically.

User Receives Insights Based on Visualization Analysis

Given that the user is viewing a completed financial visualization, when they click on a highlighted data point, then they should receive an actionable insight or recommendation based on the data represented.

User Shares Visualizations with External Stakeholders

Given that the user has created a financial visualization, when they choose to share it via email or link, then the shared visualization should be accessible to the recipient without any loss of data fidelity or interactive elements.

Users View Multi-Currency Financial Data in Visualizations

Given that a user operates in multiple currencies, when they select the currency for a financial visualization, then the data should accurately convert and display in the chosen currency according to the latest exchange rates.

Collaborative Report Creation

"As a team member, I want to collaborate on financial reports in real-time so that I can contribute my insights and ensure our reports are accurate and reflect all viewpoints before final submission."

Description

The Collaborative Report Creation requirement entails enabling multiple users to work simultaneously on financial reports and projections within the platform. Users will have the option to comment, suggest edits, and track changes in real-time, thereby enhancing team collaboration and transparency in the financial review process. This requirement is vital for facilitating teamwork, ensuring that all team members can contribute their expertise, and resulting in comprehensive financial reports that consider diverse perspectives. Additionally, it allows for the generation of reports that are not only accurate but also dynamically adjusted to reflect any last-minute changes by any team member, fostering a responsive workflow.

Acceptance Criteria

Multiple users collaboratively creating a financial report in FundSweep during a team meeting.

Given multiple users are active in the report, when one user makes an edit, then all other users should see the changes reflected in real-time within 2 seconds.

Team members providing comments on specific sections of a financial report to enhance clarity and feedback.

Given a user has added a comment to a specific report section, when another user views the report, then the comment should be visible and accessible to all collaborators.

Users tracking changes made to a financial report to assess contributions and revisions from the team.

Given a report has undergone multiple edits, when a user views the 'Track Changes' mode, then all changes should be highlighted, showing the user who made each change and when they were made.

Generating and downloading a finalized financial report after collaboration.

Given all collaborators have agreed on the final version of the report, when the report is generated, then it should be downloadable in both PDF and Excel formats with all changes reflected accurately.

Users discussing and analyzing the impact of projected financial data in real-time during team discussions.

Given the financial data has been visualized within the document, when a user changes a projection parameter, then the visual representation and analytics should update instantly for all users.

Ensuring each team member receives notifications for specific activities within the report to maintain awareness and responsibilities.

Given a user comments on a report, when the comment is posted, then all other collaborators should receive a notification about the new comment within the application.

Enabling the editing of reports across different devices for flexibility in collaboration.

Given a user is editing the report on one device, when they switch to another device, then the latest version of the report should sync and reflect all recent changes made.

User Activity Tracking and Analytics

"As a product manager, I want to track user activity within the platform so that I can identify usage trends and improve user engagement and satisfaction with our analytics tools."

Description

The User Activity Tracking and Analytics requirement will introduce features that monitor and analyze user interactions within the FundSweep platform. It will provide insights into user engagement, allowing administrators to understand how team members are utilizing the analytics tools and identifying areas for improvement. This capability helps in enhancing the user experience by tailoring the platform features to better meet users' needs. By tracking user activity, FundSweep can ensure that its tools are being used effectively and can guide future improvements based on actual usage patterns.

Acceptance Criteria

User Engagement Analytics Dashboard Use Case

Given the User Activity Tracking is implemented, when an administrator accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should see a comprehensive report of individual user engagement metrics such as sessions logged, features used, and time spent on each feature for the past 30 days.

Real-time Collaboration Impact Tracking

Given that team members are collaborating on a financial report, when they make changes to the shared document, then the analytics tracking should accurately record each user's contributions, indicating the changes made alongside timestamps.

Identifying Underutilized Features

Given that user activity is being tracked, when an administrator runs a report to identify underutilized features, then the system should provide a list of features that have received less than 10% utilization over the past month along with user engagement data.

User Activity Summary Notifications

Given that user activity has been tracked over a defined period, when the administrator checks the notifications, then they should receive a summarized report of user engagement, indicating any significant changes or trends that need attention.

Feedback Loop for Feature Improvement

Given that user activity data is collected, when an administrator analyzes the trends, then they should have the ability to generate a report that includes user feedback collected via surveys related to the features they utilized most or least, ensuring alignment for future improvements.

Data Export for External Analysis

Given that user activity tracking is functioning, when the administrator requests a data export of user analytics, then the system should provide a downloadable CSV file containing detailed user interaction metrics, segmented by date and feature usage.

System Performance Based on User Activity

Given that user activity is being monitored, when the system experiences slow performance, then the analytics tracking should provide insights correlating system load with peaks in user activity to facilitate performance optimizations.

Data Security Compliance

"As a business owner, I need assurance that my financial data is secure and compliant with regulations so that I can trust the platform and focus on my business without worrying about data breaches."

Description

The Data Security Compliance requirement focuses on ensuring that all live data transmissions and user collaborations within the platform adhere to strict security protocols and compliance standards. It involves implementing advanced encryption methods, secure authentication processes, and maintaining a comprehensive audit log of all user interactions. This requirement is crucial for protecting sensitive financial information and reassuring users that their data is safeguarded against unauthorized access or breaches. Compliance with relevant regulations will not only enhance the platform's credibility but also position FundSweep as a trustworthy option in the financial management sector.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses live data analytics tools within FundSweep to analyze financial reports during a team meeting.

Given the user is logged in, when they access the live data analytics feature, then all data transmissions must be encrypted using AES-256 encryption.

Team members collaborate on a financial projection document, making changes that reflect real-time data analysis.

Given a document is shared among team members, when any user makes modifications, then an audit log must be updated to reflect the user, timestamp, and changes made.

A user attempts to access sensitive financial data without proper authentication.

Given a user is not authenticated, when they attempt to view or edit secured financial data, then access must be denied and a security alert generated.

A team member shares a financial report and lists collaborators who can edit the document.

Given a user shares a document with specific collaborators, when those collaborators log in, then they must have a secure, single-sign-on authentication to access the report.

During a compliance audit, regulatory authorities review user interactions on the platform.

Given the regulatory authorities are conducting an audit, when they request logs of user interactions, then a comprehensive report of all audit logs must be accessible and include user IDs, timestamps, and actions taken.

Users engage with AI-driven analytics while maintaining secure data practices.

Given users are utilizing AI analytics tools, when they receive personalized insights, then all data queries and responses must comply with GDPR regulations for personal data protection.

Multi-Currency Support

"As an independent contractor working with clients from different countries, I want multi-currency support so that I can manage my financial reports in the correct currency and avoid confusion in my invoicing and budgeting."

Description

The Multi-Currency Support requirement will enable users to operate in various currencies seamlessly. This feature is essential for businesses that deal with international clients or suppliers. Users will be able to view, analyze, and report on financial data in their preferred currency, with real-time conversion rates applied automatically. This capability will enhance usability for a global audience and improve the accuracy of financial reporting across different currencies, thus ensuring that users have a comprehensive view of their financial status regardless of location. Furthermore, it will assist in effective budgeting and forecasting in a multi-currency environment.

Acceptance Criteria

User engages with FundSweep to generate a financial report for a project involving international clients operating in different currencies.

Given the user selects the project report feature, When they choose multiple currencies for the report, Then the system should automatically convert each transaction to the selected reporting currency using real-time conversion rates.

A user updates an invoice in USD and wants to view the impact of that change in EUR simultaneously on the shared document.

Given the user updates an invoice in USD, When they switch to view the document in EUR, Then the system should reflect the updated invoice amount converted to EUR in real-time without manual refresh.

A small business owner wants to set their default currency preference for all reports and invoices created within FundSweep.

Given the user navigates to settings and selects their preferred currency, When they save their preferences, Then all future reports and invoices should default to the selected currency until changed by the user.

A freelancer in a multi-currency environment needs to generate budget forecasts in their local currency while dealing with clients in various currencies.

Given the user creates a new budget forecast, When they input amounts in different currencies, Then the system should compute and display the total in their local currency applying the current exchange rates for accurate budgeting.

A finance manager wants to review the company's financial performance across multiple currencies over the past quarter.

Given the user accesses the performance dashboard, When they select the quarterly report and specify the currencies involved, Then the dashboard should display a comparative analysis including all relevant currencies side by side with correct conversions.

Instant Notification Alerts

Users receive real-time notifications for any changes, comments, or tasks assigned within the collaboration hub. This feature ensures that team members are always kept in the loop, reducing delays in project execution and fostering proactive engagement among collaborators.

Requirements

Real-time Notification System

"As a small business owner, I want to receive instant notifications for any changes or tasks assigned to me, so that I can stay informed and respond promptly to keep my projects on track."

Description

The Real-time Notification System ensures that users receive instant alerts for any updates, comments, or tasks assigned within the FundSweep collaboration hub. This system utilizes push notifications and in-app alerts to inform users of relevant activities, enabling them to respond swiftly and keep projects moving forward. By integrating seamlessly with existing user interactions, this requirement enhances overall productivity, reduces the risk of missed communications, and fosters a more engaged team environment. It is critical for maintaining project momentum and improving collaborative efforts, allowing users to stay informed and proactive in their financial management tasks.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives notifications of any update made to project tasks in real time via both push notifications and in-app alerts.

Given a user is actively using the collaboration hub, when a project task is updated, then the user must receive an instant push notification and an in-app alert to inform them of the change.

Users are notified of comments added to project tasks by team members in real time to encourage prompt responses and collaboration.

Given a user is working on a shared task, when another team member leaves a comment on that task, then the user must receive both a push notification and an in-app alert for the new comment immediately.

Users are alerted instantly when tasks are assigned to them by other users, ensuring they remain aware of their responsibilities and can act promptly.

Given a user has been assigned a new task, when the assignment is made, then the user must receive an instant push notification and an in-app alert detailing the task assignment.

Users can customize their notification preferences to control the types of updates they want to receive.

Given a user accesses their notification settings, when they customize their preferences to include or exclude specific updates, then those preferences must be saved and applied to all future notifications.

Users are able to review a log of all received notifications to track their project engagement over time.

Given a user wishes to review their notifications, when they access the notifications log, then they must be able to view a comprehensive list of all past notifications with timestamps.

Users can test the notification system to ensure they receive alerts as intended before critical project deadlines.

Given a user initiates a test notification, when the test is executed, then the user must receive a push notification and an in-app alert confirming the successful operation of the notification system.

Users can opt-out of certain types of notifications while still receiving essential alerts that are crucial for their project success.

Given a user wants to modify their notification preferences, when they opt-out of certain notifications, then the changes should reflect in their settings, and they must only receive the notifications they have opted to keep.

Customizable Notification Preferences

"As a freelancer, I want to customize my notification preferences so that I can prioritize which alerts I receive and when, allowing me to focus on my work without being overwhelmed."

Description

The Customizable Notification Preferences requirement allows users to tailor the types and frequencies of notifications they receive based on their individual needs and roles within FundSweep. Users can choose to receive alerts for specific activities, such as task assignments, project updates, or financial insights, and can set quiet hours or do-not-disturb modes to optimize their workflow without distractions. This flexibility empowers users to manage their engagement with the platform better, enhancing user satisfaction and productivity by ensuring that they only receive the information that is most relevant to them.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customization of Notification Preferences for Task Assignments

Given a user is on the notification preferences page, When they select the option to receive notifications for task assignments and save their preferences, Then they will receive instant notifications for all future task assignments relevant to them.

Setting Do-Not-Disturb Mode for Notifications

Given a user wants to set up a do-not-disturb mode, When they specify the hours during which they do not want to receive notifications and confirm, Then no notifications will be sent during those specified hours.

Choosing Frequency of Project Update Notifications

Given a user is on the notification preferences page, When they choose to receive project update notifications weekly instead of daily and save their preferences, Then they will only receive a summary notification once a week instead of daily updates.

Receiving Financial Insights Notifications

Given a user selects to receive notifications for financial insights, When a new financial insight report is generated, Then they will receive an alert immediately after it is available.

Changing Notification Preferences for Multiple Roles

Given a user has roles as both a project manager and a contributor, When they customize their notification settings for each role independently and save the preferences, Then they will receive role-specific notifications without any overlap.

Verifying Notification Preferences Updates

Given a user has updated their notification preferences, When they navigate back to the notification preferences page, Then they should see the updated settings reflected accurately on the page.

Testing Notification Delivery During Quiet Hours

Given a user has set quiet hours for notifications, When an event occurs during this period, Then the event notification will be logged but not delivered until the quiet hours have ended.

Notification History Log

"As an independent contractor, I want to access a history of my notifications so that I can refer back to important updates and ensure I haven’t missed any critical information regarding my projects."

Description

The Notification History Log requirement provides users with a comprehensive record of all notifications they have received, along with timestamps and the ability to filter by type. This feature enhances accountability and ensures that users can refer back to vital information that may have been missed at the time it was sent. The log promotes transparency within teams and allows users to review past communications, fostering improved coordination and collaboration. This feature also aids in tracking changes and updates over time, reinforcing a structured approach to financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Notification History Log to review past notifications during a team meeting to ensure everyone is updated on project progress.

Given that the user is logged in and navigates to the Notification History Log, When the user selects a specific notification type filter, Then the displayed notifications should only include those of the selected type within the specified timeframe.

A team member receives a notification about a project update and later wishes to reference it from the Notification History Log.

Given that the notification was received and stored, When the user searches the Notification History Log for the relevant notification using keywords, Then the expected notification should appear in the results with the correct timestamp and details.

A user wants to check their Notification History Log to find out how many changes were made to a particular financial document over the past month.

Given that the user filters the Notification History Log by document type and sets a date range of one month, When the user applies the filter, Then the log should display all notifications related to the specified document type within that date range and reflect accurate counts.

The system administrator verifies that the Notification History Log reflects the correct notifications sent by the system at specific times.

Given that notifications are sent automatically by the system, When the administrator reviews the Notification History Log, Then all notifications should accurately reflect their original timestamps and content as intended.

A user wants to ensure that all notifications related to assigned tasks are documented within the Notification History Log for better accountability.

Given that the user accesses the Notification History Log, When filtering by type 'Task Assignment', Then all relevant task assignment notifications should be displayed with accurate details and timestamps.

The user seeks clarity on notification handling and wants to understand which notifications were missed in the previous week.

Given that the user accesses the Notification History Log and selects the last week as a filter, When the user reviews the filtered notifications, Then any missed notifications should be highlighted or marked clearly.

Secure Access Control

This feature allows users to set custom access levels for specific collaborators based on their roles. By controlling who can view, edit, or comment on documents, users can maintain sensitive financial information security, enhancing trust while ensuring effective collaboration.

Requirements

User Role Management

"As a business owner, I want to set custom access levels for my team members so that I can protect sensitive financial information while enabling effective collaboration on projects."

Description

The User Role Management requirement enables users to define and create custom roles with specific permissions for each collaborator within the FundSweep platform. This functionality is essential for enhancing document security by allowing the owner to restrict access to sensitive financial information based on roles such as 'Viewer', 'Editor', or 'Administrator'. Implementing this requirement will facilitate effective collaboration while ensuring sensitive data is only accessible to authorized personnel. The feature will also include a user-friendly interface for role assignment and an audit log to track changes in permissions, providing transparency and accountability in access control.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new collaborator role with specific permissions for access control.

Given a user with Administrator role, When they create a new role named 'Viewer' with permission to only view documents, Then the role should be saved and visible in the roles list with the correct permissions reflected.

User assigns a custom role to a collaborator and verifies the access.

Given a user has assigned the 'Editor' role to a collaborator, When the collaborator logs in, Then they should have the ability to edit documents but not delete them or change permissions.

User modifies an existing role and checks the impact on collaborative access.

Given a user modifies the 'Administrator' role to remove the ability to edit documents, When they save the changes and the collaborator logs in, Then the collaborator should not have edit permissions for any documents.

User checks the audit log for permission changes made to custom roles.

Given a system with defined roles and past permission changes, When a user accesses the audit log, Then all changes of permissions including who made them and when, should be accurately listed and traceable.

User attempts to assign a role with invalid permissions to a collaborator.

Given a user attempts to create a role with both 'Edit' and 'View' permissions restricted, When they try to save the role, Then an error message should appear indicating that the role is not valid due to conflicting permissions.

Administrator reviews all roles and permissions assigned to collaborators.

Given a user with Administrator access, When they navigates to the roles management section, Then they should see a comprehensive list of all roles, their permissions, and the collaborators assigned to each role.

User invites a new collaborator with a custom role and checks access.

Given a user invites a new collaborator with the 'Viewer' role, When the collaborator accepts the invitation and logs in, Then they should only be able to view documents without access to editing or sharing functionalities.

Document Version Control

"As a freelancer, I want to track changes made to documents so that I can ensure the accuracy of my financial records and restore previous versions if necessary."

Description

The Document Version Control requirement provides users with the ability to track changes made to financial documents over time. This feature is crucial for maintaining data integrity and accountability, allowing users to view a history of edits, restore previous versions, and identify who made specific changes. By implementing this requirement, FundSweep will enhance the user experience by providing confidence in document management and ensuring that important financial information is accurate and reliable. Additionally, users can easily manage the timeline of their documents, preventing data loss and promoting collaboration.

Acceptance Criteria

User tracks changes made to a financial budget document over a month, reviewing all past edits and restoring a previous version if necessary.

Given a financial budget document has been edited multiple times, when the user accesses the version control feature, then they should see a chronological list of all changes, with timestamps and user identifiers for each edit, and an option to restore any previous version of the document.

User collaborates with a team where some members need edit access and others require view-only access to a financial report.

Given a financial report is shared with multiple collaborators, when the user sets access levels for different collaborators, then the specified members should have the appropriate access (edit/view/comment) as defined by the user, and attempts to violate these settings should be prevented.

User wants to review and validate all changes made to their invoice documents over the past year to ensure accuracy before submission.

Given an invoice document with several revisions, when the user selects the version history, then they should be able to view all previous versions, details of changes, who made them, and when, and be able to compare any version with the current version side by side.

A user accidentally deletes important information from a financial report and wishes to restore it.

Given the user has made recent changes to a financial report, when the user navigates to the version control feature and selects 'restore', then the previous version with all original information should be restored without loss of other recent edits made after that version.

A user is auditing their financial documents and needs to ensure that version control is functioning correctly across various document types.

Given that the user has various types of financial documents (budgets, invoices, reports), when they utilize the version control feature on each document type, then each document should display a consistent versioning history that allows for viewing, restoring, and comparing versions accurately.

Multi-Factor Authentication

"As a user, I want to enable Multi-Factor Authentication so that I can enhance the security of my account against unauthorized access."

Description

The Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) requirement mandates an extra layer of security for user accounts on the FundSweep platform. By requiring users to authenticate their identity through multiple methods, such as a password and a unique code sent to their mobile device, this feature significantly reduces the risk of unauthorized access to sensitive financial data. Implementing MFA will enhance user trust in the platform’s security measures, ensuring that only legitimate users can access their accounts. The requirement will include options for users to enable or disable MFA and provide guidance on setting it up effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates the MFA setup process in their account settings to enhance security for their FundSweep profile.

Given the user is on the account settings page, when they select the option to enable Multi-Factor Authentication, then they should be prompted to enter their password and a phone number to receive a unique code.

User logs into their FundSweep account after enabling MFA to test that the system requires the additional authentication step.

Given the user has enabled Multi-Factor Authentication, when they enter their username and password, then they should be prompted to enter a unique verification code sent to their mobile device before logging in.

User attempts to disable MFA in their account settings after previously enabling it.

Given the user is on the account settings page and has enabled Multi-Factor Authentication, when they select the option to disable MFA, then they should be required to enter their password for verification before disabling the feature.

User receives the verification code via SMS during the login process after enabling MFA.

Given the user has enabled MFA and entered their username and password, when the system sends a verification code to the user's registered mobile number, then the user should receive the code within 60 seconds.

User interacts with the MFA setup guidance to ensure proper configuration and understanding of the feature.

Given the user is on the MFA setup page, when they click on the help icon, then they should see a tutorial or FAQ that explains how to set up and use Multi-Factor Authentication effectively.

A user attempts to log in with incorrect MFA credentials to test the security of their account.

Given the user has entered their username and password correctly but inputs an incorrect MFA code, when they attempt to log in, then they should receive an error message indicating the code is invalid and prompted to try again.

Administrator reviews the MFA settings across user accounts to ensure compliance and security standards.

Given the administrator accesses the user settings dashboard, when they view the MFA status for all users, then they should see a clearly labeled list showing who has MFA enabled, along with options to send reminders to users without MFA.

Activity Monitoring Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want to monitor activity on my account so that I can ensure the safety of my financial information and take action if I notice any unauthorized access."

Description

The Activity Monitoring Dashboard requirement involves creating a comprehensive dashboard for users to view recent activities and changes made within their accounts. This feature will allow users to track who accessed their financial documents, what changes were made, and when these actions occurred. By providing real-time updates and an intuitive interface, this dashboard enhances the overall security and transparency of the FundSweep platform. Users will have the ability to filter activities by date, user, or document, enabling them to maintain better control over their financial information and respond quickly to any suspicious actions.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing the Activity Monitoring Dashboard to review recent activities and changes made within the user's account.

Given a user logs into FundSweep, when they navigate to the Activity Monitoring Dashboard, then they should see a comprehensive list of recent activities including user actions, timestamps, and document changes.

Filtering the activity log by user to view specific actions taken within a defined period.

Given a user is on the Activity Monitoring Dashboard, when they select a specific user from the filter options and choose a date range, then only the activities performed by that user within the selected date range should be displayed.

Monitoring real-time updates within the Activity Monitoring Dashboard to ensure users are aware of immediate changes.

Given a user is observing the Activity Monitoring Dashboard, when any changes are made to the financial documents, then the dashboard should automatically refresh and display the latest activity within 5 seconds.

Identifying activities that are marked as suspicious within the Activity Monitoring Dashboard.

Given a user is viewing the Activity Monitoring Dashboard, when they filter the activities for any suspicious markers (such as multiple failed access attempts), then those activities should be highlighted distinctly in red or flagged for review.

Exporting activity logs for external review and auditing purposes.

Given a user is on the Activity Monitoring Dashboard, when they initiate an export of the displayed activity logs, then a downloadable CSV file should be generated containing all the currently viewed activities with accurate formatting and timestamp details.

Access control validation for the Activity Monitoring Dashboard based on user permissions.

Given a user with restricted access attempts to view the Activity Monitoring Dashboard, when they try to access the dashboard, then they should receive an appropriate error message indicating insufficient permissions and be redirected to their profile page.

Custom Notifications and Alerts

"As a user, I want to receive custom notifications for important changes in my account so that I can stay informed and take timely action when necessary."

Description

The Custom Notifications and Alerts requirement allows users to set specific alerts for significant actions taken within their account, such as changes in access permissions or document edits. This feature will improve user engagement and security by keeping users informed about critical updates in real time. Users can customize their notification preferences, selecting the types of alerts they wish to receive, whether via email, SMS, or in-app notifications. By implementing this requirement, FundSweep can ensure that users maintain awareness of their account activities and can respond promptly to potential issues.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up a new notification for access changes in their account settings.

Given the user is on the Notifications settings page, when they select 'Access Changes' from the list of alert types and save their preferences, then they should receive a confirmation message displaying 'Notification settings updated.'

User customizes notification preferences for document edits based on their choice of communication channel.

Given the user is viewing the notification preferences, when they check the box for 'Document Edits' and select 'Email' as their preferred notification method, then the system should allow them to save this preference successfully and indicate it on the preferences list.

User receives a notification via the selected communication channel when an access permission is changed.

Given a collaborator's access permissions are modified, when the change is saved, then the user should receive a notification through the chosen channel as configured in their settings (email/SMS/in-app).

User accesses the notification logs to review past notifications received regarding their account activity.

Given the user navigates to the Notification History page, when they choose to view notifications related to 'Access Changes,' then the system should display a list of all past notifications for that category, along with timestamps of when they were sent.

User attempts to configure notifications without internet connectivity.

Given the user is on the notification settings page and is offline, when they attempt to save changes to their notification preferences, then the system should provide an error message stating 'Unable to save changes. Please check your internet connection.'

User deletes an existing notification alert and reviews the confirmation prompts.

Given the user is on the notifications setting page, when they click on the delete option for a specific alert and confirm the action, then the alert should be removed, and the user should receive a message confirming the deletion of that notification.

Template Library

Access a comprehensive library of pre-designed templates for invoices, budgets, and expense reports. Users can choose from various styles tailored to different industries, saving time on document creation and ensuring professionalism in their financial communications.

Requirements

Dynamic Template Selection

"As a small business owner, I want to easily access and choose from a variety of template styles for my financial documents so that I can save time and present a professional image to my clients."

Description

Implement a dynamic template selection feature that allows users to filter and choose from a comprehensive library of pre-designed templates for invoices, budgets, and expense reports. This functionality should enable users to easily browse templates by industry, style, and purpose. The benefit of this requirement is to provide users with a tailored experience that speeds up document creation while ensuring professionalism in all financial communications. Integration with the existing user interface should facilitate an intuitive navigation experience and allow users to preview templates before selection, ultimately enhancing the usability and efficiency of the FundSweep platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User navigates to the Template Library and uses filters to find a specific type of template for an invoice targeted at service-based businesses.

Given the user is on the Template Library page, when they select 'invoices' as the document type and 'service-based' as the industry, then the displayed templates should only include service-based invoice templates.

User uses the dynamic template selection feature to preview a template before finalizing their choice.

Given the user has selected a template from the library, when they click on the 'preview' button, then a modal should open displaying the full template design with details.

User attempts to apply multiple filtering criteria to find a budget template for a retail business.

Given the user is filtering templates, when they select 'budget' as the document type and 'retail' as the industry and apply the filters, then the system should return all matching budget templates tailored for retail.

User finds a template that perfectly suits their needs and selects it for use in preparing an expense report.

Given the user has selected a template, when they confirm their selection, then the template should be loaded into the document creation interface ready for editing.

User wants to switch from the current template filter to a new category without losing previous selections.

Given the user is filtering templates, when they change the filter from 'invoice' to 'expense report', then the previous selections should be reset while keeping the state of the library accessible.

User interacts with the template selection system on a mobile device.

Given the user is accessing FundSweep on a mobile device, when they navigate to the Template Library, then the template selection feature should be fully responsive and maintain usability.

User wants a template that meets specific brand requirements, such as adding a logo or changing colors.

Given the user has selected a template, when they enter brand customization options such as logo upload or color selection, then the template should reflect those changes in real-time.

Template Preview Functionality

"As a freelancer, I want to preview how my invoices will appear with my selected template filled with my information so that I can ensure accuracy and professionalism before sending them to clients."

Description

Introduce a template preview functionality that allows users to visualize how their selected templates will look once filled out with their data. This feature should provide an accurate representation of the final document, enabling users to ensure that the formatting meets their expectations before finalizing the document. Integrating this feature will enhance user confidence and satisfaction by reducing the chances of errors in the documents they send out. It will also streamline the template selection process by allowing users to make informed decisions based on a visual representation of their choices.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a template from the Template Library to create an invoice and initiates the preview functionality before finalizing their document.

Given the user has selected an invoice template, When the user clicks on the preview button, Then the application displays a filled-out version of the template showing all the user's entered details accurately formatted.

User has filled in an expense report template and wants to ensure the layout and formatting are correct before submission.

Given the user has input data into the expense report template, When the user clicks on the preview button, Then the preview accurately reflects the structure, style, and content of the final document as it will appear when printed or sent.

User is deciding between different budget templates for their business and wants to see how they differ visually.

Given the user is browsing the Template Library, When the user selects multiple budget templates and clicks on the preview option, Then the application displays a side-by-side comparison of each template filled with demo data.

User has used a template multiple times and wants to verify that recent changes reflect accurately in the preview before reusing it.

Given the user has edited a previously used template, When they click on the preview button, Then the preview shows the updated content with all recent changes incorporated without any loss of original formatting.

User needs to preview a template that supports multi-currency features to ensure correct currency formatting.

Given the user selects a multi-currency template, When the user inputs values in different currencies and clicks on the preview button, Then the application displays the values formatted correctly according to the selected currencies.

User wishes to share the preview with a client for feedback before finalizing an invoice.

Given the user is in the invoice preview mode, When they click on the share option, Then the application allows them to send a link to the preview to the client, ensuring the client sees exactly what the document will look like.

User wants to preview a template on various devices to ensure responsiveness and layout compatibility.

Given the user is previewing a template, When they select different device views (desktop, tablet, mobile), Then the application displays the template appropriately formatted for each selected device type.

Industry-Specific Templates

"As an independent contractor, I want to access templates that are tailored to my industry so that I can ensure compliance with industry standards and present my work professionally."

Description

Develop a set of industry-specific templates that cater to the unique requirements of various sectors, such as construction, consulting, and retail. This requirement aims to help users find templates that not only meet their general needs but also comply with industry standards. By providing an extensive library of specialized templates, users can easily maintain professionalism and ensure they are meeting the specific expectations of their industry. This feature will significantly reduce the time spent on document creation and promote user confidence in their financial communications.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a template from the Template Library specific to their industry while creating an invoice.

Given the user is logged into FundSweep and accessing the Template Library, when they filter templates by their specific industry, then they should see only industry-specific templates relevant to that sector.

User customizes an industry-specific invoice template and saves it for future use.

Given the user has selected an industry-specific invoice template, when they make customizations and save the template, then the template should be stored in their account and available for future invoicing.

User generates a report using an industry-specific expense report template.

Given the user is in the expense reporting section of FundSweep, when they select an industry-specific expense report template and fill it out, then they should be able to successfully generate and download the report in the specified format (PDF, DOCX).

User wants to ensure the compliance of their financial communications with industry standards using templates.

Given the user selects an industry-specific template, when they review the template features, then they should see a compliance checklist indicating that the template meets the necessary industry standards for financial reporting.

A new industry-specific template is added to the library.

Given a new template is created for a specific industry, when the template is published in the Template Library, then it should be searchable and visible to users in that industry category within 24 hours of deployment.

User accesses customer support to inquire about the available industry-specific templates.

Given the user accesses the customer support section, when they submit an inquiry about industry-specific templates, then they should receive a response within 24 hours detailing available templates and their features.

Template Customization Options

"As a small business owner, I want to customize my invoice templates with my logo and brand colors so that my documents reflect my business identity and enhance brand recognition."

Description

Enable users to customize selected templates with branding elements such as logos, colors, and fonts. This functionality should allow users to create a personalized look for their financial documents, reinforcing their brand identity. The customization options must be straightforward to use, ensuring that users can modify templates without needing advanced design skills. This requirement will add value by empowering users to create unique documents that reflect their business's identity, which can improve client perception and satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Template Library and selects an invoice template to customize for a client presentation.

Given the user has selected a template, when they upload their logo, then the logo appears on the template in the designated area without distortion.

User wants to change the color scheme of a selected budget template to match their brand colors.

Given the user opens customization options, when they select new colors for the template, then the changes are reflected in real-time on the document preview.

User modifies the font style of an expense report template to use a specific company font for consistency across documents.

Given the user selects a different font from the customization menu, when they save the changes, then the updated font is applied to all text areas in the document.

User creates a client-facing invoice that needs to be saved and downloaded for distribution.

Given the user has customized the invoice templates with branding elements, when they click on save and download, then the document is saved in the desired format (PDF, Word) with all customizations applied.

User requires instructions on how to use the customization options effectively while editing a template.

Given the user accesses the Template Library, when they click on the help icon, then a tutorial or guide is displayed, explaining the customization process in clear steps.

User returns to previously customized templates to make further adjustments based on client feedback.

Given the user navigates to the saved templates section, when they open a template they have previously customized, then all previous customizations are intact and editable.

Template Version Control

"As a freelancer, I want to keep track of changes made to my custom templates so that I can revert to an earlier version if I accidentally delete important information or formatting."

Description

Introduce a version control feature that tracks changes to templates, allowing users to see the history of modifications made to their custom templates. This component will provide an audit trail and help users revert to previous versions if needed, ensuring that important formatting and content are not permanently lost. This requirement is essential for users who frequently update their templates or collaborate with others, as it enhances document management and user control over their financial documents.

Acceptance Criteria

User is modifying an invoicing template in FundSweep. They make several changes to the layout and content of the template. After finalizing the updates, they return to the version control feature to review their edit history and potentially revert to an earlier version if necessary.

Given the user has an existing template, when they access the version control feature, then they should see a complete history of modifications with timestamps and notes for each version.

A user accidentally makes significant changes to their budget template. They decide to restore the template to its previous version. They access the version control menu to identify and restore the correct version of the budget template.

Given a user selects a specific version from the template's edit history, when they click on the 'Restore' option, then the template should revert to the selected version, and the user should see a confirmation message of the restoration.

A team of freelancers is working together on a shared expense report template. They want to ensure that changes by one member do not affect the critical formatting created by another member, so they check the version history frequently.

Given multiple users are collaborating on a template, when changes are made by any user, then all modifications should be logged individually in the version control system, without overwriting previous versions, allowing any user to revert changes.

A user is preparing a presentation using various templates and wants to demonstrate the changes made to the templates over time. They navigate through the version history to provide context on the evolution of their documents.

Given a user views the version history, when they request to see detailed changes between two versions, then they should be presented with a side-by-side comparison of content changes and formatting adjustments made.

An accounting firm is finalizing their expense report template for submission. They need to ensure their final version is saved and previously rejected versions are archived for record-keeping.

Given a user finalizes a version of a template, when they confirm the 'Final Version' status, then the previous versions should be locked from editing and moved to an 'Archived Versions' section while remaining accessible for future reference.

A freelance graphic designer wants to quickly check how the templates have changed over time during different project phases to showcase their development process for a client meeting.

Given a user has a series of saved templates, when they click on the version control option, then they should be able to filter versions by date or modification type to quickly access relevant historical templates.

Task Manager

Integrate a robust task management tool within the toolkit that allows users to create, assign, and prioritize tasks related to their financial activities. This feature enhances productivity by keeping users organized and focused on critical deadlines and objectives.

Requirements

Task Creation

"As a small business owner, I want to create financial tasks so that I can stay organized and ensure all my important deadlines are met."

Description

This requirement allows users to create tasks associated with their financial activities within the FundSweep platform. Users can specify task details such as title, description, due date, and priority level. The functionality will help users stay organized by enabling them to manage their financial responsibilities effectively. It integrates seamlessly with other features of FundSweep, allowing for easy tracking of deadlines related to invoicing, expense tracking, and budget management. The expected outcome is a streamlined approach to managing financial tasks, ensuring nothing is overlooked and deadlines are met.

Acceptance Criteria

User successfully creates a new task in the FundSweep platform.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they navigate to the Task Manager and input a title, description, due date, and priority, then the task should be created and displayed in the task list with the correct details.

User edits an existing task to update its details including priority and due date.

Given the user has an existing task, when they select the task and change the priority level and due date, then the task should be updated in the task list and reflect the new details correctly.

User marks a task as completed within the Task Manager.

Given the user has a task in their task list, when they select the option to mark the task as completed, then the task should be removed from the active list and moved to the completed tasks section.

User assigns a task to another user within the FundSweep platform.

Given the user has the option to assign a task, when they select an unassigned task and choose another user from the list to assign it to, then that user should be successfully assigned and notified of the task.

User prioritizes multiple tasks within the Task Manager.

Given the user has created several tasks, when they organize the tasks by dragging them into the desired order of priority, then the tasks should reflect the new order in the task list.

Task Assignment

"As a freelancer, I want to assign financial tasks to my collaborators so that we can work together more effectively and manage our deadlines better."

Description

This requirement enables users to assign created tasks to team members or collaborators within the FundSweep platform. Users can select from a list of contacts associated with their account, allowing for collaborative task management. This feature enhances team communication and accountability, ensuring everyone is aligned on responsibilities related to financial activities. By fostering a collaborative environment, it aims to improve productivity and ensure tasks are completed in a timely manner. Expected outcomes include improved workflow efficiency and enhanced team coordination.

Acceptance Criteria

User assigns a task to a team member while managing their expense reports, selecting from available contacts associated with their FundSweep account.

Given a list of created tasks, when the user selects a task and chooses a team member from the contact list, then the task should be successfully assigned to the selected team member and a confirmation message should be displayed.

User attempts to assign a task to a contact who is not associated with their FundSweep account.

Given a task ready for assignment, when the user tries to select a contact that is not listed, then the system should display an error message indicating the contact is unavailable for task assignment.

User views the task list after assigning tasks to multiple team members, looking for confirmation of assignments.

Given tasks have been assigned to different team members, when the user views the task list, then all assigned tasks should clearly indicate the assigned team members next to each task description.

User checks the notifications after assigning a task to ensure team members are informed of their responsibilities.

Given a task has been assigned to a team member, when the user accesses the notification area, then a notification should appear confirming the task has been assigned, including the task details and assignee.

User attempts to reassign a task to a different team member after initial assignment.

Given a task is already assigned to a team member, when the user selects the task and assigns it to a new team member, then the task should update to reflect the new assignee and send a notification to both the previous and new assignee.

User wants to filter tasks to see only those assigned to a specific team member.

Given multiple tasks with different assignees, when the user applies a filter to display tasks assigned only to a specific team member, then only the tasks assigned to that member should be displayed on the list.

User assesses the overall task distribution among team members to manage workload effectively.

Given tasks assigned to various team members, when the user reviews the task assignment summary, then the system should provide a clear visual representation, such as a pie chart, indicating the number of tasks assigned to each team member for easy monitoring.

Task Prioritization

"As an independent contractor, I want to prioritize my financial tasks so that I can focus on the most urgent deadlines first."

Description

This requirement provides users with the ability to prioritize tasks within the task manager, enabling them to sort tasks by importance or urgency. Users can mark tasks as high, medium, or low priority, helping them focus on the most critical financial activities first. This feature enhances user productivity by providing clear guidance on task urgency, ensuring that the most important tasks are completed promptly. Integration with notifications can alert users when high-priority tasks are approaching their deadlines, further facilitating time management. The expected outcome is a more organized and efficient approach to financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to prioritize my tasks based on urgency and importance to manage my financial activities effectively.

Given I have a list of tasks in the task manager, When I mark a task as 'High', Then it should appear at the top of the task list.

As a freelancer, I need to be notified of upcoming deadlines for high-priority tasks so I can ensure I meet them.

Given I have a high-priority task with a deadline approaching, When the deadline is within 24 hours, Then I should receive a notification alerting me of the impending deadline.

As an independent contractor, I want to see a visual indicator of task priorities to quickly assess which tasks need my attention.

Given my task list is displayed, When I view the tasks, Then high-priority tasks should be highlighted in red, medium-priority tasks in yellow, and low-priority tasks in green.

As a user, I want to filter my tasks by priority level to focus solely on urgent activities when needed.

Given all my tasks are displayed, When I select to filter by 'High Priority', Then only tasks marked as high priority should be shown in the task list.

As a user, I need to update the priority of existing tasks to reflect changes in urgency.

Given I have a task marked as 'Medium', When I change its priority to 'High', Then the task's priority should be updated and reflect in the task list accordingly.

As a small business owner, I want to integrate the task manager with my calendar to keep track of important deadlines.

Given I have a task with a deadline, When I create the task, Then the task's deadline should automatically sync to my connected calendar.

Task Notifications

"As a small business owner, I want to receive reminders for my financial tasks so that I never miss a deadline again."

Description

This requirement enables users to receive notifications and reminders for upcoming tasks and deadlines associated with their financial activities. Users can customize notification preferences, choosing to receive alerts via push notifications, emails, or in-app messages. This feature provides users with timely reminders about overdue tasks or tasks approaching their due dates, helping them stay on track with their financial responsibilities. By minimizing the risk of missing deadlines, it aims to improve overall task completion rates. The expected outcome is enhanced user accountability and timely completion of financial tasks.

Acceptance Criteria

User Configuring Notification Preferences for Financial Tasks

Given a user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to settings and access the notification preferences section, then they should be able to customize their notification methods (push notifications, email, in-app messages) for various tasks and deadlines.

User Receives Task Reminder Notifications

Given a user has set up notification preferences for task reminders, when a task is approaching its due date or is overdue, then the user should receive a notification via their selected notification method (push notification, email, or in-app message).

User Marks a Task as Completed via Notification

Given a user receives a push notification for an overdue task, when they click on the notification, then they should be redirected to the task in the Task Manager and have the option to mark it as completed directly from there.

User Views All Upcoming Tasks with Notifications Enabled

Given a user has enabled notifications for tasks in FundSweep, when they access the task manager dashboard, then they should see a clear visual indicator of all upcoming tasks and their associated notification status (set or unset).

User Switches Notification Preferences and Tests Functionality

Given a user has saved notification preferences, when they change their preferences and save them, then the previous notification settings should be overwritten, and the next upcoming task reminder should reflect the updated preferences.

User Receives Summary of Overdue Tasks via Email

Given a user with overdue tasks, when the daily summary email is generated, then the email should include a list of all overdue tasks with due dates and options for completing them within FundSweep.

Task Progress Tracking

"As an independent contractor, I want to track the progress of my financial tasks so that I can see what I have completed and what is still pending."

Description

This requirement includes functionality for users to track the progress of their tasks within the task manager. Users can update the status of tasks as they work on them, such as marking them as 'In Progress', 'Completed', or 'On Hold'. This functionality provides users with a visual representation of their workload and helps them manage their time effectively. By integrating progress tracking with the dashboard analytics, users can gain insights into their task completion rates and identify areas for improvement in their financial management processes. The expected outcome is greater transparency and accountability in task management.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to update a task's status from 'To Do' to 'In Progress' as they start working on it.

Given a task is in 'To Do' status, when the user selects 'In Progress' from the status dropdown, then the task status should update to 'In Progress' and be visually indicated on the dashboard.

User marks a task as 'Completed' to reflect that they have finished it.

Given a task is in 'In Progress' status, when the user selects 'Completed' from the status dropdown, then the task status should update to 'Completed' and the completion date should be recorded.

User wants to place a task on hold as they cannot continue working on it.

Given a task is in 'In Progress' status, when the user selects 'On Hold' from the status dropdown, then the task status should update to 'On Hold' and the reason for hold should be optional to input.

User wants to view the overall progress of their tasks on the dashboard.

Given multiple tasks with various statuses, when the user accesses the dashboard, then the visual representation should show the percentage of tasks in 'Completed', 'In Progress', and 'On Hold' states.

User wants to analyze their task completion rates over different periods to identify productivity trends.

Given a specific time frame selected by the user, when they request task analytics, then the dashboard should display a report showing completion rates with comparisons to previous periods.

User wants to receive notifications for tasks marked 'On Hold' for over a specified duration.

Given a task is in 'On Hold' status for more than 7 days, when the user checks their notifications, then they should receive a reminder about the task's status.

User wants to ensure that their task progress updates are automatically reflected in their analytics.

Given a task's status is updated, when the update occurs, then the analytics dashboard should automatically refresh to reflect the new task status immediately.

Budgeting Wizard

The Budgeting Wizard guides users through the budgeting process step-by-step. By asking targeted questions and using AI-driven recommendations, it helps users establish realistic budgets, leading to improved financial planning and goal achievement.

Requirements

Step-by-Step Budget Creation

"As a small business owner, I want to receive guided assistance in creating my budget so that I can manage my finances more efficiently and achieve my financial goals without feeling overwhelmed."

Description

The Budgeting Wizard requirement must guide users through a structured, step-by-step process for budget creation. This feature will prompt users with targeted questions regarding their income, expenses, projected savings, and financial goals. It should leverage AI-driven recommendations based on user input and historical data. The overall aim is to simplify the budgeting experience and ensure users can create realistic and achievable budgets that suit their needs. Integration with existing expense tracking functionality will ensure that budgets are informed by actual spending patterns, enhancing the relevance and accuracy of the budget created. This feature is crucial for promoting responsible financial management and helping users reach their financial goals effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates the Budgeting Wizard to create a budget for the upcoming month, providing details about their expected income, fixed and variable expenses, and financial goals.

Given the user selects the Budgeting Wizard, when they input their income, expenses, and goals, then the system should generate a proposed budget that aligns with their inputs and includes AI-driven recommendations for adjustments.

After completing the budget creation process, the user wants to review their budget summary and make adjustments based on the AI recommendations provided.

Given the user has completed the budget creation, when they view the budget summary, then they should see a clear overview of the proposed budget, categorized by income and expense lines, along with suggested adjustments highlighted.

User wants to ensure their historical spending habits are being used to inform their budgeting decisions as they create a new budget for the year.

Given the user is creating a new budget, when they access their historical expense data, then the Budging Wizard should present relevant historical spending trends that may impact their budget, allowing them to adjust their inputs accordingly.

The user aims to set specific financial goals within the Budgeting Wizard for saving towards a new business venture within the next year.

Given the user specifies a savings goal in the Budgeting Wizard, when they input the desired amount and timeline, then the system should calculate the necessary monthly savings amount and adjust their budget accordingly.

User wishes to integrate their current expense tracking data to refine the generated budget for accuracy.

Given the user has active expense tracking, when they complete the budget creation process, then the system should cross-reference their budget against current tracked expenses to identify areas of potential overspending or undersaving, providing recommendations for adjustments.

A user revisits their budget created using the Budgeting Wizard after one month to evaluate its performance against actual spending.

Given one month has passed since the budget was created, when the user reviews the budget performance, then the system should display a comparison between the projected budget and actual expenses, highlighting any discrepancies and areas for improvement.

AI Recommendations Engine

"As a freelancer, I want AI-generated budget recommendations based on my spending habits so that I can create a more accurate and effective budget that aligns with my financial reality."

Description

The Budgeting Wizard will include an AI-driven recommendations engine that analyzes user inputs and financial behaviors to suggest tailored budget items. This engine will evaluate historical spending trends, income variations, and financial goals to propose realistic budget allocations. It should also provide tips for reducing unnecessary expenses and optimizing savings based on user-specific data. Integrating this recommendation engine within the Budgeting Wizard will empower users with personalized insights, making the budgeting process more efficient and meaningful. By focusing on users' unique financial situations, this feature will significantly enhance the value delivered by FundSweep's budgeting tool.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates the Budgeting Wizard and inputs their financial goals and historical spending data to receive AI-driven budget suggestions.

Given the user has inputted their financial goals and historical spending data, when they request budget recommendations, then the AI recommendations engine should provide at least three personalized budget allocation suggestions based on their input.

User receives budget recommendations and reviews AI suggestions for optimizing their budget according to their financial behaviors.

Given the user has received budget recommendations, when they review the suggestions, then all recommendations should include actionable tips for reducing unnecessary expenses and optimizing savings tailored to user-specific data.

User finalizes their budget based on the AI recommendations and begins tracking their expenses accordingly.

Given that the user accepts AI-driven budget suggestions, when they finalize the budget, then the system must save the budget allocations and provide a confirmation message indicating successful budget setup.

User wants to adjust their budget and seeks new recommendations reflecting changes in income and expenses.

Given that a user wants to adjust their budget, when they input their new income and expense data, then the AI recommendations engine should re-evaluate and suggest new budget allocations within a few seconds.

User analyzes their budget performance over a specified timeframe to see if they are adhering to the AI-generated recommendations.

Given that a user has been tracking their expenses against the budget, when they access the budget performance report, then it should display a visual representation of adherence to budget allocations, including any alerts for overspending.

Real-Time Budget Tracking

"As an independent contractor, I want to track my budget in real-time so that I can stay informed about my spending and make timely adjustments if necessary."

Description

This requirement entails developing a feature within the Budgeting Wizard that allows users to monitor their budget in real-time. Users should receive updates on their current spending against the established budget, including alerts for overspending or nearing budget limits. This functionality needs seamless integration with the expense tracking components of FundSweep, ensuring that users have an accurate picture of their financial status at any moment. Providing a dynamic view of budget performance will help users adjust spending habits proactively and stay on track with their financial goals, thereby fostering better financial discipline.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a real-time notification when spending exceeds 75% of their designated budget for a specific expense category, prompting them to review their spending habits.

Given the user has set a budget for an expense category, when their spending reaches 75% of that budget, then a notification alerting them of the nearing limit should be displayed on the dashboard and sent to their registered email.

User views an updated summary of their spending in relation to the established budget during a weekly review session.

Given the user logs into FundSweep, when they access the Budgeting Wizard, then the dashboard should show a live summary of their expenses compared to the budget, including spent amount, remaining budget, and alerts for overspending if any.

User can adjust their budget in response to real-time spending insights and receive updated recommendations based on changes.

Given the user notices they are overspending in a specific category, when they adjust their budget allocation for that category, then the system should automatically recalibrate and provide new recommendations for other budget categories.

User wishes to integrate real-time budget tracking with their expense tracking setup in FundSweep for seamless financial management.

Given the user has linked their expense accounts to FundSweep, when they incur an expense, then the Budgeting Wizard should automatically update the respective budget category in real-time and reflect the change on the dashboard.

User experiences a practical application of the Budgeting Wizard during a monthly expense review, ensuring they stay within budget limits throughout the month.

Given the user regularly tracks their expenses through the Budgeting Wizard, when they review their total expenditures monthly, then they should see a clear report indicating spending patterns with graphs visualizing budgeting adherence and overspending areas.

User receives a comprehensive monthly report summarizing their budget performance, highlighting achievements and areas of improvement.

Given the end of the month, when the user requests a budget performance report, then the system should generate a detailed report showcasing total income, total expenses, savings, and insights on budget adherence with actionable advice for the next month.

User-Friendly Interface Design

"As a small business owner, I want the budgeting tool to have an easy-to-navigate interface so that I can quickly create and adjust my budget without feeling confused or frustrated."

Description

The Budgeting Wizard must feature a user-friendly interface that simplifies navigation through the budgeting process. This design should include visual aids such as progress bars, intuitive icons, and easy-to-understand language to ensure users can follow along without confusion. It should cater to users of varying tech-savviness, allowing all users to comfortably engage with the budgeting tool. A seamless and engaging user experience will enhance user satisfaction and encourage consistent use of the budgeting feature, leading to better financial management outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

User Interaction with Budgeting Wizard Interface

Given a user logs into FundSweep and accesses the Budgeting Wizard, When the user navigates through the budgeting steps, Then there should be a visible progress bar at the top of the interface, indicating the user's current step in the process.

Accessing AI Recommendations

Given a user is on the Budgeting Wizard screen, When the user finishes answering questions, Then the AI should display personalized budgeting recommendations based on the user’s inputs within 3 seconds.

Visual Clarity of Icons and Language

Given a user is interacting with the Budgeting Wizard, When the user hovers over each icon or section of the interface, Then there should be clear tooltips or descriptions that explain the function of each icon, utilizing simple language.

Support for Varying Tech-Savviness

Given a user with low tech-savviness starts using the Budgeting Wizard, When they reach a complex step in the process, Then there should be guided tips or an FAQ pop-up to assist them without overwhelming them.

User Experience Across Devices

Given a user accesses the Budgeting Wizard from a mobile device, When they navigate through the budgeting process, Then the interface should maintain its intuitiveness and all functionalities should be accessible without distortion or loss of information.

Real-Time Feedback Mechanism

Given a user is in the Budgeting Wizard while entering data, When the user inputs extreme numbers (e.g., an unusually high expense), Then a prompt should appear warning the user of potential mistakes or miscalculations before they proceed.

Completion of Budget Setup

Given a user has completed all budgeting steps in the Wizard, When they click 'Finish', Then a summary page showing their budget should be properly displayed, allowing them to save or export it without errors.

Secure Data Handling

"As a freelancer, I want to know that my financial information is secure while using the budgeting tool so that I can enter my data without worrying about breaches or leaks."

Description

The Budgeting Wizard must ensure all user inputs and financial data are securely handled in accordance with data protection regulations. This feature should include encrypted data storage and secure transmission protocols to protect sensitive information. User trust is critical, and offering robust security measures will help reassure users that their financial data is safe. Furthermore, compliance with applicable regulations will enhance FundSweep's credibility in the market, positioning it as a trustworthy tool for managing finances.

Acceptance Criteria

User inputs financial data into the Budgeting Wizard and expects that the information is securely stored while they create their budget plan.

Given the user has entered sensitive financial information When the user saves their budget plan Then the data should be encrypted and stored securely in the database, ensuring it cannot be accessed without authorized permissions.

A user sends their budget data over the internet to create an updated financial report, expecting that their data remains secure during transmission.

Given the user is transmitting their budget data When the data is sent over the network Then it should be transmitted using secure transmission protocols (e.g., HTTPS, TLS) to prevent interception by unauthorized entities.

A user accesses their budgets and finances after a period of inactivity and expects their previous sessions' data to be secure and intact without unauthorized access.

Given the user returns to the Budgeting Wizard after being inactive When the user logs in Then all previous financial data should remain confidential, secured with robust encryption, and should be accessible only after successful authentication.

An admin audits the system's data security measures to ensure compliance with data protection regulations and verify that the Budgeting Wizard handles data securely.

Given an admin is conducting a security and compliance audit When they review the data storage and transmission protocols Then the system should demonstrate adherence to applicable data protection regulations with secure methods like data encryption and anonymization techniques.

A user receives a prompt during the setup of their Budgeting Wizard to agree to terms regarding data security processes and practices.

Given the user initiates setup for the Budgeting Wizard When they review and accept the terms and conditions Then they should clearly understand the data handling practices, including encryption and storage policies, which must comply with regulatory standards.

A user wishes to export their budget and financial data securely and checks that the export process is safe and compliant with data protection standards.

Given the user initiates an export of their financial data When the export prompting occurs Then they should be presented with the option to receive the data in an encrypted format that complies with regulatory standards, ensuring only they have access.

Expense Tracker App

A companion mobile app allows users to track expenses on-the-go with ease. Users can capture receipts, log expenses, and categorize them instantly from their smartphones, ensuring they never miss a detail and maintain accurate records.

Requirements

Receipt Capture

"As a small business owner, I want to easily capture and store receipts on my mobile device so that I can manage my expenses without losing important financial records."

Description

The Receipt Capture requirement enables users to take pictures of their receipts using their smartphone's camera, automatically digitizing the receipt data. This feature will incorporate OCR (Optical Character Recognition) technology to extract relevant information such as date, amount, vendor, and category instantly. It will enhance user experience by reducing manual data entry and improving accuracy in expense logging. Integration with the main fund management system will allow seamless sync of receipt data into user accounts for efficient financial tracking and reporting.

Acceptance Criteria

User successfully captures a receipt using the mobile app's camera feature and the app processes the image into readable data without errors.

Given the user has the mobile app open, when they take a picture of a receipt, then the app should automatically extract the date, amount, vendor, and category from the receipt using OCR technology with 95% accuracy.

User attempts to capture a receipt but the image is blurry or poorly lit, causing OCR recognition to fail.

Given the user takes a picture of a blurry or poorly lit receipt, when the image is processed, then the app should display an error message prompting the user to retake the photo.

User captures multiple receipts in quick succession and checks if all receipts are logged correctly in their account.

Given the user captures three receipts within a minute, when they navigate to their expenses page, then all three receipts should be logged accurately with the correct details in the user's account.

User captures a receipt and wants to categorize the expense before saving it to their account.

Given the user has just captured a receipt, when they proceed to categorize the expense, then they should be able to select from pre-defined categories and save the categorized receipt successfully.

User integrates their mobile app with the main fund management system to synchronize receipt data.

Given the user has linked their account in the mobile app with the fund management system, when they capture and save a receipt, then the receipt data should sync in real-time to the user’s account in the fund management system.

Expense Categorization

"As a freelancer, I want to categorize my expenses so that I can track my spending against my budget and understand where my money goes."

Description

The Expense Categorization requirement allows users to assign categories to their logged expenses directly within the app. It will feature predefined categories (e.g., Meals, Travel, Office Supplies) along with an option for users to create custom categories as needed. This capability will aid users in organizing their expenses better, making it easier for them to analyze spending patterns and generate detailed reports. Additionally, this feature will integrate with the budgeting tools of FundSweep to provide insights on category-wise spending.

Acceptance Criteria

As a user of the Expense Tracker App, I want to categorize my expenses when I log them to easily manage and analyze my spending patterns.

Given the user is on the expense logging interface, when they select a category from the predefined list or create a custom category, then the expense should be successfully logged with the selected or created category visible in the expense list.

As a regular user of the Expense Tracker App, I want to ensure that all predefined categories are available when I log an expense to maintain consistency in my tracking.

Given a user is logging an expense, when they open the category selection menu, then all predefined categories should be displayed without any errors and should be selectable.

As a user who prefers customization, I want to create custom categories in the Expense Tracker App to fit my unique financial tracking needs.

Given the user is in the category selection menu, when they choose the option to create a custom category and enter a name, then the new custom category should be successfully saved and available for future expense logging.

As a user of the Expense Tracker App, I want to be able to view my expenses categorized by type on the dashboard so I can quickly understand my spending habits.

Given the user has logged multiple expenses with categories, when they navigate to the expense summary dashboard, then expenses should be grouped and displayed by their respective categories with corresponding totals for each category.

As a small business owner, I want to integrate categorized expenses with the budgeting tool in FundSweep to analyze how my expenses impact my budget in each category.

Given the user has logged expenses categorized accordingly, when they access the budgeting tool, then all categories with their respective total expenses should be reflected accurately in the budget overview.

As a user who frequently logs expenses, I want to edit or delete categories that I no longer use in the Expense Tracker App to keep my expense management neat.

Given the user is in the category management section, when they select an existing category to edit or delete, then the changes should be successfully implemented without impacting previously logged expenses.

As a user who relies on accurate data, I want to ensure that any expense category changes are immediately reflected in the expense logs and reports for accuracy.

Given the user has edited or deleted a category, when they check the expense logs or reports, then the changes should be accurately reflected across all related data.

Expense Summary Dashboard

"As an independent contractor, I want to see a visual summary of my expenses so that I can quickly assess my financial situation and make informed decisions."

Description

The Expense Summary Dashboard requirement presents users with an overview of their logged expenses displayed visually through graphs and metrics. Users will be able to view total expenses by category, month, or project, providing a clear snapshot of their financial health. This feature will also offer insights derived from AI-driven analytics to suggest cost-saving opportunities. Integration with the overall FundSweep platform will ensure that data is updated in real-time, ensuring users have access to the latest information.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to view my expenses over the past month categorized by type so that I can understand where my money is going and identify potential savings.

Given that I have logged expenses for the month, when I access the Expense Summary Dashboard, then I should see a visual representation of total expenses categorized by type, such as 'Utilities', 'Supplies', and 'Travel'.

As a freelancer, I want to see my total expenses per project so I can evaluate project profitability and make informed budgeting decisions.

Given that I have assigned expenses to various projects, when I navigate to the project view in the Expense Summary Dashboard, then I should be able to see a breakdown of total expenses per project in a clear graphical format.

As an independent contractor, I need to receive AI-driven insights on my biggest expense categories in order to target areas for cost-cutting.

Given that I have accumulated at least one month of expense data, when I access the Expense Summary Dashboard, then I should receive AI-generated suggestions highlighting the top three expense categories with recommendations for potential savings.

As a user, I want my Expense Summary Dashboard to display real-time updates so I can have the most current information about my financial status at any given moment.

Given that I have logged a new expense, when I return to the Expense Summary Dashboard, then my total expenses and visual graphs should reflect this new data immediately without needing to refresh.

As a small business owner, I want to compare my expenses month-over-month to assess trends and make necessary financial adjustments.

Given that I have more than one month of logged expenses, when I access the Expense Summary Dashboard, then I should be able to view a comparison graph displaying expenses by month, highlighting increases or decreases in spending.

Multi-Currency Support

"As a small business owner dealing with international clients, I want to log expenses in multiple currencies so that I can manage my finances accurately regardless of the currency used."

Description

The Multi-Currency Support requirement allows users to log and track expenses in various currencies easily. The app will automatically convert foreign currency amounts into the user's primary currency using real-time exchange rates, ensuring accurate financial management for users who travel or conduct business globally. This feature addresses the needs of freelancers and small businesses who operate internationally, making it essential for managing global expenses effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

User logs into the Expense Tracker App and selects the option to add a new expense using a foreign currency while traveling abroad.

Given the user has selected a foreign currency from the app, when the user enters the amount spent and selects save, then the app should automatically convert the amount to the user's primary currency using the latest exchange rate and reflect it in the expenses list.

User wants to view their total expenses in the primary currency while having entries in multiple foreign currencies.

Given the user has logged multiple expenses in different currencies, when the user navigates to the total expenses summary page, then the app should display a consolidated total reflecting all expenses converted to the primary currency at the most current exchange rates.

User captures a receipt in a foreign currency and logs an expense using the mobile app.

Given the user takes a photo of a receipt showing an expense in foreign currency, when the user inputs the expense details and selects the currency type, then the app should accurately convert the total from foreign currency to the user's primary currency and store both the foreign and converted amounts.

User updates their profile to change the primary currency after having previously logged expenses in a foreign currency.

Given the user has changed their primary currency in their profile settings, when the user accesses their expense history, then all previously entered amounts should be converted according to the new primary currency using the latest exchange rates, and displayed alongside the original amounts.

User needs to understand how the currency conversion rates are applied to their expenses during a review session.

Given the user is reviewing their expense history, when the user taps on an individual expense entry that was logged in a foreign currency, then the app should display the original amount, converted amount, and the exchange rate applied at the time of logging the expense for transparency.

User travels to a new country and incurs expenses in a new local currency not previously used in the app.

Given the user is using the app in a new country, when the user selects to log an expense in the new currency, then the app should allow them to manually add the currency type and use live exchange rates to convert the expense to the primary currency without errors.

User wants to export their expense reports based on multiple currencies used in a specific time frame.

Given the user selects a date range for their expense report, when the user opts to export the report, then the exported document should include both the original amounts in their respective currencies and the equivalent amounts in the user's primary currency, formatted clearly for user review.

Expense Reporting

"As a freelancer, I want to create and export detailed expense reports so that I can provide my accountant with the necessary documentation for tax purposes."

Description

The Expense Reporting requirement provides users with the ability to generate comprehensive expense reports directly from the app. Users can select specific time frames, categories, and types of expenses to include in the report. The generated reports can be exported in multiple formats (e.g., PDF, CSV) for easy sharing with accountants or for personal record-keeping. This functionality enhances the reporting capabilities of FundSweep, allowing users to have better control over their financial documentation and compliance.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates an expense report for the previous month to analyze their spending habits and prepare for an upcoming tax meeting.

Given the user is in the Expense Tracker App, When they select the 'Generate Report' option for the previous month and specify the desired categories, Then a comprehensive report should be generated including all expenses for that month and categories selected.

User wants to export their generated expense report to share with their accountant via email.

Given a generated expense report is displayed on the screen, When the user selects the 'Export' option and chooses PDF format, Then the report should be successfully downloaded in PDF format and an option to share via email should be presented.

User wishes to review and customize the time frame of an expense report to compare two different months' spending.

Given the user is on the report generation page, When they select a custom time frame with two specific months and request a report, Then the report should accurately reflect expenses only for the selected months and allow further customization including categories and types.

User has mistakenly generated an expense report with the wrong date range and needs to amend it.

Given the user has generated a report, When they click on the 'Edit' option and change the date range, Then the report should update automatically to reflect the new date range and display the correct expenses within that period.

User wants to categorize their expenses in the report generation process for better financial insights.

Given the user is preparing to generate an expense report, When they select multiple expense categories from a list, Then the report should summarize expenses according to the selected categories and display total amounts per category.

User needs to confirm that the application meets accessibility standards when generating reports.

Given the user is vision impaired and uses a screen reader, When they attempt to navigate the report generation features, Then the application should provide audio feedback and properly label all elements to facilitate ease of use.

User is generating an expense report and needs to verify the accuracy of the summarized totals.

Given the user generates an expense report for a specific date range, When the report is displayed, Then the total amount should correctly sum the individual expenses logged within that range and match with the records in their account.

Financial Snapshot Dashboard

An interactive dashboard that provides users with a real-time overview of their financial health. This feature visualizes income, expenses, and budget compliance in an easy-to-understand format, enabling users to make informed decisions quickly.

Requirements

Real-time Financial Data Aggregation

"As a small business owner, I want to see all my financial data in one place, so that I can quickly assess my financial health and make informed decisions about my budgeting and spending."

Description

The Financial Snapshot Dashboard must integrate with various financial data sources, such as bank accounts, payment processors, and accounting software, to aggregate real-time financial data. This feature ensures that users have access to up-to-date information on their income, expenses, and overall financial status. By providing a comprehensive view of their financial health, users can make timely decisions and adjust their budgets accordingly. This integration enhances user trust in the platform as it minimizes discrepancies and provides a holistic overview of financial performance.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Financial Snapshot Dashboard after logging into FundSweep, aiming to view their current financial situation in real-time.

Given the user has completed the login process, when the Financial Snapshot Dashboard is loaded, then it should display real-time financial data aggregated from linked bank accounts, payment processors, and accounting software.

A user wants to verify that the data displayed in the Financial Snapshot Dashboard reflects the most up-to-date information from their bank account.

Given the user has linked their bank account within FundSweep, when the user refreshes the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, then it should show the latest transaction data, with timestamps indicating the last update.

A freelancer uses the Financial Snapshot Dashboard to understand their monthly budget compliance before submitting invoices.

Given that the user has set a budget for the month, when they view the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, then the spent amount should be compared against the budgeted amount and visually represented as a compliance percentage and a color indicator (green for compliant, red for exceeded).

Users want to see a breakdown of their income and expenses to assess their financial health more effectively using the dashboard.

Given the user is on the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they request a detailed view of their income and expenses, then the system should provide a categorized breakdown in chart form, showing totals in each category for both income and expenses.

A user adds a new financial source, such as a new payment processor, and needs to verify that the data updates in the dashboard accordingly.

Given the user has successfully added a new payment source, when the Financial Snapshot Dashboard is refreshed, then it should integrate and display the new data corresponding to the added financial source without any discrepancies.

A user wants to ensure the security of their financial data while using the dashboard feature.

Given the user is accessing the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they explore data privacy settings, then they should see clear options for enabling/disabling data sharing and an explanation of how their data is secured and used.

A user checks the support for multiple currencies in the Financial Snapshot Dashboard to ensure compatibility with international transactions.

Given the user has linked accounts in multiple currencies, when they access the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, then it should accurately convert and display financial data in the user's selected base currency, clearly indicating the conversion rates used.

Visual Income and Expense Charts

"As a freelancer, I want to view my income and expenses through visual charts, so that I can quickly identify trends and adjust my financial planning effectively."

Description

The dashboard should feature easy-to-understand visualizations, including pie charts, bar graphs, and trend lines to represent income and expenses over selected time frames. This visualization will enable users to identify spending patterns, trends, and areas where they can adjust their financial strategies. The graphical representation of financial data is crucial for enhancing user comprehension and engagement, allowing them to see their financial situation at a glance without navigating through complex tables or text.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Financial Snapshot Dashboard upon logging in to FundSweep to monitor their financial health and make quick decisions based on real-time data.

Given the user is logged in, when they access the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, then they should see income and expense visualizations represented in pie charts, bar graphs, and trend lines for the selected time frame.

A small business owner wants to analyze their spending patterns over the last month to adjust their budget for the upcoming month.

Given the user is on the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they select the time frame to 'Last Month', then the visualizations should update to display income and expenses accurately for that period.

A freelancer needs to understand their financial performance over the past quarter before making a strategic decision for the next quarter.

Given the user is viewing the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they select the time frame to 'Last Quarter', then the dashboard should display current income and expenses as trend lines and bar graphs for that quarter.

An independent contractor is reviewing their finances and wishes to compare income and expenses between two different months to identify trends.

Given the user is on the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they select 'Compare Months' and choose two specific months, then the visualizations should present a comparative analysis of income and expenses for both months side by side.

A user checks the Financial Snapshot Dashboard to determine if they are meeting their budget for the current month through visual representation.

Given the user is on the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they view the budget compliance section, then the pie chart should indicate the percentage of budget spent versus the income earned for the current month.

Users are utilizing the Financial Snapshot Dashboard on various devices and are concerned about the responsiveness of the charts.

Given the user is accessing the Financial Snapshot Dashboard on a mobile device, when they view the income and expense visualizations, then these should automatically adjust to fit the screen size while maintaining readability and usability.

A small business owner wants to export the visual income and expense charts for a presentation to stakeholders.

Given the user is on the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they choose the export option for the income and expense charts, then they should be able to download those visualizations as an image or PDF document.

Budget Compliance Alerts

"As an independent contractor, I want to receive alerts when I exceed my budget, so that I can avoid overspending and keep my finances on track."

Description

The Financial Snapshot Dashboard will include an alert system that notifies users when they exceed their budget in any category. This proactive approach helps users manage their finances by encouraging adherence to budget limits. Alerts can be configured based on user preferences and can be sent via email or push notifications on their mobile devices. This feature not only promotes responsible spending but also empowers users to take immediate corrective actions when necessary, fostering better financial habits overall.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert when they exceed their budget for the first time during the month.

Given that a user has set a budget for a specific category, when the spending in that category exceeds the budget amount, then the user should receive an email and push notification alerting them of the budget breach.

User can customize the alert settings for different budget categories.

Given that a user is on the budget settings page, when they choose to customize alert preferences for each category, then they should be able to select notification frequency and type (email or push notification).

User acknowledges a budget compliance alert and wants to dismiss it.

Given that a user has received a budget compliance alert, when they open the alert and choose to dismiss it, then the alert should be removed from their dashboard and they should receive a confirmation message.

User views their budget compliance history over the past month.

Given that a user is on the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they navigate to the budget compliance section, then they should see a history of alerts summarizing the number of times they exceeded their budget in each category over the past month.

User sets a budget limit and sees the compliance status update in real-time.

Given that a user has input a budget limit for a category, when they add an expense that affects that category, then the compliance status should automatically update on the dashboard to reflect their current budget status.

User wants to disable budget compliance alerts altogether.

Given that a user is in the account settings, when they toggle the budget compliance alert option to 'off', then they should no longer receive any budget compliance alerts via email or push notifications.

User receives alerts at a scheduled time based on their preferences.

Given that a user has specified a preferred time for receiving alerts, when the alert condition is met (exceeding budget), then the system should send the alert at the user's chosen time, not immediately after the breach occurs.

Customizable Dashboard Layout

"As a user, I want to customize my dashboard layout, so that I can prioritize the financial information that matters most to me and make my experience more intuitive."

Description

Users should have the ability to customize their Financial Snapshot Dashboard according to their preferences. This includes the option to rearrange widgets, select specific financial metrics to display, and choose preferred color themes for better visibility. A customizable layout enhances user experience by allowing users to tailor the dashboard to their needs, ensuring that important information is readily available and visually appealing. This level of personalization will increase user satisfaction and engagement with the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to customize their Financial Snapshot Dashboard by rearranging the widget layout to prioritize income and expense metrics.

Given that the user is on the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, when they drag and drop a widget to a new position, then the widget should save its new position and display it accordingly upon reloading the dashboard.

A user wants to select specific financial metrics to display on their dashboard, such as net profit, cash flow, and monthly expenses.

Given that the user is in the settings for dashboard customization, when they select metrics and save their preferences, then the dashboard should reflect only the chosen metrics without showing the others.

A user prefers a color theme that increases the visibility of key financial metrics on their dashboard.

Given the user has the option to select a color theme, when the user chooses a predefined theme or customizes colors, then the dashboard should update to reflect the new color choices immediately and consistently across all widgets.

User wants to revert to the default dashboard layout after making several customizations.

Given that the user has made customizations to the dashboard, when they select the 'Reset to Default' option, then the dashboard layout should return to its original state with default widgets and configurations.

User needs to ensure that their widget settings are preserved and loaded correctly on different devices when they access their FundSweep account.

Given that a user customizes the dashboard layout on one device, when they log into their account from a different device, then the dashboard should display the same layout and settings as configured on the original device.

A user attempts to customize their dashboard but has an error due to a temporary system failure.

Given that the user tries to save their customizations while a system error occurs, when they attempt to save the layout, then they should receive a user-friendly error message indicating that their changes could not be saved and recommend trying again later.

User wants to ensure that the dashboard customization options are intuitive and user-friendly.

Given that the user accesses the customization panel, when they interact with the layout options and color theme selections, then the interface should be simple to navigate with clear labels and tooltips for each feature available.

Exportable Financial Reports

"As a small business owner, I want to export my financial reports in different formats, so that I can easily share them with my accountant and keep my records organized."

Description

The dashboard must allow users to generate and export financial reports in various formats, such as PDF, Excel, and CSV. This feature will enable users to share their financial data with accountants, partners, or for personal records easily. Exportable financial reports enhance the usability of the platform by providing users with flexible options to manage their financial reports and maintain thorough documentation for tax purposes or business analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

User exports their financial report after a month of tracking income and expenses, wanting to analyze the data before a meeting with their accountant.

Given that the user has valid financial data in the dashboard, When the user selects the 'Export' option and chooses the PDF format, Then the system should generate a downloadable PDF report that accurately reflects the user's financial data for the specified month.

After generating a financial report, a freelancer wants to share it with a partner via email.

Given that the user has successfully exported the financial report in CSV format, When the user clicks the 'share via email' button, Then the system should attach the generated CSV report to a new email draft in the user's default email client.

A user wants to generate and export a report to review their budget compliance at the end of the fiscal quarter.

Given that the user has entered budget data into the dashboard, When the user selects 'Export' and chooses the Excel format, Then the system should export an Excel file containing a budget compliance report, including visual charts that represent the user's spending versus their budget.

A small business owner needs a summary of all transactions over the past year for tax preparation purposes.

Given that the user is on the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, When the user selects the 'Export all transactions' option and chooses the CSV format, Then the system should generate a CSV file with all transaction details, including dates, amounts, and categories for the past year.

A user wants to review their financial records and ensure they can access them offline.

Given that the user has recent records displayed on their dashboard, When the user clicks on 'Export to PDF', Then the system should ensure that the PDF retains all visual components and financial summaries as presented in the dashboard.

A user needs to generate a financial report but is not sure if the report will include all necessary data points.

Given that the user initiates the export process, When the user navigates to the export preview modal, Then the system should display a complete list of data points included in the report for verification before final export.

A contractor wants to generate a report to calculate the income for the first half of the year and present it to potential investors.

Given that the user selects a date range for the report, When the user exports the report in Excel format, Then the system should generate an Excel file that accurately includes all income data for that specified date range, with the correct calculations and formatting.

AI-driven Financial Insights

"As a freelancer, I want to receive personalized financial insights based on my spending habits, so that I can improve my financial decision-making and business performance."

Description

The Financial Snapshot Dashboard should leverage AI algorithms to analyze user data and generate personalized financial insights and recommendations. This includes suggestions for reducing expenses, optimizing pricing, and enhancing cash flow management. By providing tailored advice, this feature empowers users to make better financial decisions and strategic adjustments to improve their overall financial performance. The AI-driven insights will enhance the perceived value of the platform and encourage users to engage more deeply with their financial data.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Financial Snapshot Dashboard to view their financial health and receives AI-driven insights after inputting their financial data over the previous month.

Given the user has input their financial data, when they navigate to the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, then the dashboard displays AI-driven insights tailored to their financial behavior, including at least three actionable recommendations.

User wants to optimize their pricing strategy based on the financial insights provided by the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the AI-driven insights, when they select the pricing optimization recommendation, then the system provides a detailed rationale for the suggestion along with potential scenarios reflecting different pricing strategies.

User wishes to track how AI-driven recommendations affect their financial performance over time.

Given the user has implemented the recommendations, when they check the Financial Snapshot Dashboard after one month, then the dashboard shows a comparative analysis of their financial metrics before and after the implementation of the recommendations, quantifying any improvements in cash flow or expense reduction.

User receives alerts for significant deviations from their expected financial performance based on AI insights.

Given the user has set budget thresholds, when their expenses exceed the set thresholds, then the system sends a notification alerting the user and suggests necessary adjustments backed by AI insights.

User wants to understand the sources of their largest expenses better through AI-driven analysis.

Given the user has viewed their expense data, when they interact with the expense breakdown section of the dashboard, then the AI provides insights that categorize and analyze the top three expense sources, offering targeted advice for cost reduction.

User seeks to integrate multi-currency data and analyze its impact on their financial health using AI insights.

Given the user has transactions in multiple currencies, when they access the Financial Snapshot Dashboard, then the AI adjusts insights and recommendations to consider exchange rates and present integrated financial metrics in the user's primary currency.

Progress Tracker

This feature enables users to monitor their financial goals and achievements over time. By providing visual progress indicators and personalized insights, users can stay motivated and on track to meet their financial objectives.

Requirements

Goal Visualization

"As a small business owner, I want to visually track my financial goals so that I can quickly assess my progress and stay motivated to achieve my objectives."

Description

The Goal Visualization requirement encompasses the development of dynamic, visual trackers that allow users to easily visualize their financial goals over time. These visual indicators will include graphs, progress bars, and charts that represent milestones and deadlines associated with financial objectives. By integrating this feature within the FundSweep dashboard, users will be able to see at a glance how close they are to achieving their goals, fostering engagement and motivation. The visual representation is designed to simplify complex financial data, presenting it in an easily digestible form that enhances user understanding and promotes proactive financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the Goal Visualization section of the FundSweep dashboard for the first time, aiming to understand their financial progress towards specified milestones.

Given that the user is logged into their account, when they access the Goal Visualization section, then they should see a graphical representation of their financial goals, including progress bars for each goal and corresponding milestones clearly labeled.

User updates their financial goal within the Goal Visualization feature to reflect changed objectives, such as an increase in savings target.

Given that the user selects a financial goal to edit, when they input a new target amount and save the changes, then the visual tracker should immediately update to reflect the new goal amount and adjust the progress bar accordingly.

User wants to monitor the achievement of their financial goals over a period of time through various visualization tools on the dashboard.

Given that the user has set multiple financial goals, when they view the Goal Visualization section, then they should see distinct visual indicators (graphs, charts, progress bars) for each goal, each correctly reflecting the current progress towards completion.

User seeks to gain insights into their financial goals by hovering over visual indicators in the Goal Visualization section.

Given that the user hovers over a progress bar in the Goal Visualization section, when the hover action occurs, then a tooltip should display detailed information about the goal including the current status, target date, and percentage completed.

User wishes to compare their progress against set deadlines for each financial goal.

Given that the user clicks on the comparison feature within the Goal Visualization section, when they select a specific time frame, then the visual trackers should display a comparative analysis against the deadlines for all listed financial goals, highlighting any that are at risk of not being met.

User needs to review and adjust the visual representation of their goal milestones.

Given that the user navigates to settings within the Goal Visualization feature, when they choose to customize the visual indicators, then the system should allow them to select between different chart types (bar, line, pie) and display the updated visualization accordingly.

Milestone Notifications

"As a freelancer, I want to receive notifications when I reach financial milestones so that I can celebrate my achievements and stay motivated."

Description

The Milestone Notifications requirement involves creating a system to notify users when they reach specific financial milestones related to their goals. This feature will enhance user engagement by celebrating achievements and providing users with timely reminders and alerts for their progress. Notifications will be customizable based on range and type of goals, ensuring that users receive meaningful and timely updates. Integrating notifications within FundSweep will keep users connected to their financial journeys, reinforce positive behavior, and support continued goal-setting and achievement.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when they reach their savings goal of $5,000 within a specified timeframe.

Given a user has set a savings goal of $5,000, When the user reaches $5,000 in their savings account, Then the user receives a congratulatory notification via email and in-app alert.

User can customize the types of notifications they wish to receive regarding financial milestones.

Given a user accesses their notification settings, When the user selects the types of milestones they want to be notified about, Then the user's preferences are saved and reflected in the notifications they receive.

User receives reminder notifications for upcoming milestones that are due within the next week.

Given a user has set a milestone for a financial goal that is due in the next week, When the system identifies the upcoming milestone, Then the user receives a reminder notification 3 days prior via push notification.

User can view a history of all notifications related to their financial milestones.

Given a user clicks on the notifications tab, When the user views the notification history, Then the system displays a chronological list of all milestone notifications received by the user.

User is notified of both achieved and missed milestones to encourage engagement and reflection on progress.

Given a user has completed a milestone and also missed a previously set one, When the user opens the milestone notifications panel, Then the user sees notifications for both 'Milestone Achieved' and 'Milestone Missed' with corresponding details.

Users can opt-out of receiving milestone notifications while retaining access to other features of the Progress Tracker.

Given a user wants to stop receiving milestone notifications, When the user selects the opt-out option in settings, Then the user no longer receives milestone notifications but retains access to the Progress Tracker features.

Goal Setting Interface

"As an independent contractor, I want to easily set and adjust my financial goals so that I can ensure they reflect my changing financial situation and priorities."

Description

The Goal Setting Interface requirement focuses on developing an intuitive and user-friendly interface where users can set, modify, and delete their financial goals. This feature will guide users through the process, providing templates and examples tailored to various user types. It will integrate with the existing FundSweep dashboard, ensuring that users can easily access goal-setting options whenever they navigate the platform. A clear, engaging interface will enhance user experience, making financial goal-setting accessible and straightforward, while also linking to other features like progress tracking and milestone notifications.

Acceptance Criteria

User navigates to the Goal Setting Interface from the FundSweep dashboard to set a new financial goal.

Given the user is on the FundSweep dashboard, when they select the 'Set New Goal' button, then they are redirected to the Goal Setting Interface with a clear, user-friendly form available for input.

User wants to modify an existing financial goal in the Goal Setting Interface.

Given the user is on the Goal Setting Interface, when they select an existing goal and click on the 'Edit' option, then they should see all previously entered data pre-filled in the form, allowing them to modify it.

User decides to delete a financial goal they no longer wish to pursue.

Given the user is on the Goal Setting Interface, when they select an existing goal and click on the 'Delete' option, then a confirmation dialog should appear, and upon confirming, the goal should be removed from the list and not appear in future prompts.

User is unsure of how to set a realistic financial goal.

Given the user is on the Goal Setting Interface, when they click on the 'Help' option, then they should see examples and templates tailored to their user type, providing guidance on setting achievable financial goals.

User wants to review their progress on a financial goal after setting it.

Given the user has set a financial goal, when they navigate back to the FundSweep dashboard, then they should see a progress bar or indicator reflecting their current progress towards that goal.

User needs to access the Goal Setting Interface on a mobile device.

Given the user is using a mobile device, when they access the FundSweep application and navigate to the Goal Setting feature, then the interface should display properly without functionality loss, allowing for a seamless user experience.

Personalized Insights

"As a small business owner, I want personalized insights based on my financial data so that I can make smarter decisions and optimize my financial strategies."

Description

The Personalized Insights requirement aims to generate tailored recommendations based on users' financial behaviors and progress towards their goals. By utilizing AI-driven analytics, this feature will analyze users' spending patterns, savings habits, and goal progression to provide actionable insights. Each user will receive personalized advice to optimize their financial strategies, helping them make informed decisions that align with their aspirations. This capability will strengthen user engagement and encourage proactive financial management within the FundSweep platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Progress Tracker feature in FundSweep to review their financial goals after setting them up for the month.

Given the user has financial goals established, when they access the Progress Tracker, then they should see visual indicators showing their progress against each goal and receive personalized recommendations based on their spending habits.

User receives personalized insights based on their spending patterns after monitoring their goals for one month.

Given the user has actively tracked their expenses for a month, when the personalized insights report is generated, then the user should receive at least three actionable insights tailored to their financial behavior for optimizing their spending and saving.

User interacts with the AI-driven analytics feature to receive tailored financial advice for their upcoming expenses and investments.

Given the user inputs upcoming expenses and investment plans, when they request personalized insights, then the system should provide relevant recommendations that address their specific financial situation and support their short-term and long-term goals.

User reviews their progress towards financial goals after implementing the personalized recommendations for a quarter.

Given the user has implemented at least one personalized recommendation, when they check their financial progress after three months, then they should see improved engagement with their financial goals indicated by enhanced tracking metrics.

User modifies their financial goals in the Progress Tracker feature and requests new insights.

Given the user updates their financial goals, when they request personalized insights again, then the system should provide new tailored recommendations reflecting the modified goals.

User receives notifications about their progress towards short-term goals on a weekly basis.

Given the user has set short-term financial goals, when the weekly summary report is generated, then the user should receive notifications outlining their progress and any necessary actions to stay on track for each goal.

User evaluates the effectiveness of the personalized insights over a six-month period.

Given the user has tracked their financial progress for six months, when they review their financial health, then they should observe measurable improvements in their expenses and savings trends aligning with the recommendations provided.

Benchmark Comparisons

"As a freelancer, I want to compare my financial goals to industry benchmarks so that I can better understand my performance and adjust my strategies accordingly."

Description

The Benchmark Comparisons requirement involves creating a feature that allows users to compare their financial goals and progress against industry benchmarks or similar businesses. By providing insight into how users stack up against peers, this feature will empower them to evaluate their performance and set more achievable goals. Integration with FundSweep’s existing analytics will provide contextual data and comparisons, enhancing users' understanding of their financial position and driving goal-oriented behavior.

Acceptance Criteria

Users compare their financial goals to industry benchmarks after logging into FundSweep and accessing the Progress Tracker feature.

Given a user has logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the Progress Tracker and select the 'Benchmark Comparisons' tab, then they should see a list of relevant industry benchmarks compared to their financial goals with visual indicators for easy interpretation.

Users receive personalized insights based on their financial performance compared to benchmarks when setting new financial goals.

Given a user is on the Benchmark Comparisons page, when they input their financial goals and submit, then personalized insights should be generated that highlight their performance relative to industry standards, including strengths and areas for improvement.

Users track their progress over time in meeting their financial goals against benchmarks selected from a dropdown list.

Given a user has selected a benchmark from the dropdown menu, when they view their financial progress over the last 6 months, then the system should display a visual chart illustrating their progress in relation to the selected benchmark.

Users can view a summary of all benchmarks and their performance metrics for quick reference.

Given the user is on the Benchmark Comparisons page, when they select the 'Summary' option, then the system should display a comprehensive overview of all benchmarks and the user’s corresponding performance metrics, including average scores.

Users receive notifications when they significantly exceed or fall below benchmark performance thresholds.

Given a user has set benchmarks, when their financial performance exceeds or falls below established thresholds, then they should receive a notification through the platform indicating the change in performance status and recommended next steps.

Users engage with the help section to understand how benchmarks are determined and utilized for their progress tracking.

Given a user is on the Benchmark Comparisons page, when they click on the 'Help' icon, then they should see a detailed explanation of how benchmarks are set and how to effectively track progress against them, along with FAQs.

Collaboration Tools

Facilitates teamwork by allowing multiple users to collaborate on financial documents and projects within the toolkit. Users can share progress, feedback, and reports seamlessly, enhancing communication and driving collective success in financial management.

Requirements

Real-time Document Collaboration

"As a small business owner, I want to collaboratively edit financial documents in real-time with my accountant so that we can streamline our communication and ensure accuracy in our financial reporting."

Description

This requirement enables multiple users to work simultaneously on financial documents such as expense reports and invoices. Users can see edits in real-time, allowing for instantaneous communication and feedback. This functionality enhances teamwork and reduces the time required for document finalization, ultimately leading to improved efficiency and accuracy in financial management tasks. The collaboration tools will also support comments and change-tracking features, ensuring transparency and accountability in the editing process.

Acceptance Criteria

Multiple users are collaborating on a shared expense report in FundSweep. Each user opens the document from different locations, and as they make changes, the updates are displayed in real-time on all users' screens. Users discuss edits and feedback through the comment feature, ensuring everyone is aware of changes as they happen.

Given multiple users have opened the expense report, when one user makes an edit, then all other users see the change reflected in their document within 2 seconds of the edit being made.

A user reviews a financial document and wants to leave feedback for their teammates through comments. They highlight a section of the document and add a comment detailing their suggestions for revisions. Other users viewing the document should be able to see the comment and respond accordingly.

Given a user highlights a section and adds a comment, when another user views the document, then they can see the comment immediately and have the option to reply or resolve the comment.

A team member needs to track changes made to a financial document. They want to ensure that all edits are visible and can be restored if necessary. The team must access the change-tracking feature to review previous edits and who made each change.

Given the change-tracking feature is activated, when any user makes a change to the financial document, then that change is logged with the username, timestamp, and a brief description of the edit, accessible through a dedicated change-log area.

A user is collaborating with multiple team members on a financial project that requires final approval. They need to ensure that all edits are saved automatically to prevent any loss of data. The team relies on the system to maintain the integrity of their collaboration.

Given automated saving is enabled, when any user makes an edit to the document, then that edit is saved automatically without any action from the user, and a notification is displayed confirming the save was successful.

During a meeting, a team is discussing an invoice in real-time while making edits on the document. They want to ensure all users have synchronized access to the latest version of the invoice at all times during their discussion to facilitate fast decision-making.

Given the invoice document is opened by multiple users, when one user makes any edits during the meeting, then all other users should see the most updated version of the invoice without needing to refresh their view.

A user is new to the team and needs a tutorial on how to use the collaboration features within FundSweep. They want to learn how to leave comments, track changes, and view real-time updates so that they can effectively engage with their team.

Given a new user accesses the help section, when they view the tutorial, then they should see step-by-step instructions, including visuals and examples demonstrating how to use comments, track changes, and collaborate in real-time within the documents.

Feedback Integration System

"As a freelancer, I want to leave specific feedback on sections of a shared budget document so that my collaborator can address my concerns more effectively."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a system that allows users to provide and receive feedback directly within the documents they are collaborating on. Users will be able to leave comments, tag teammates, and resolve issues through a streamlined interface. This feature will help improve communication around specific line items or sections of financial documents, fostering a more thorough review and understanding of financial activities and decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

As a user collaborating on a financial document, I want to leave comments on specific sections to provide feedback to my teammates before finalizing the report.

Given I am viewing a financial document, when I select a section and click on 'Add Comment', then I should be able to type my feedback, and it must be visible to all collaborators.

As a user, I want to tag my teammates in comments to ensure they see and address specific feedback related to the financial document.

Given I leave a comment on a document, when I type '@' followed by a teammate’s name, then they should receive a notification about the comment, and the comment must display their name clearly tagged.

As a user, I want to resolve comments once the feedback has been addressed so that the document remains organized and clear of unresolved issues.

Given that I have addressed feedback in a comment, when I click 'Resolve' on that comment, then the comment should be marked as resolved and hidden from the active comment view but remain accessible in the history.

As a user, I want to view all comments and feedback on a document in a consolidated manner to ensure I don’t overlook any inputs from my teammates.

Given I am on a financial document, when I click on the 'View Comments' option, then I should see a sidebar displaying all comments along with who made them and their status (Resolved/Unresolved).

As a user wanting to track document changes, I want to have a clear audit trail of all comments made, along with timestamps to understand when feedback was provided.

Given comments are made on the document, when I view the comment history, then I should see each comment along with the date and time it was created, along with each resolve action.

As a team leader, I want to ensure that feedback integration is secure so that only authorized users can see and leave feedback on sensitive financial documents.

Given I am managing user permissions, when I set a document's access controls, then only specified users should be able to see or add comments, and unauthorized users should not have comment functionality.

As a user, I want the feedback system to operate in real-time, allowing for immediate viewing of comments as they are made by other team members.

Given I am collaborating on a document, when another user adds a comment, then I should be able to see that comment appear in real-time without needing to refresh the document.

Access Control Management

"As a project manager, I want to control who can view and edit financial documents so that I can ensure sensitive information is protected while still facilitating collaboration among my team."

Description

This requirement includes the implementation of granular access control for financial documents, allowing users to set specific permissions for viewing and editing. Users can manage document access based on roles, ensuring that sensitive information is only available to authorized personnel. This enhances security and privacy, preventing unauthorized access while enabling collaboration among team members who require document interaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Access Control for Sensitive Financial Reports

Given a user with 'Manager' role, when they attempt to set permissions on a financial report, then they should have the ability to grant view and edit access to specific team members.

Revoking Access for Departing Employees

Given a user who is leaving the team, when the 'Administrator' role is invoked to revoke access, then the departing user should no longer access any financial documents.

Auditing Access Logs

Given an administrative user, when they access the audit log feature, then it should display all access attempts to financial documents, including user, action, timestamp, and result, for the last 30 days.

User Role Definition and Permissions

Given the user is assigned a 'Viewer' role, when they try to edit a financial document, then they should receive a notification stating they do not have sufficient permissions to edit.

Collaborative Document Updating

Given a user with 'Editor' role, when they modify a shared financial document, then changes should be immediately reflected for all users with access to that document.

Access Control Notification System

Given a user has set permissions on a financial document, when another user attempts to access that document, then the system should notify the document owner of the access attempt if denied.

Document Version History

"As an independent contractor, I want to access previous versions of my invoices so that I can track changes and ensure that my final document reflects all necessary adjustments."

Description

This requirement provides a feature that tracks and logs changes made to financial documents, offering a complete version history. Users can view past iterations of documents, compare versions, and revert changes if necessary. This feature enhances accountability and allows users to maintain the integrity of financial records by ensuring that previous versions can be accessed easily when needed, thus reducing errors.

Acceptance Criteria

Version History Navigation and Access

Given a user is actively working on a financial document, when they click on the 'Version History' button, then they should see a list of all previous versions of the document with timestamps and user information available for each version.

Version Comparison Functionality

Given a user selects two versions from the version history list, when they choose the 'Compare' option, then a side-by-side comparison view of both versions should be displayed, highlighting the differences between them.

Revert to Previous Version

Given a user is viewing the version history of a financial document, when they click on the 'Revert' option next to a specific version, then the document should be restored to that version, and a confirmation message should be displayed indicating the successful action.

Audit Trail Recording

Given that changes have been made to a financial document, when those changes are saved, then an audit log should automatically update to include details of the changes made, including a timestamp and the user who made the changes.

User Permissions and Access Control for Version History

Given a user with limited permissions is accessing the version history, when they try to view sensitive versions of documents, then they should be denied access to those versions and provided with an appropriate error message.

Real-time Updates to Version History

Given multiple users are collaborating on the same document, when one user saves a new version, then all other users should see the updated version history in real time without needing to refresh the page.

Version History Cleanup Mechanism

Given the document has numerous versions saved, when the user initiates a cleanup process, then versions older than a specified threshold (e.g., 6 months) should be permanently deleted, and an indicator of how many versions were removed should be displayed.

Automated Notifications System

"As a business owner, I want to receive notifications whenever my collaborators update financial documents so that I can stay informed and respond quickly to any changes."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating an automated notifications system that alerts users when changes are made to shared financial documents. Users can receive real-time updates via email or in-app notifications, ensuring they are always informed of the latest edits, comments, or approvals. This improves the responsiveness of team members and enhances the collaborative process in financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

Users collaborate on a financial report. One user edits the report and another user receives a notification about the changes made.

Given a user has edited a shared document, when the edit is saved, then the other users should receive a notification via email and in-app informing them of the changes made to the document.

A user provides feedback on a financial document. The user expects to see a notification sent to all other collaborators once the feedback is submitted.

Given a user submits feedback on a shared financial document, when feedback is submitted, then all other users should receive a real-time notification alerting them to the new feedback submission.

Multiple users are collaborating on a budget forecast document. A user approves a section of the budget which should trigger notifications to all users involved.

Given a user approves a section of the budget forecast document, when the approval is finalized, then all team members should receive notifications in-app and via email about the approval status change.

A user modifies the permissions on a shared financial document to allow another user to edit. The user wants to notify the affected user of this change.

Given a user modifies document permissions for collaboration, when permissions are changed, then the affected user should receive a notification about the permission change immediately.

Users are working on a joint invoice. One user adds a new line item to the invoice and wants the other users to be informed.

Given a user adds a line item to the joint invoice, when the line item is added and saved, then all users currently collaborating on the invoice should receive a notification of the new line item.

A team member wants to track all changes made to a shared document over the past week. They expect to receive a summary notification of all changes when they log in.

Given that changes have been made to a shared document over the past week, when a user logs into the application, then they should receive a summary notification listing all changes made during that period.

Interactive Financial Dashboards

"As a freelancer, I want to view financial data in interactive charts while collaborating on documents so that I can better understand the financial status and make informed decisions during discussions."

Description

This requirement entails creating interactive dashboards within the collaboration tool that visualize financial data from documents being collaborated on. Users can create dynamic graphs, charts, and summaries that pull real-time data from collaboration, allowing for quick insights and decision-making. This visualization aids in understanding complex financial information, making it easier for teams to discuss strategies based on current data.

Acceptance Criteria

User collaborates on a financial report and needs access to a visual representation of financial data in real-time during a team meeting.

Given that multiple users are collaborating on the financial report, when they access the interactive dashboard, then the dashboard should display real-time updates of the financial data being edited by all users without any delay.

A user wants to create a dynamic chart that automatically updates when new data is entered into the shared financial document.

Given that the user adds new financial data to the shared document, when the user views the interactive dashboard, then the dynamic chart should reflect these changes within 10 seconds.

Users are discussing strategies based on the visual representation of expenses and revenues in the interactive dashboard during a strategic planning session.

Given that users are actively discussing financial strategies, when they look at the interactive dashboard, then all visualizations (graphs, charts) should be clear, accurate, and correctly represent the underlying data according to the latest updates.

A user needs to toggle between different financial visualizations (bar charts, line graphs, summaries) in the collaborative tool based on their preference.

Given that a user is viewing the interactive dashboard, when they select different visualization options, then the dashboard should switch between visualizations seamlessly within 3 seconds.

Multiple users want to download the current state of the interactive dashboards for offline review after a collaboration session.

Given that users are finished collaborating and want to review the data, when they request to download the interactive dashboard, then they should receive a complete PDF report of the dashboard with all visualizations included.

User engages with the dashboard to gain insights into spending trends over a specified period during monthly financial reviews.

Given that the user selects the time period for review, when they access the interactive financial dashboard, then it should accurately reflect spending trends for the chosen period, including relevant graphs and summary statistics.

An administrator wants to manage user permissions and ensure that sensitive financial data is not exposed to unauthorized users on the dashboard.

Given that there are multiple user roles, when the administrator configures the permissions, then the dashboard should only display financial data to users whose role permits access, ensuring no sensitive information is visible to unauthorized users.

Integrated Task Management System

"As a small business owner, I want to assign tasks to my team related to our budget documents so that we can manage our projects efficiently and track responsibilities more effectively."

Description

This requirement introduces a task management system integrated with the collaboration tools. Users can assign tasks related to specific financial documents, track progress, set deadlines, and manage workloads directly within the platform. This feature promotes accountability, ensures deadlines are met, and enhances overall project management workflows by consolidating tasks with financial documentation in one place.

Acceptance Criteria

User assigns a task to a team member for financial document review.

Given the user is on the task management interface, When the user selects a financial document and assigns a task to a team member, Then the team member receives a notification about the assigned task and it appears in their task list.

A user tracks the progress of an assigned task related to a project.

Given the task is assigned and the user is on the task management interface, When the user marks the task as 'In Progress', Then the task status updates accordingly and the progress percentage can be updated in the system.

User sets a deadline for a financial task.

Given the user is on the task management interface, When the user sets a deadline for a task related to a financial document, Then the deadline is saved and visualized on the task list with a clear indication of how many days are left until the deadline.

A user shares a financial report with collaborators via the platform.

Given the user has prepared a financial report, When the user shares the report with collaborators, Then all invited collaborators receive an email notification and the report appears in their shared documents section.

A user filters tasks based on their status within the collaboration tools.

Given the user is on the task management page, When the user applies a filter to display either 'Completed', 'In Progress', or 'Pending' tasks, Then the task list updates to show only the tasks corresponding to the selected status filter.

Multiple users provide feedback on a shared financial document.

Given multiple users are reviewing a shared financial document, When each user submits their feedback through the collaboration tools, Then all feedback is consolidated and accessible in the feedback section of the document, indicating which user provided each comment.

QuickExpense Capture

This feature allows users to instantly record expenses using their mobile device by simply snapping a photo of their receipts or entering the amount. This convenience eliminates the hassle of manual tracking, ensuring that users can maintain accurate records in real-time without slowing down their workflow.

Requirements

Photo Capture for Expenses

"As a small business owner, I want to quickly capture expense receipts using my smartphone, so that I can keep my financial records up-to-date without added hassle."

Description

This requirement focuses on enabling users to capture and upload images of their receipts directly within the FundSweep application using their mobile devices. By implementing advanced image recognition technology, users can photograph receipts, which the system will then process to extract relevant data (such as date, amount, merchant, and tax). This functionality reduces the time spent on manual entry, minimizes errors, and enhances the overall accuracy of financial records. Integration with existing expense tracking workflows will allow these captured expenses to be automatically categorized and synced with users’ accounts, offering a seamless experience that promotes real-time financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User uses the QuickExpense Capture feature to photograph a receipt immediately after making a purchase to log the expense quickly.

Given the user has opened the FundSweep app and selected the QuickExpense Capture option, When the user captures a clear image of a receipt, Then the system should successfully extract and display relevant data such as date, amount, merchant, and tax for review before submission.

The user captures multiple receipts in quick succession during a business trip, needing all expenses logged efficiently.

Given the user has captured multiple receipts, When the user selects the option to upload receipts, Then all receipts should be processed without delay, and the user should be notified once the data extraction is complete for each receipt.

The user wants to ensure that the extracted data from a photo of a receipt is accurate before finalizing the entry into the expense tracker.

Given the extracted data is displayed after capturing a receipt, When the user reviews the extracted information, Then the user should have the option to edit the data if any discrepancies are found before saving it to the expense log.

The user is attempting to capture a receipt in a low-light environment and needs assurance that the Capture functionality is still effective.

Given the user captures a receipt in a low-light setting, When the photo is taken, Then the system should apply image enhancement algorithms to improve readability and successfully extract accurate data from the receipt.

Upon capturing a receipt, the user wants to categorize the expense immediately for better record-keeping.

Given the user has captured a receipt, When they initiate the categorization process, Then the system should provide category options based on previous usage and allow the user to either select a category or create a new one before saving the entry.

The user needs to review all previously captured receipts and ensure they are accurately recorded since their last session.

Given the user navigates to the 'My Expenses' section, When they select 'Recent Expenses', Then the system should display all captured receipts along with their extracted data, and the user should be able to filter these entries by date, amount, or category effortlessly.

The user requests assistance for errors in capture data during their expense entry process.

Given the user notices an error in extracted receipt data, When they click on the help button, Then the system should provide contextual help and troubleshooting tips to assist the user in resolving the issue effectively.

Manual Expense Entry

"As a freelancer, I want to manually enter my expenses when I don't have receipts, so that I can ensure that all my financial activities are accurately recorded."

Description

This requirement enables users to manually enter expenses into the FundSweep app, providing an option for users who may not always have receipts available. Users can input key details such as the amount, category, date, vendor, and any notes regarding the expense. This functionality is crucial for ensuring that all expenses, regardless of receipt availability, are accounted for in the financial system. The interface will be simple and intuitive, ensuring that users can complete this task quickly and efficiently while maintaining accurate expense records and reports.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Manual Expense Entry feature to record an expense without a receipt after a business meeting.

Given the user has logged into the FundSweep app, when they navigate to the Manual Expense Entry option, they should be able to fill out a form with fields for amount, category, date, vendor, and notes. After submitting the form, the expense should be logged accurately in their records.

User wants to enter an expense from a purchase made on a specific date and categorize it correctly.

Given the user is on the Manual Expense Entry screen, when they select a category from the drop-down menu, then the system should accurately display and save the user's selected category in their expense record, along with the correct date entered.

User enters an invalid amount for an expense and submits the form.

Given the user has entered a non-numeric value in the amount field, when they attempt to submit the form, then an error message should be displayed indicating that the amount must be a number and the expense should not be recorded until a valid amount is entered.

User wants to view their total expenses after entering a new one manually.

Given a user has entered multiple expenses manually, when they navigate to the summary page, then the total amount displayed should accurately reflect the sum of all entered expenses, including the latest one.

User wants to quickly save an expense to avoid losing the data they have entered.

Given a user has filled in all necessary fields in the Manual Expense Entry form, when they press the save button, then the app should save the expense without any lag, and a confirmation message should appear confirming the entry was successful.

User wants to override a previously entered expense that has incorrect details.

Given the user navigates to an existing expense entry, when they edit the entry and submit the changes, then the updated expense details should replace the old information in the system and reflect those changes on their financial dashboard.

User wants to ensure their manual entry is secure and not mistakenly deleted.

Given a user is entering an expense and the app is running on a mobile device, when the user closes the app abruptly without saving, then any entered data should be preserved and available when the user re-opens the app.

Real-Time Expense Syncing

"As an independent contractor, I want my expenses to sync in real-time across my devices, so that I can always access my latest financial information no matter where I am."

Description

This requirement focuses on ensuring that all captured or entered expenses are instantly synchronized across all devices in real-time. By implementing cloud-based technology, users will have access to their most current financial data on any device, at any time. This capability not only enhances the user experience by providing up-to-date information but also minimizes discrepancies that may occur when data is manually updated. This feature is essential for business users who need to make informed financial decisions on-the-go.

Acceptance Criteria

User captures an expense using the QuickExpense Capture feature while at a business meeting. They take a photo of a receipt for an expense incurred during lunch. The user expects this expense to be instantly synchronized across all their devices, allowing them to access it later on their laptop without any manual updates.

Given the user captures a receipt using QuickExpense Capture, when the receipt is submitted, then the expense data should be visible on all linked devices within 2 seconds.

A freelancer inputs a new expense amount directly into the FundSweep app while working on a project. They want to ensure that this new entry is synced across all their devices so that when they open the app on their tablet later, they can see the latest updates.

Given the user enters an expense amount without a receipt, when the entry is saved, then the expense should reflect on all devices within 3 seconds.

A small business owner checks their financial dashboard on a different device from which they initially captured recent expenses. They expect to see all captured expenses reflected accurately on the new device without any data discrepancies.

Given the user accesses their financial dashboard on a new device, when they refresh the dashboard, then all recent expenses captured in the past 5 minutes should appear with correct details.

An independent contractor wants to ensure that all expense data displayed on their desktop version of FundSweep matches what was captured through QuickExpense Capture on their mobile device throughout the day.

Given the user has captured multiple expenses throughout the day, when they view the report on the desktop app, then all expenses should match the mobile data in both amount and timestamp.

While traveling, a user captures an expense and then switches to another device. They want to ensure that the expense they captured is visible on their new device without any lag, allowing them to maintain accurate financial tracking.

Given the user captures an expense on their mobile device, when they access their account on a different device, then the captured expense should be immediately visible within 2 seconds of logging in.

A user accidentally captures an expense twice and wants to verify that the system synchronizes real-time updates to remove the duplicate entry on all devices.

Given the user deletes a duplicate expense entry on one device, when they check their account on another device, then the duplicate entry should not appear within 3 seconds.

During a team meeting, a business owner delegates expense capturing to an assistant using QuickExpense Capture. They need to confirm that all entries made during the meeting are correctly synced to their account.

Given the assistant captures multiple expenses during the meeting, when the user logs into FundSweep afterward, then all captured expenses should reflect accurately without any missing entries within 5 seconds of submission.

Expense Categorization

"As a small business owner, I want the system to automatically categorize my expenses, so that I can quickly and accurately keep track of my spending without manual input."

Description

This requirement involves creating a feature that automatically suggests categories for newly inputted or captured expenses based on machine learning algorithms that analyze past user behavior. When a user enters an expense, the system will recommend relevant categories (e.g., travel, supplies, meals) to ensure that users consistently classify their expenses. This functionality not only saves time for users during entry but also improves the accuracy of expense reports and analytics, aiding in budget management and financial forecasting.

Acceptance Criteria

User captures a receipt using the FundSweep mobile app to record an expense after a business lunch. Upon submission, the app should automatically suggest relevant expense categories based on the input amount and historical user data.

Given the user captures a receipt with an amount for a meal expense, when the expense is submitted, then the system suggests categories such as 'Meals' or 'Dining' based on previous entries.

A freelancer enters a miscellaneous expense amount manually into the FundSweep application. The system should process the input and provide category suggestions that match similar past expenses recorded by the user.

Given the user inputs an expense amount of $50 without categorizing, when the user submits the amount, then the system recommends relevant past categories used for similar amounts such as 'Supplies' or 'Travel'.

A user reviews their recent expenses on the FundSweep dashboard. They should see expenses categorized correctly based on the machine learning suggestions made during each entry.

Given the user views the expenses section of the dashboard, when they look at the list of recently entered expenses, then each expense should display the suggested category accurately reflecting the input from the user and the system's recommendation.

A business owner examines their monthly expense report generated by FundSweep. The report should clearly outline the total expenses per category to provide an overview of spending patterns.

Given the user generates a monthly expense report, when the report is displayed, then it accurately lists total expenses categorized by type (e.g., 'Travel', 'Supplies', 'Meals') and provides a breakdown for each category.

The user toggles between different currencies in the FundSweep application. The system should maintain expense categorization accurately, regardless of the currency selected during the entry.

Given the user records an expense in a foreign currency, when they switch back to their local currency, then the system retains the expense category recommendations based on past entries and does not alter them due to currency changes.

A new user signs up for FundSweep and starts entering expenses without any historical data. The system should still provide sensible default category suggestions based on common expense types.

Given a new user has no existing data, when they enter an expense, then the system should suggest default categories like 'Supplies' and 'Meals' based on typical expenditures for new users.

Multi-Currency Support

"As a freelance consultant working with international clients, I want to input and convert expenses in multiple currencies, so that I can manage my finances accurately when working with clients abroad."

Description

This requirement ensures that the QuickExpense Capture feature can handle expenses in various currencies. Users often deal with international transactions; therefore, this functionality will enable them to input expenses in multiple currencies and automatically convert them to their base currency for consistent financial reporting. Integration with real-time exchange rate APIs will ensure that users have accurate and up-to-date currency conversions, facilitating effective management of cross-border transactions.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to capture an expense in a foreign currency while traveling abroad so that I can accurately track my spending in real-time without manual data entry.

Given I take a photo of a receipt in a foreign currency, when I upload the receipt through the QuickExpense Capture feature, then the expense should automatically convert to my base currency using the latest exchange rate.

As a freelancer, I need to enter expenses in different currencies for my projects that involve clients from various countries, ensuring accurate financial records for each project.

Given I select a currency from a predefined dropdown menu while entering an expense, when I input the expense amount and save it, then the system should record the expense in the selected currency and show the converted amount in my base currency on the transaction list.

As an independent contractor, I want to check if the real-time exchange rates are accurate before submitting my expense reports.

Given I input an expense in a foreign currency, when I view the expense summary, then the displayed conversion rate should match the current exchange rate retrieved from the integrated API at the time of entry.

As a user managing multiple accounts in different currencies, I want to ensure that the budgeting feature accurately reflects the total expenses across all currencies.

Given I have recorded multiple expenses in various currencies, when I view my budget summary, then the total expenditure should be presented in my base currency, accurately reflecting all historical conversions without discrepancies.

As a business owner, I want to ensure that my expense report is generated in my preferred currency regardless of the currency used for each individual expense.

Given I have submitted an expense with multiple currency entries, when I generate the expense report for a specified period, then the report should convert all expenses to my preferred currency according to the exchange rates at the time of each expense entry.

As a user, I would like to receive notifications if the exchange rate fluctuates significantly after I recorded an expense, to properly monitor my financial adjustments.

Given I have recorded an expense with a specific exchange rate, when the rate changes by a predefined percentage, then I should receive a notification alerting me to the change in exchange rate that may affect my expenses.

As a product manager, I want to assess how well the QuickExpense Capture feature handles expenses in various currencies during external audits, ensuring compliance and transparency.

Given a sample set of international expenses recorded during the audit period, when reviewed, then 100% of the expenses should accurately reflect the original amount, entered currency, automatic conversion details, and display the correct financial impact in the base currency.

User-Friendly Dashboard for Expense Overview

"As an independent contractor, I want a clear visual overview of my expenses on a dashboard, so that I can easily understand my spending patterns and make better financial choices."

Description

This requirement pertains to the development of a user-friendly dashboard that provides an overview of users' expenses. It will display key metrics such as total expenses, categorized spending, and recent transactions, allowing users to quickly assess their financial health. The dashboard will also incorporate visual aids such as graphs and charts to illustrate spending patterns over time, thus enhancing the usability and appeal of the FundSweep platform. This feature aims to empower users with actionable insights that can improve budgeting and spending decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

Users can log in to their FundSweep account and navigate to the dashboard to view their expenses at a glance.

Given a user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they access the dashboard, then they should see their total expenses displayed, categorized spending, and recent transactions in a visually appealing layout.

Users require a clear view of their spending patterns over time for better budgeting

Given the user is viewing their expense dashboard, when they select a time frame (e.g., monthly, quarterly), then accumulated expenses should be displayed using graphs or charts to illustrate the spending patterns accurately.

Users need to quickly assess their financial health from their dashboard without confusion.

Given a user accesses the expense dashboard, then they should be able to identify key metrics such as total expenses and categorized spending through easily readable formats, with no more than three clicks to access any desired information.

Users want to ensure all recent transactions are listed accurately in the dashboard for real-time tracking.

Given a user accesses their expense dashboard, when they view the recent transactions section, then it should display the most recent ten transactions with correct date, amount, and category details, updated in real-time.

Users are looking for actionable insights based on their spending patterns to make informed financial decisions.

Given a user has been using the expense tracker for at least a month, when they access their dashboard, then they should receive personalized recommendations based on their spending patterns that suggest areas for potential savings or budget adjustments.

Users want to be reassured that their financial data is secure while accessing their dashboard.

Given a user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they access the dashboard, then they should see visual indicators such as lock icons or secure connection messages that confirm the safety of their data and transactions.

Instant Budget Alerts

Users receive immediate notifications on their mobile devices when they exceed their budget limits or approach specific spending thresholds. This proactive approach enables better financial discipline and encourages users to make informed decisions on the spot, preventing overspending before it happens.

Requirements

Real-Time Budget Tracking

"As a small business owner, I want to see my budget status in real time so that I can adjust my spending immediately if I'm nearing my limit."

Description

The system shall provide users with real-time tracking of their budget, displaying current spending against budget limits directly on the dashboard. This feature will allow users to see their financial position instantly, enabling proactive management of expenses. By integrating with transaction data and displaying updated metrics as transactions occur, users can make informed decisions on their spending habits. It aims to enhance user engagement with their financial status and prevent overspending by providing a clear visual representation of budget utilization.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a notification when spending reaches 80% of their designated budget limit for the month, allowing them to re-evaluate unnecessary expenses.

Given the user has set a budget limit, when their spending reaches 80% of that limit, then a mobile notification should be sent to the user's device indicating their spending status and encouraging them to review their expenses.

User can view up-to-date budget utilization in real-time on their dashboard as transactions occur throughout the day.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep application, when a transaction is completed, then the dashboard should reflect the updated budget utilization immediately, showing the current total spent and remaining budget.

User accesses their budget overview page and sees a visual representation of their spending against the budget limits, distinguishing between essential and non-essential expenses.

Given the user navigates to the budget overview page, when the page loads, then they should see a graphical representation (e.g., a bar chart or pie chart) illustrating their total budget, current spending, and a breakdown of essential vs. non-essential expenses.

User can customize their budget limits and receive alerts when they exceed those personalized limits during the month.

Given the user has set personalized budget limits, when their spending exceeds any of those limits, then the application should trigger an instant notification alerting the user of the budget overage.

User logs into the platform and accesses their budget alerts settings to modify how and when they receive notifications about their spending.

Given the user is on the budget alerts settings page, when they choose to update their notification preferences, then the changes should be saved, and the user should receive a confirmation message that their alert settings have been successfully updated.

User realizes they have exceeded their budget and wants to quickly navigate back to the budget overview to analyze their spending habits.

Given the user receives a budget overage alert, when they click on the notification, then they should be redirected to the budget overview page for further analysis of their spending habits.

Customizable Spending Alerts

"As a freelancer, I want to set alerts for different budget categories so that I can manage my spending according to my priorities and goals."

Description

Users shall be able to set customizable spending alerts that notify them when they approach or exceed set thresholds for different categories of their budget. This functionality will enable specific and personalized financial management, allowing users to define what levels of spending are concerning for them. By enhancing user control over financial decisions, this feature encourages responsible budgeting and helps users stay within their intended limits, ultimately fostering better money management habits.

Acceptance Criteria

As a user, I want to set a spending alert for my dining category so that I receive notifications when I approach my budget threshold while I am out eating with friends.

Given I have set a spending alert for the dining category at $200, when my spending reaches $180, then I receive an alert notification on my mobile device.

As a user, I need to adjust my budget for groceries, and I want to ensure my spending alert updates accordingly to reflect this change before my next shopping trip.

Given I have increased my grocery budget from $300 to $400, when I adjust the spending alert to match this new threshold, then the spending alert conditions are updated to notify me at $360.

As a freelancer, I often have fluctuating income, so I set varying thresholds for my income categories to manage my budget effectively on different projects.

Given I have customized multiple spending alerts across different categories, when my spending reaches the defined thresholds for any category, then I receive a distinct alert for that specific category on my mobile device.

As a user who is nearing the end of the month, I want to be reminded about my overarching budget limits to avoid overspending on unnecessary items.

Given that I have set a general budget alert at $800 for the month, when my total spending reaches $750, then I receive a reminder alert that indicates I am nearing my monthly limit and encourages me to monitor my expenditures.

As a user using different currencies, I want to ensure that my spending alerts adapt to currency conversions based on my current location.

Given I have set a budget threshold of €1000 in my travel category, when I am abroad in a country using a different currency and I spend an equivalent of $1200, then I receive an alert based on the converted threshold amount.

As a user, I want to disable a specific spending alert for a category once I reach my predetermined spending limit, so I do not receive redundant notifications.

Given I have hit my budget limit of $500 for entertainment and wish to ignore further alerts, when I disable that alert, then I will no longer receive notifications related to the entertainment category until I reset it.

Monthly Spending Summary Reports

"As an independent contractor, I want to receive a monthly summary of my spending so that I can analyze my financial habits and make adjustments as needed."

Description

The platform shall generate monthly spending summary reports and automatically send them to users via email and mobile notifications. These summaries will provide insights into spending patterns and allow users to reflect on their budget management progress. Reports will include visual graphs and key insights based on the user's historical spending data, serving as a powerful tool for users to understand where they can improve and where they have succeeded, effectively equipping them for future financial planning.

Acceptance Criteria

Users receive their monthly spending summary reports automatically at the beginning of each month via email and mobile notification.

Given the user has enabled notifications and provided a valid email address, when the new month starts, then the user should receive the monthly spending summary report via email and mobile notification.

The monthly spending summary report includes visual graphs indicating the user's spending categories and totals for the month.

Given the user's transaction data for the previous month, when the monthly spending summary report is generated, then it should include visual graphs accurately reflecting the spending categories and totals for that month.

Users can easily access their previous month's spending summary reports through the FundSweep application interface.

Given the user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they navigate to the reports section, then they should be able to access and view summary reports from previous months.

Spending patterns and key insights are clearly highlighted in the monthly spending summary report for user clarity.

Given the monthly spending summary report has been generated, when the user views the report, then it should clearly highlight spending patterns and key insights based on the user's historical data.

Users are notified if there were any discrepancies or unusual spending patterns detected in their monthly spending summary report.

Given the user's spending data has been analyzed, when a discrepancy or unusual spending pattern is detected, then the user should receive a notification highlighting this information in the monthly spending summary report.

The monthly spending summary report is generated within a defined timeframe following the end of each month.

Given the end of the month has passed, when the monthly spending summary report is created, then it should be generated and sent to users within 24 hours after the month ends.

Integration with Banking APIs

"As a business owner, I want my bank transactions to automatically update in FundSweep so that I don’t have to manually input each expense."

Description

The system shall integrate with various banking APIs to facilitate automatic transaction imports. By streamlining bank data directly into the FundSweep platform, users can maintain up-to-date expenditure logs without manual entry. This integration enhances user convenience and ensures accuracy in budgeting by reflecting real-time financial transactions. It aims to reduce user workload and inaccuracies in budgeting due to manual entry errors, ultimately providing a smoother user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives notifications for budget exceedances in real-time during the month.

Given a user has set a monthly budget, when their expenses exceed 90% of that budget, then a notification should be sent to their mobile device immediately.

User receives alerts when approaching predetermined spending thresholds.

Given a user has specified spending thresholds for categories, when they spend 80% of the allocated amount in any category, then an alert should be sent to their mobile device.

Integration with banking APIs to pull transaction data automatically.

Given a user has connected a bank account, when new transactions occur, then they should be imported into FundSweep within 5 minutes without manual intervention.

Users can view a summary of their expenses against their budgets after integration with banking APIs.

Given that transactions have been imported, when the user views their budget dashboard, then it should display the total spent to date compared to the set budget across all categories accurately.

User logs out and logs back in to check for updated budget alerts.

Given a user has received budget alerts, when they log back into the system, then they should see a notification history of all alerts received during their absence.

Notifications can be customized by the user for various budget scenarios.

Given a user is in the notification settings, when they change the alert preferences for budget notifications, then those changes should be saved and applied for future notifications.

Testing the responsiveness of mobile notifications for budget alerts.

Given a user exceeds their budget, when the notification is triggered, then the notification should be delivered to the user's mobile device within 2 minutes with correct content details.

User-Friendly Mobile Alerts

"As a user, I want mobile budget alerts to be easy to read and actionable so that I can respond quickly without confusion."

Description

The feature shall ensure that all budget alerts sent to mobile devices are formatted in a user-friendly manner that is easy to read and actionable. Alerts should include clear, concise descriptions of the alert context with options for quick responses, such as adjusting budgets or viewing the detailed transaction. This will increase user engagement and facilitate immediate action, thus supporting timely financial decisions. Ensuring uniformity in alerts will guarantee consistency across all platforms, enhancing overall user satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a budget alert on their mobile device upon exceeding their budget for the month.

Given the user has set a monthly budget and spent beyond that limit, when the transaction exceeds the budget, then an immediate alert is sent to the user's mobile device with a clear message indicating the amount spent over the limit and options to adjust the budget or view the transaction details.

User receives an alert when approaching a pre-defined spending threshold.

Given the user has set a spend threshold, when the user's spending reaches 90% of that threshold, then an alert is sent to the user's mobile device with a concise message indicating the percentage spent and options for quick actions such as budget adjustment.

User opens the budget alert notification on their mobile device.

Given the user receives a budget alert notification, when they tap on the notification, then they are directed to the app's budget overview page displaying detailed transaction information and quick links for adjustments.

User receives an alert when their budget resetting for a new period.

Given the user has budgets set for monthly or quarterly periods, when the reset period occurs, then the user receives a notification indicating that the new budget period has begun along with the updated budget limit.

User customization of alert formats and options.

Given the user accesses the alert settings, when they choose to customize alert message formats or action options, then the changes are reflected in future alerts sent to their mobile device, ensuring they match user preferences.

User views alert logs in the app for historical alerts received.

Given the user wants to review past alerts, when they access the alert history section in the app, then they see a list of past alerts with timestamps and details of actions taken, ensuring transparency and trackability of alerts.

User receives alerts in different languages based on their preference settings.

Given the user has set their preferred language in the app's settings, when a budget alert is triggered, then the alert message is sent in the user's preferred language, ensuring relevance and clarity in communication.

Mobile Invoice Generation

The app allows users to create and send professional-looking invoices directly from their smartphones. By streamlining the invoicing process, users can bill clients faster, ensuring timely payments and enhancing cash flow while managing their finances from anywhere.

Requirements

Invoice Template Customization

"As a freelancer, I want to customize my invoices with my logo and brand colors so that I can present a professional image to my clients and enhance brand recognition."

Description

The Mobile Invoice Generation feature must allow users to customize invoice templates to reflect their brand identity, including logo upload, color schemes, and font selection. This customization will enhance the professionalism of invoices and foster brand recognition, ultimately helping users present their business in a polished manner. By providing varied templates, users can select designs that best fit specific client needs or industries, further enhancing the impact of their communication with clients. This requirement is crucial for ensuring that users can maintain their branding even in financial communications.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes an invoice template by uploading their logo, selecting a color scheme, and choosing fonts before sending it to a client.

Given the user is on the invoice generation screen, when they upload a logo, select a color scheme, and choose a font, then the invoice template should reflect the changes in real-time.

User selects a specific invoice template from a list of provided options tailored to different industries and customizes it.

Given the user is in the template selection screen, when they view available templates, then they should see at least five templates relevant to different industries, and they can customize any selected template accordingly.

User saves a customized invoice template for future use.

Given the user has finished customizing an invoice template, when they click the 'save template' button, then the new template should be saved under 'My Templates' for easy future access.

User previews the customized invoice template before sending it to a client.

Given the user has customized an invoice template, when they click the 'preview' button, then the system should display a full-screen view of the invoice as it will appear to the client, including all customizations applied.

User sends the customized invoice to the client via email through the app.

Given the user is on the invoice preview screen, when they click the 'send invoice' button, then an email with the invoice should be successfully sent to the designated client email address.

User edits an existing customized invoice template.

Given the user is in the 'My Templates' section, when they select a saved template to edit, then they should be able to change the logo, color scheme, or fonts and save the updated template.

User deletes a customized invoice template that they no longer need.

Given the user is viewing their saved templates, when they select a template and click the 'delete' button, then the selected template should be permanently removed from their list of saved templates.

Real-Time Invoice Tracking

"As a small business owner, I want to track the status of my invoices in real-time so that I can manage my cash flow better and follow up on overdue payments promptly."

Description

The App should include a feature to track the status of invoices in real-time, allowing users to see whether invoices have been viewed by clients, are pending payment, or have been paid. This functionality will assist in managing cash flow effectively and enable users to take timely actions such as reminders for overdue payments. By leveraging notifications and updates within the app, users can stay informed about their accounts receivable, thus improving financial management and client relationships.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to view the real-time status of my invoices so that I can manage my accounts receivable effectively and know when to follow up with clients.

Given that I have created and sent an invoice, when I access the invoice status in the app, then I should see a clear indication of whether the invoice has been viewed, is pending payment, or has been paid.

As a freelancer, I want to receive notifications when my invoices are viewed or paid so that I can stay updated on my cash flow without having to manually check each invoice.

Given that an invoice has been sent, when the client views or pays the invoice, then I should receive a push notification informing me of the change in status.

As a business owner, I want to see a summary dashboard of my invoices' statuses so that I can quickly assess my cash flow situation at a glance.

Given that I am on the dashboard, when I view the invoice summary section, then I should see a visual representation of my invoices categorized by status (viewed, pending, paid) with the aggregate amounts.

As a user, I want to be able to set reminders for overdue invoices so that I can take timely actions to collect payment.

Given that an invoice is overdue, when I access the invoicing feature, then I should have the option to set a reminder for the overdue invoice and receive a notification on the specified date.

As a contractor, I want to filter invoices by status so that I can focus on outstanding payments that need my attention first.

Given that I am on the invoices page, when I apply a filter for 'Pending Payment', then I should see only the invoices that have not yet been paid.

As a user, I want to easily share the invoice status with my clients directly from the app so that I can improve communication regarding outstanding payments.

Given that I have accessed an invoice, when I choose to share the invoice status, then the app should allow me to send the status via email or messaging apps directly to my client.

Multi-Currency Support for Invoices

"As an independent contractor, I want to create and send invoices in different currencies so that my international clients can pay me more conveniently without confusion."

Description

The Mobile Invoice Generation feature must support invoicing in multiple currencies, allowing users to generate invoices according to the currency preferences of their clients. This requirement is essential for users who operate in international markets, as it will eliminate confusion related to currency conversions and improve the payment experience for clients. Furthermore, the ability to display real-time exchange rates will help users set accurate amounts for their services, maximizing their revenue potential.

Acceptance Criteria

Creating an invoice for an international client who requires billing in their local currency.

Given the user has selected an international client, when they create an invoice, then the system allows them to choose the client’s preferred currency from a list of supported currencies and displays the real-time exchange rate for the selected currency.

Sending a mobile invoice to a client in a different currency while ensuring accurate conversion rates are applied.

Given the user has completed the invoice in the selected currency, when they send the invoice, then the system accurately reflects the conversion rate used at the time of invoice creation and includes this information for the client in the invoice details.

Viewing an invoice in different currencies to ensure correctness and clarity.

Given the user has generated an invoice in multiple currencies, when they view the invoice on their mobile device, then all currency values should display correctly in the selected format and include the current exchange rate information clearly stated on the invoice.

Editing an existing invoice to change the payment currency after discussing with a client.

Given the user has an existing invoice, when they edit the invoice to select a different payment currency, then the system automatically updates the total amount based on the current exchange rate and shows the updated invoice total before the user resends it.

Generating a report of invoices issued in multiple currencies for accounting purposes.

Given the user navigates to their reports section, when they generate an invoice report, then the system includes a breakdown of invoices by currency, total amounts in each currency, and the corresponding exchange rates used.

Ensuring that the currency preference is saved for future invoices based on client selection.

Given the user has set a currency preference for a specific client, when they create a new invoice for that client, then the system automatically uses the saved currency preference without requiring the user to select it again.

Testing the performance of invoice generation when selecting different currencies.

Given the user is creating an invoice, when they switch between different currencies quickly, then the invoice generation should remain performant with no noticeable delay or errors in displaying the correct exchange rates.

Automated Payment Reminders

"As a freelancer, I want to automate payment reminders for my invoices so that I can ensure timely payments without having to manually follow up constantly."

Description

The invoicing feature should automatically send payment reminders to clients based on customizable intervals, reducing the burden on users to manually follow up on overdue invoices. This automation will help ensure timely payments, improve cash flow, and enhance user satisfaction by maintaining professional communication with clients. Users should be able to customize reminder frequency and content to personalize their approach and maintain a positive client relationship.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes Payment Reminder Settings for the First Time

Given that the user is on the invoice settings page, when they customize the payment reminder frequency to 'weekly' and choose a reminder template, then an option to save these settings should be available and successfully save their preferences without errors.

Payment Reminders Are Sent Automatically

Given that an invoice is sent to a client, when the set reminder frequency is reached (e.g., 3 days after the due date), then the system should automatically send a payment reminder email to the client as per the customized content without user intervention.

User Modifies Reminder Content for Specific Clients

Given that the user has set up personalized reminders, when they access the reminder settings for a specific client and modify the message template, then the changes should be saved and reflected in the next automated reminder sent to that client.

Verification of Reminder Delivery to Client Email

Given that a payment reminder is triggered, when the email is sent to the client's email address, then it should be successfully received and logged in the system's audit trail, allowing users to verify the date and content of the sent reminder.

User Receives Feedback on Reminder Effectiveness

Given that the user utilizes the payment reminder feature for multiple invoices, when they review the dashboard after one month, then there should be a section displaying metrics on the effectiveness of reminders, including open rates and the number of invoices paid on time post-reminder.

User Cancels Future Payment Reminders for an Invoice

Given that a user no longer wants to send payment reminders for a specific invoice, when they select the cancel option for payment reminders on that invoice, then no reminders should be sent for that invoice, and a confirmation message should appear indicating successful cancellation.

System Handles Duplicate Reminder Prevention

Given that payment reminders are automated, when an invoice has already been marked as paid by the client, then the system should ensure that no subsequent reminders are sent for that invoice to avoid confusion and maintain professionalism.

Mobile-Friendly Invoice Creation

"As a busy freelancer, I want to create and send invoices quickly from my smartphone so that I can manage my finances while on the go."

Description

The application must optimize the invoicing process for mobile use, ensuring that users can create, edit, and send invoices seamlessly from their smartphones. This requirement is essential in providing users the flexibility to manage their invoicing needs on-the-go. A user-friendly mobile interface will enhance accessibility, allowing users to efficiently conduct business without being tied to a desktop. By prioritizing mobile functionality, FundSweep can cater to the dynamic lifestyles of its target users, who often require swift, efficient, and effective solutions.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new invoice using the mobile app while on a client visit.

Given the user is on the invoice creation screen in the mobile app, when the user enters client details, item descriptions, and amounts, then the user should successfully create an invoice that reflects the entered information and displays a preview for confirmation.

User edits an existing invoice on the mobile app after realizing an error in the amount.

Given the user has selected an existing invoice in the mobile app, when the user edits the amount and saves the changes, then the invoice should be updated with the new amount and reflect these changes in the invoice listing.

User sends an invoice directly from their mobile device to a client via email.

Given the user has completed an invoice creation, when the user selects the 'Send' option and enters the client’s email address, then the invoice should be sent successfully with a confirmation message displayed to the user.

User attempts to create an invoice without providing mandatory fields in the mobile app.

Given the user is on the invoice creation screen, when the user tries to submit the invoice without filling in required fields, then the app should display error messages indicating the missing mandatory fields and prevent invoice submission.

User switches from portrait to landscape mode while creating an invoice on the mobile app.

Given the user is in the process of creating an invoice in portrait mode, when the user rotates the device to switch to landscape mode, then the app should maintain all entered information and layout should adapt accordingly without data loss.

User accesses the invoice history to review past invoices on the mobile app.

Given the user taps on the ‘Invoice History’ section, when the user views the list of past invoices, then the app should display all invoices in a chronological order with correct dates and amounts available for each invoice.

Integration with Payment Gateways

"As a small business owner, I want my invoices to include a payment link to facilitate easier and quicker payments from my clients, reducing the need for them to manually transfer funds."

Description

The invoicing feature should integrate with popular payment gateways (like PayPal, Stripe, etc.) enabling users to accept payments directly through the invoices they send. This integration will streamline the payment process for clients, promoting faster transaction completion and improving the overall user experience. Users will benefit from reduced friction in receiving payments, and it opens up avenues for accelerated cash flow and enhanced financial management efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates an invoice generation on the FundSweep mobile app and selects payment gateway options.

Given a user successfully generates an invoice, when they select payment gateway options, then the available payment gateways (PayPal, Stripe) are displayed as options for the user.

A user sends an invoice using the mobile app that integrates with selected payment gateway.

Given an invoice is created and a payment gateway is selected, when the user sends the invoice, then the invoice includes a direct payment link for the selected gateway.

A client receives an invoice with payment link and attempts to make a payment.

Given a client receives an invoice with a payment link, when they click on the link, then they are redirected to the payment gateway's page to securely enter payment details.

User checks the payment status of an invoice sent through the mobile app.

Given an invoice has been sent to a client, when the user checks the payment status, then the mobile app displays the current payment status (Pending, Paid, or Failed).

Integration processes and error handling when payment fails.

Given a payment is initiated through the mobile app, when the payment fails, then the user receives a notification with an error message and suggestions for resolution.

User logs audit trail for payment transactions made through the mobile app invoices.

Given a payment has been completed for an invoice, when the user views the transaction history, then each completed transaction is logged with details (date, time, amount, status).

Personal Financial Dashboard

A tailored dashboard optimized for mobile that provides users with a snapshot of their financial health at a glance. Users can view real-time income, expenses, and budget status, empowering them to make immediate adjustments and stay aligned with their financial goals.

Requirements

Real-time Income Tracking

"As a small business owner, I want to track my income in real-time so that I can make prompt financial decisions and ensure smooth cash flow management."

Description

This requirement focuses on the implementation of a real-time income tracking feature that allows users to see their incoming funds as they occur. The functionality will integrate with connected bank accounts and payment platforms to automatically update and categorize income streams, providing users with an ongoing and accurate representation of their financial inflow. This feature will benefit users by eliminating manual entry, reducing errors, and enabling them to make informed financial decisions while ensuring they stay on top of their revenue stream. Furthermore, it aligns with FundSweep's goal of simplifying financial management and enhancing user engagement through immediate feedback on their financial health.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the personal financial dashboard to monitor real-time income after linking their bank account for the first time.

Given the user has successfully linked their bank account, when they navigate to the personal financial dashboard, then they should see their income updated in real-time within 5 seconds of a new transaction occurring.

A user receives a payment through a connected payment platform and checks their income on the dashboard shortly after.

Given the user has connected a payment platform, when a payment is received, then the amount should be automatically categorized and displayed in the income section of the dashboard within 10 seconds.

User wants to verify the categorization of their income streams on the financial dashboard after a week of usage.

Given the user has multiple income streams, when they review their dashboard, then they should see all income streams accurately categorized by type such as freelance work, products, and services without any discrepancies.

A user with multiple income sources tracks their income daily to manage their cash flow efficiently.

Given the user checks their financial dashboard each day, when they refresh the dashboard, then it should reflect the total accumulated income accurately at the end of each day.

User expects to receive notifications for real-time income updates on the mobile dashboard.

Given the user has enabled notifications in their profile settings, when new income is received, then they should receive a push notification within 5 minutes to inform them of the update.

A business owner reviews their financial performance at the end of the month using the dashboard.

Given the user accesses the monthly summary report, when they review it, then they should see a correct breakdown of total income categorized by source and an accurate comparison to the previous month.

Expense Categorization Automation

"As a freelancer, I want my expenses to be automatically categorized so that I can quickly assess my spending patterns without manual input."

Description

This requirement is for creating an automated expense categorization system that intelligently sorts expenses into predefined categories such as utilities, salaries, and marketing. By leveraging AI-driven technology, this feature will analyze transaction descriptions and patterns to categorize expenses accurately. This is crucial as it saves users time spent on manual categorization, reduces the risk of misclassification, and offers insights into spending habits. By providing users with a clear picture of where their money goes, this feature supports budget adherence and financial planning, integral to the functionality of the FundSweep platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses their Personal Financial Dashboard on FundSweep to view recent expenses after making multiple transactions throughout the week.

Given the user has made several transactions, when they navigate to the Expense Categorization section of the dashboard, then the system should automatically categorize each expense into the correct predefined categories, displaying them clearly in a list format with accurate totals for each category.

A user adds a new expense by inputting a transaction manually and selects a category from a dropdown list.

Given the user inputs a new expense transaction, when they select a category from the dropdown, then the system should allow for the selection and ensure the categorization is reflected automatically on the dashboard without requiring additional manual input.

A user receives an alert regarding their budget after generating monthly expense insights.

Given the user has set a monthly budget, when the automated system analyzes expenses and detects a potential overspend in a category, then it should send an alert notification to the user on their dashboard with actionable recommendations to address the overspend.

A user views their monthly spending report to track expenditures across different categories.

Given the automated categorization system has processed the user's expenses for the month, when the user accesses their monthly spending report, then the report should accurately display categorized expenses with a comparative analysis against the previous month and highlight areas of increased spending.

User experiences exceptional expenses due to an unexpected situation and needs to analyze these in relation to their budget.

Given that the user has a set budget and incurs an unexpected expense, when they review their categorized expenses, then the system should clearly show how this expense impacts their overall budget adherence and provide insights on potential budget adjustments.

User receives a request for their business expenses for tax season preparation.

Given that the user requires a summary of their categorized expenses for tax purposes, when they select the export function on their dashboard, then the system should generate a comprehensive report that includes all categorized expenses with date, amount, and category for the specified duration.

Budget Forecasting Tool

"As an independent contractor, I want to use a budgeting tool that forecasts my finances so that I can plan for upcoming expenses and avoid overspending."

Description

This requirement entails the development of a budget forecasting tool that utilizes past financial data to help users create accurate budget forecasts for upcoming months. The tool will analyze trends in income and expenses and provide visual representations of budget projections. This functionality empowers users to set realistic financial targets and anticipate potential shortfalls or surpluses. By incorporating this tool, FundSweep enhances its value proposition to users, enabling them to make strategic financial plans with confidence, thus improving their overall financial health.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Budget Forecasting Tool from the Personal Financial Dashboard to create a budget for the upcoming month based on previous spending habits and income patterns.

Given the user has historical financial data, when they input their desired budget categories and forecast period, then the system should generate a budget forecast that reflects realistic income and expense trends for that timeframe.

User views the generated budget forecasts to assess potential shortfalls and surpluses for informed decision-making regarding their financial plans.

Given the user has created a budget forecast, when they view the forecast, then the system should display a visual representation (e.g., charts or graphs) of projected income versus expenses for the selected period, clearly indicating any anticipated shortfalls or surpluses.

User adjusts budget categories in the Budget Forecasting Tool and observes the impact on their overall financial projection.

Given the user modifies one or more budget categories in their forecast, when they save these changes, then the system should recalculate and update the budget forecast accordingly with instant visual feedback on adjustments made, ensuring no data loss occurs during the process.

User seeks recommendations for budget adjustments based on the generated forecast and historical trends.

Given the user has received their budget forecast, when they request insights or recommendations, then the system should provide tailored suggestions for changes in spending or income targets based on historical performance and current financial trends.

User compares past financial data against budget forecasts to track their financial health and make informed adjustments.

Given the user has accessed the Budget Forecasting Tool, when they request a comparison, then the system should generate reports that outline discrepancies between actual past financial performance and the set forecast, highlighting areas requiring attention.

User shares their budget forecast with their financial advisor or stakeholder via the platform.

Given the user has a final budget forecast, when they choose the share option, then the system should send an email with a secure link allowing access to the budget forecast while ensuring data privacy and security standards are maintained.

Personalized Financial Insights

"As a user, I want to receive personalized insights based on my financial data so that I can make better decisions and improve my financial health."

Description

This requirement focuses on the integration of an AI-driven insights feature that analyzes user financial data and provides personalized recommendations. The insights will include guidance on spending habits, savings opportunities, and investment advice tailored to individual user profiles. This feature enhances user engagement and adds significant value to the FundSweep platform by helping users make informed decisions that align with their financial goals. The implementation aims to build user trust and reliance on the platform, fostering long-term usage and success in financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Personal Financial Dashboard and views the personalized financial insights after logging in to FundSweep.

Given a user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the Personal Financial Dashboard, then they should see personalized financial insights such as spending habits, savings opportunities, and investment advice tailored to their financial data.

The user receives weekly email summaries of their personalized financial insights based on their activity in FundSweep.

Given a user has opted in for weekly email summaries, when their financial data is updated, then they should receive an email containing their personalized financial insights within 24 hours of the update.

An independent contractor uses the personalized insights feature to adjust their budget based on spending habits.

Given a user is viewing their personalized insights on the dashboard, when they select the recommendation to adjust their budget, then they should be able to update their budget without navigating away from the dashboard.

A user provides feedback on the AI-driven financial insights they receive from the FundSweep platform.

Given a user has interacted with their personalized insights, when they submit feedback on the relevance and accuracy of the insights, then their feedback should be successfully recorded and acknowledged by the system.

Users are shown relevant spending insights during a particular reporting cycle (monthly, weekly).

Given a reporting cycle has closed, when the user views their historical insights, then the AI should highlight the top three insights that pertain to their spending for that reporting cycle, based on data analysis.

The AI-driven insights update in real-time as users input new financial data (invoices, expenses).

Given a user enters new financial data into FundSweep, when the data is saved, then the personalized insights should refresh and reflect the updated financial status within 5 minutes.

Users can interact with the insights to receive further explanations and recommendations based on their financial behavior.

Given a user is viewing their personalized financial insights, when they click on a specific insight, then a detailed explanation and further recommendations should be displayed on the same page without any delay.

Multi-Currency Support

"As a freelancer dealing with international clients, I want to manage my finances in multiple currencies so that I can accurately track my income and expenses without confusion."

Description

This requirement is to implement multi-currency support within the personal financial dashboard, allowing users to manage income and expenses in different currencies. This feature is essential for users engaged in international transactions or those working with overseas clients. Users will have the ability to convert currencies at real-time exchange rates and view their financial data consolidated in their preferred currency. This functionality not only broadens the user base by accommodating international businesses but also aligns with FundSweep's goal of simplifying financial management across diverse markets.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to track their freelance income and expenses in multiple currencies while working with international clients.

Given the user has set up their account with multiple currencies, When they enter transactions in different currencies, Then the dashboard should accurately display the total income and expenses in the user's preferred currency using real-time exchange rates.

User views their financial dashboard on a mobile device.

Given the user logs into the dashboard on their mobile device, When they navigate to the financial summary, Then the dashboard should show correctly converted amounts reflecting the user's primary currency and the relevant transaction currencies.

User wants to generate a report for their financial performance in different currencies over a specified period.

Given the user selects a date range for their financial report, When they choose to view it in any specified currency, Then the report should accurately reflect all transactions converted to the selected currency using real-time rates.

User updates their preferred currency settings in their profile.

Given the user navigates to their account settings, When they select a new preferred currency and save the changes, Then all future transactions should automatically reflect the new preferred currency throughout the dashboard.

User wants to know the real-time exchange rate for a specific currency conversion.

Given the user clicks on the currency conversion tool on the dashboard, When they enter the amount and select a currency pair, Then the tool should display the current exchange rate and converted amount based on real-time data.

User is notified of any currency conversion errors that occur during transaction entries.

Given the user tries to enter a transaction with an unsupported currency, When they attempt to save the transaction, Then an error message should inform them about the unsupported currency and prompt them to choose a valid one.

Voice Command Integration

Leveraging voice recognition technology, this feature allows users to add expenses, check balances, and get updates using simple voice commands. This hands-free functionality is especially useful for users on the move, making financial management effortless and efficient.

Requirements

Voice Command Recognition

"As a small business owner, I want to use voice commands to manage my finances so that I can easily track expenses and check my account balances while I am busy with other tasks."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a robust voice recognition engine that accurately interprets user commands in various accents and speech patterns. The integration of this technology enables users to seamlessly interact with the FundSweep platform by adding expenses, checking balances, and retrieving financial updates through voice commands. This feature enhances user experience by providing a hands-free alternative to traditional input methods, making financial management more efficient, especially for users who are multitasking or on-the-go. It is crucial that the voice commands are quick to recognize and that the system provides confirmation or feedback to the user for actions taken, ensuring clarity and reliability in their interactions with the software.

Acceptance Criteria

User successfully adds an expense using a voice command while cooking dinner.

Given the user is in a kitchen environment, When they say 'Add an expense of $50 for grocery shopping', Then the expense should be recorded accurately and confirmed back to the user verbally.

User checks their account balance using a voice command while driving.

Given the user is driving, When they say 'What is my current balance?', Then the system should respond with the current balance within 5 seconds without causing any distraction.

User retrieves recent transaction updates using a voice command when sitting at a café.

Given the user is at a café, When they say 'Give me my latest transactions', Then the system should provide a verbal summary of the last 5 transactions within 10 seconds.

User experiences a clarification request after a misrecognized command while multitasking.

Given the user has issued a voice command that is not understood, When the system responds asking for clarification, Then the system should wait for the user to rephrase their command without timing out for at least 10 seconds.

User operates the FundSweep app by voice while engaged in a fitness activity.

Given the user is exercising, When they say 'Record an expense of $20 for gym membership', Then the expense should be logged correctly and they should receive confirmation through the audio output without needing to touch the device.

User integrates voice command functionality for a budget forecast inquiry during a financial planning session.

Given the user is engaging in financial planning, When they say 'How much should I budget for utilities next month?', Then the system should provide a verbal recommendation based on historical data within 8 seconds.

Multi-language Support

"As a non-English speaking freelancer, I want to manage my finances using voice commands in my native language so that I can use FundSweep without language barriers."

Description

This requirement entails implementing multi-language capabilities for the voice command integration feature. By supporting multiple languages and dialects, FundSweep will cater to a broader audience, allowing non-English speaking users to engage with the platform comfortably. This enhances inclusivity and user satisfaction, facilitating greater adoption of the financial management tool across diverse markets. Users should be able to set their preferred language in their profile settings, and the voice systems must adapt accordingly, ensuring smooth and effective communication regardless of the user's language preference.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a language preference in their profile settings to engage with the voice command feature.

Given that the user has access to their profile settings, when they select a language from the available list, then the system should save their preference and reflect the change in the voice command responsiveness.

A non-English speaking user attempts to add an expense using voice commands.

Given that the user has set their preferred language to Spanish, when they issue a voice command to add an expense, then the system should accurately recognize the command and add the expense in the designated currency without errors.

A user checks their account balance in a different language using voice commands.

Given that the user has selected French as their preferred language, when they say 'Quelle est mon solde?', then the system should respond with the correct account balance in French.

A user changes their language preference mid-session and engages the voice command feature.

Given that the user is currently using the application in English, when they change their language preference to German, then the voice command feature should immediately adapt and respond accurately to commands in German without requiring a restart of the application.

A user receives confirmation after successfully executing a voice command in their selected language.

Given that the user has added an expense using a voice command in Italian, then they should receive a confirmation response in Italian that includes the details of the transaction.

Multiple users test the voice command integration feature in different supported languages simultaneously.

Given that multiple users are using the application in Spanish, Japanese, and Portuguese, when they issue voice commands to the system, then each user's command should be processed correctly according to their respective languages without interference.

The voice command system gives an error message for unsupported languages.

Given that the user attempts to engage the voice command feature in a language not supported by the system, when they issue a command, then the system should provide an understandable error message indicating that the language is not supported.

Contextual Feedback and Confirmation

"As a freelancer, I want the system to confirm my voice commands so that I can be assured that my financial updates are accurate and successfully processed."

Description

This requirement involves creating a feedback system that provides contextual responses to users after voice commands are issued. When a user adds an expense or checks their balance using voice commands, the system needs to confirm the action taken and provide relevant information regarding the transaction or balance in a clear verbal format. This feature is essential for building user confidence in the accuracy of the interactions and ensuring they receive immediate verification of their actions, thereby streamlining the user experience in financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User adds an expense using a voice command while cooking dinner in their kitchen, and the system successfully acknowledges the command and provides a verbal confirmation of the added expense.

Given the user has activated voice command, when they say 'Add an expense of $50 for groceries', then the system confirms with 'Expense of $50 for groceries added.'

A user checks their account balance using a voice command while driving to a meeting, requiring the system to respond promptly and accurately to maintain focus on the road.

Given the user is in a safe environment, when they say 'What is my current balance?', then the system responds with 'Your current balance is $1,200.00.'

After adding an expense, the user requests a summary of recent transactions for review while organizing their documents, necessitating quick and clear verbal feedback.

Given the user has just added an expense, when they ask 'Can you summarize my recent transactions?', then the system lists the last three transactions with amounts and categories clearly.

User requests confirmation of an action after issuing a voice command to ensure functionality during a busy workday where they may be distracted, aiming for reliable feedback on transaction status.

Given the user has issued a command, when they say 'Did I add that expense?', then the system responds with 'Yes, you have added an expense of $50 for groceries.'

When the user is traveling and connects to the platform via a mobile device, they use voice commands to manage finances hands-free, increasing the need for accurate and timely confirmations.

Given the user is traveling, when they say 'Check my balance', then the system accurately retrieves and states 'Your balance is $800.00.' without delays.

After a user has recorded multiple transactions, they utilize voice commands to receive a summary of their financial activity to understand their spending better.

Given the user has made several entries, when they ask for a summary of expenses, then the system accurately lists the total expenses and provides insights into spending patterns.

Integrative Smart Suggestions

"As a small business owner, I want the system to provide smart suggestions based on my voice commands so that I can make informed financial decisions without having to search manually for insights."

Description

This requirement aims to develop an intelligent suggestion engine that analyzes users' finance-related voice commands and suggests relevant actions or insights based on their previous interactions or financial data. For example, if a user frequently checks certain metrics or enters recurring expenses, the system should proactively suggest related financial actions or trends within the platform. This personalized approach enhances usability by making financial management even more intuitive, allowing users to leverage their commands for insights and actions that align with their financial habits and goals.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a voice command to add a recurring expense for the monthly subscription service.

Given that the user has a recurring expense template set up, when the user says 'Add my monthly subscription expense,' then the expense is added to their financial records with the correct amount and category, and a confirmation message is provided to the user through voice feedback.

User checks their current balance using a voice command while driving.

Given that the user has requested their current balance through voice command, when the user says 'What is my current balance?', then the system accurately reads out the balance within 5 seconds without any errors, ensuring it provides the correct amount and acknowledges the user by name.

User requests smart suggestions based on their recent financial activities via voice command.

Given that the user frequently checks their expenses, when the user says 'What should I review today?', then the system should suggest relevant actions such as reviewing subscriptions or upcoming payment dates, and provide 2-3 actionable insights related to the user's recent activity.

User doesn't use the system for an extended period and triggers a voice command for a summary report.

Given that the user has not interacted with the system for over three weeks, when the user initiates 'Give me a summary of my finances,' then the system provides a concise summary of income, expenses, and significant financial changes since the last interaction, along with any recommended actions to improve financial health.

User attempts to use a voice command in a noisy environment such as a crowded café.

Given that the user is in a noisy environment, when the user initiates a voice command, then the system should accurately recognize the command and execute the request, demonstrating robustness in voice recognition capabilities under challenging conditions.

User requests to check trends in their spending over the past month via voice command.

Given that the user expresses interest in spending trends, when the user says 'Show me my spending trends for last month,' then the system must display a visual representation of spending habits over the past month, along with verbal insights summarizing any patterns or abnormalities detected.

User wants to delete a previously added expense using a voice command after realizing it's incorrect.

Given that the user identifies an incorrect expense entry, when the user says 'Delete my last expense,' then the system must successfully remove the specified expense from the records and confirm the deletion verbally, ensuring the user is informed of the change.

Offline Voice Command Functionality

"As a freelancer who often works in areas with poor internet, I want to be able to use voice commands to manage my finances offline so that I can stay on top of my expenses without a connection."

Description

This requirement entails developing offline capabilities for the voice command integration, allowing users to access key functionalities without needing a continuous internet connection. Users will be able to perform basic operations like checking recent expenses or sending text reminders to themselves regarding financial tasks. This feature addresses usability concerns for users in areas with poor connectivity, ensuring that they can manage their finances effectively at all times, thereby enhancing the platform's reliability and user trust in FundSweep.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses FundSweep on a mobile device in an area with limited internet connectivity.

Given that the user has previously allowed voice command functionality, When they speak a command to check recent expenses, Then the system should respond with the latest expense information within 3 seconds without requiring internet access.

User sends a text reminder regarding a financial task while offline.

Given that the user is offline, When they use a voice command to create a reminder for an upcoming payment, Then the reminder should be successfully stored in the app’s local database and available upon the next online connection.

User attempts to add a new expense using voice commands without internet.

Given the user is in offline mode, When they issue a voice command to add a new expense, Then the system should log the expense locally and confirm successful addition through voice feedback.

User tries to check their financial balance while offline.

Given that the user is using FundSweep without an internet connection, When they query their current balance using voice commands, Then the app should provide the last known balance stored on the device.

User interacts with the voice command feature offline and expects a prompt if functionality is limited.

Given the user speaks a command while offline, When a non-supported function is requested, Then the system should provide a voice feedback indicating the lack of connectivity and the unavailable feature.

User seamlessly transitions from offline to online usage of voice commands.

Given the user is in offline mode, When the app regains internet connectivity, Then any previously recorded voice commands should be uploaded to the server without user intervention.

User verifies the accuracy of stored offline reminders and expenses after going online.

Given that the user has been offline, When they reconnect to the internet, Then all locally stored reminders and expenses should sync correctly with the online platform, maintaining data integrity.

Security for Voice Commands

"As a small business owner, I want to ensure that my voice commands are secure so that I can manage my finances without worrying about unauthorized access to my sensitive information."

Description

This requirement involves implementing security measures to safeguard user data while using voice commands. Given the sensitive nature of financial information, the platform must ensure that voice interactions are encrypted and that user authentication occurs prior to executing commands that affect account settings or financial data. Users should have the option to enable additional layers of security, such as voice biometrics, to further protect their financial activities, ensuring trust and confidence in using voice command features.

Acceptance Criteria

Voice Command to Add Expense with Encryption

Given the user initiates a voice command to add an expense, when the user speaks the command, then the system should ensure the voice input is encrypted before processing the expense addition, and a confirmation message should be provided upon successful addition.

Voice Command for Balance Inquiry with User Authentication

Given the user wants to check their account balance using a voice command, when the user speaks the command, then the system should prompt for user authentication and only reveal the balance after successful authentication.

Enable Voice Biometrics for Enhanced Security

Given the user accesses the voice command feature, when the user opts to enable voice biometrics, then the system should require the user to provide a voice sample for enrollment and confirm that biometric analysis has been activated for future voice commands.

Audit Log for Voice Command Usage

Given the user has performed several voice commands, when the user accesses their account activity, then the system should display an audit log showing timestamps, commands used, and whether authentication was verified for each command.

Voice Command Safety Confirmation for Sensitive Actions

Given the user issues a voice command that affects account settings, when the command is recognized, then the system should conditionally prompt the user with a safety confirmation to prevent unauthorized changes before execution.

System Response to Unrecognized Voice Commands

Given the user attempts to use a non-recognized voice command, when the command is processed, then the system should respond with a clear message indicating the command is not recognized and provide examples of valid commands.

Customizable Widgets

Users can personalize their home screen with widgets that display their most important financial metrics, such as upcoming bills, recent transactions, or progress towards financial goals. This customization enhances user engagement and provides quick access to crucial information they need at their fingertips.

Requirements

Dynamic Widget Configuration

"As a small business owner, I want to customize the widgets on my home screen so that I can see the most important financial information at a glance, enabling me to stay on top of my cash flow and manage my expenses effectively."

Description

This requirement entails the ability for users to dynamically configure and customize their widgets on the FundSweep home screen. Users should have the capability to select which financial metrics they want to display from a variety of options like upcoming bills, recent transactions, or progress towards financial goals. The system should support drag-and-drop functionality for widget arrangement, ensuring a user-friendly experience. Additionally, users should be able to save their configurations, allowing for quick updates and personalizations without the need for complex navigation. This feature is crucial for enhancing user engagement and ensuring that critical financial information is readily accessible, improving the overall usability of the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User Customizes Widget Display for Upcoming Bills

Given the user is logged in and on the home screen, when they access the widget settings, then they should be able to select the 'Upcoming Bills' widget and see it displayed on their home screen with correct data reflecting due dates and amounts.

User Arranges Widgets Using Drag-and-Drop Functionality

Given the user is on the home screen, when they drag the 'Recent Transactions' widget to a different position on the screen and release it, then the widget should move to the new position without losing any displayed information.

User Saves Widget Configuration

Given the user has customized their widgets, when they click the 'Save Configuration' button, then their customized layout should be saved and displayed the next time they log into FundSweep.

User Selects Multiple Financial Metrics for Widgets

Given the user is in the widget customization menu, when they select multiple financial metrics options including 'Financial Goals Progress' and 'Recent Transactions', then these selected metrics should appear as widgets on the home screen simultaneously.

User Accesses Custom Widgets on Mobile and Desktop

Given the user has customized their widgets on the desktop version, when they log into the mobile application, then they should see the same customized widget configuration as on the desktop.

User Receives Error Message for Invalid Widget Setup

Given the user tries to set up a widget that exceeds the maximum number of allowed widgets, when they attempt to save the configuration, then an error message should be displayed indicating the limitation.

User Updates Widget Configuration Without Complex Navigation

Given the user wants to change their widget configuration, when they access the widget settings from the home screen, then they should complete the update within three clicks, maintaining ease of use.

Predefined Widget Templates

"As a freelancer, I want to choose a predefined widget template that fits my business needs so that I can quickly set up my dashboard without spending too much time on customization."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing users with predefined widget templates tailored for various business types or financial needs. These templates would allow users to easily select and implement specific widgets without needing to customize every element. Each template would be designed to highlight the most relevant financial metrics based on common user scenarios such as freelancers, contractors, or small retail businesses. This requirement streamlines the widget setup process, making it quicker for users to configure their dashboards, while ensuring that they still receive valuable insights pertinent to their financial management. By offering these templates, FundSweep will cater to a diverse user base, enhancing engagement and encouraging adoption of the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a predefined widget template for their business type during the initial dashboard setup process.

Given the user is on the dashboard setup page, when they browse the available widget templates, then they should see a list of predefined templates relevant to their selected business type.

User successfully adds a predefined widget template to their home screen.

Given the user has selected a predefined widget template, when they click 'Add to Dashboard', then the selected widget should appear on their home screen with the relevant financial metrics displayed correctly.

User customizes a predefined widget template after adding it to their dashboard.

Given the user has added a predefined widget to their dashboard, when they click 'Edit' on the widget, then they should be able to customize at least one element of the widget, such as the metrics shown or the display format.

User removes a predefined widget template from their dashboard.

Given the user has a predefined widget on their dashboard, when they click the 'Remove' button, then the widget should be successfully removed from the dashboard without affecting other widgets.

User views the metrics displayed by a predefined widget to ensure they are relevant to their financial goals.

Given the user is viewing their dashboard, when they click on a predefined widget, then they should see metrics that are relevant to their defined financial goals and objectives as per the template's design.

User saves their dashboard configuration with the predefined widget templates included.

Given the user has configured their dashboard with predefined widget templates, when they click 'Save Configuration', then their dashboard setup should be saved and recalled correctly on future logins.

User receives a notification when new predefined widget templates are available.

Given the user has used the widget customization feature, when new predefined widget templates are added, then they should receive a notification on their dashboard inviting them to explore the new templates.

Widget Data Refresh and Notifications

"As an independent contractor, I want my widgets to refresh automatically so that I can always see the latest information about my finances, helping me to make timely decisions."

Description

This requirement requires real-time data refresh capabilities for each widget to ensure users always see the latest financial information. It will include notifications for significant changes such as bill due dates, large transactions, or reaching financial goals. Users will have options to customize notification settings for alerts they wish to receive, ensuring they remain informed about critical aspects of their financial health. This feature enhances the user experience by proactively keeping users updated, allowing for timely decisions and actions. Real-time refresh capabilities ensure that users can trust the insights and metrics displayed, thereby promoting better financial management practices.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the FundSweep platform and views their home screen with customizable widgets displaying their financial metrics.

Given the user is logged into the FundSweep account, When the user refreshes the home screen, Then all widgets should display the latest financial data and metrics without any delay.

User has set up notifications for upcoming bill payments on the FundSweep platform.

Given the user has defined notification settings for bill due dates, When a bill is approaching its due date, Then the user should receive a real-time notification alerting them of the upcoming payment.

User interacts with a widget displaying transaction history on their home screen.

Given the user clicks on a transaction widget, When the widget is opened, Then it should display the most recent transactions in chronological order along with relevant details for each transaction.

User customizes notification settings for significant transactions in FundSweep.

Given the user navigates to notification settings, When the user selects to receive alerts for transactions above a specific amount, Then the system should allow saving of these preferences and notify the user accordingly in real-time.

User sets financial goals and monitors their progress through a widget on the home screen.

Given the user has set a financial goal in FundSweep, When the user views the corresponding widget, Then it should display the current progress towards that goal accurately and update in real-time as changes occur.

Widget Size and Display Options

"As a small business owner, I want the ability to adjust the size and layout of my widgets so that I can create a more efficient and personalized dashboard tailored to my workflow."

Description

This requirement allows users to modify the size and display options of the widgets on their dashboard. Users can choose from different sizes for individual widgets (small, medium, large), and these options should resize accordingly based on the device screen. Moreover, users should be able to toggle between list and grid views, enabling them to arrange their dashboard layout how they prefer. This flexibility in design will accommodate various user preferences and device types, contributing to an enhanced user experience. Providing options for widget display will further engage users by allowing them to personalize their workspace according to their unique strategies for viewing their financial information.

Acceptance Criteria

Widget Size Modification Test

Given a user is on the dashboard, when they select a widget and choose a new size (small, medium, large), then the widget should resize to the selected size and maintain its proportions without losing content or functionality.

Toggle Between List and Grid View

Given a user is on the dashboard, when they toggle between list and grid view, then the display of all widgets should reflect the selected view consistently, with proper alignment and spacing.

Responsive Design Check on Mobile Devices

Given a user accesses FundSweep on various mobile devices, when they modify the widget sizes, then the widgets should resize appropriately according to the device screen size while maintaining readability and usability.

Persistence of User Preferences

Given a user has customized their widget sizes and views, when they log out and log back into their account, then the dashboard should display the widgets in the same sizes and views as previously configured by the user.

User Feedback on Widget Configuration

Given a user has made changes to their widget sizes and views, when they save these settings, then the system should provide a confirmation message that the updates were successful and a summary of changes made.

Accessibility Compliance of Widgets

Given a user modifies the widget display options, when the widgets are resized or rearranged, then the new configuration should meet accessibility standards, ensuring compatibility with screen readers and keyboard navigation.

Widget Content Adaptation Test

Given a user changes widget sizes, when the size of a widget is altered, then the content within the widget should automatically adjust (e.g., reducing text size or rearranging elements) to fit within the new dimensions without truncation.

Multi-User Widget Access

"As a partnered business owner, I want to allow my team members to customize the widgets on our shared dashboard so that we can collaboratively monitor our financial performance and goals."

Description

This requirement emphasizes enabling multi-user access to widget customization within shared accounts, such as partnerships or business teams. This includes establishing user roles that determine access permissions for editing widgets and view settings, ensuring organized collaboration in financial management. Admin users should have the ability to lock certain widgets to prevent unauthorized changes, while regular users may have the ability to customize their view without affecting the overall widget setup. This functionality supports collaborative environments and promotes teamwork in financial oversight, making it easier for shared business owners to stay aligned on important financial data and objectives.

Acceptance Criteria

Admin User Customizes Widget for Team Review

Given the admin user is logged into the FundSweep application, When the admin customizes a widget for the team, Then the changes should be reflected in the dashboard view of all associated users without requiring a page refresh.

Regular User Customizes Personal Widget View

Given a regular user is part of a shared account, When the user accesses the widget settings, Then they should have the ability to customize their individual widget view without altering the overall settings of the shared account.

Widget Locking Mechanism Implementation

Given the admin has customized a widget, When the admin activates the lock feature, Then the widget should be uneditable by all users except the admin, and any attempt by regular users to edit it should show a notification indicating insufficient permissions.

Multi-User Role Access Validation

Given multiple user roles are established within the shared account, When a regular user tries to access widget customization settings, Then they should only see options according to their defined role and permissions, with restricted access clearly indicated.

Display of Upcoming Bills Widget

Given the widgets are customizable, When a regular user adds an 'upcoming bills' widget to their dashboard, Then it should update in real-time to reflect any changes to bills and deadlines relevant to the account.

Real-time Synchronization of Widget Changes

Given that a user makes changes to their widget settings, When another user attempts to view the dashboard, Then they should see the updated widgets immediately without the need to refresh their view.

Collaborative Review of Customized Widgets

Given multiple users have customized their respective widgets, When a user reviews the dashboard of a shared account, Then they should see all widgets categorized based on individual user names along with the original admin settings.

Secure Mobile Access

The app features advanced security protocols, including biometric login options such as fingerprint or facial recognition. This ensures that users can confidently access their financial information on the go, knowing that their sensitive data is protected from unauthorized access.

Requirements

Biometric Authentication

"As a small business owner, I want to log into my FundSweep account using my fingerprint so that I can quickly and securely access my financial information without needing to remember and type in a password."

Description

Implement biometric authentication options such as fingerprint and facial recognition for secure mobile access. This feature will enhance user confidence in accessing their financial data on-the-go, providing an added layer of security that protects sensitive information from unauthorized use. Users will benefit from the convenience and speed of biometric login, reducing reliance on conventional passwords while aligning with best practices for secure financial management. The integration of this feature will streamline access to FundSweep's platform while ensuring robust data protection, which is essential for compliance with data security regulations.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the FundSweep app on their mobile device using biometric authentication after ensuring they have registered their fingerprint or facial recognition in the app settings.

Given the user has a registered biometric login When the user opens the FundSweep app and selects the biometric login option Then the user should be granted access to the app within 2 seconds without entering a password.

User attempts to log in using biometric authentication when their registered biometric data is not recognized due to changes (e.g., injury affecting fingerprint or changes in facial features).

Given the user attempts biometric login with unrecognized biometric data When the system fails to authenticate Then the user should be prompted to use an alternative method of login such as email/password with a clear message indicating the biometric failure.

User tries to log in to the app using the biometric authentication feature for the first time after installing the app.

Given the user has installed the app for the first time When the user attempts biometric login Then the app should prompt the user to register their biometric data before they can access the app features.

User's fingerprint or facial recognition data is compromised and they access the settings to revoke the biometric authentication option.

Given the user is logged in When the user navigates to settings and selects 'Manage Biometric Authentication' Then the user should be able to disable biometric login and receive a confirmation message indicating the option has been revoked.

User accesses the FundSweep app after a system update that includes the biometric authentication feature.

Given the user has previously registered for biometric authentication When the user updates the app and opens it Then the biometric authentication feature should remain functional and accessible without requiring the user to re-register.

Multiple users share access to the FundSweep app on different devices with biometric login capabilities.

Given that two different users have registered their biometrics on the same device When the first user uses their biometric credentials to log in Then the second user should not be able to access the app until they use their own registered biometric data to log in.

Two-Factor Authentication (2FA)

"As a freelancer, I want to enable Two-Factor Authentication for my FundSweep account so that I can add an extra layer of security and protect my financial information from potential threats."

Description

Introduce a Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) feature that will require users to verify their identities through an additional step, such as receiving a code via SMS or email, upon logging in. This requirement is crucial for enhancing security by adding another barrier against unauthorized access. It will provide peace of mind for users who manage sensitive financial data, ensuring that even if their credentials are compromised, their accounts remain secure. The 2FA mechanism will be designed to be user-friendly and integrate seamlessly with the existing login process, making it easy for users to enhance the security of their accounts.

Acceptance Criteria

User attempts to log in to the FundSweep application for the first time after enabling Two-Factor Authentication (2FA). They enter their username and password and are prompted to enter a verification code sent to their registered mobile phone.

Given the user has enabled 2FA, when they log in with correct credentials, then they must receive a verification code via SMS or email, and they must enter the correct code to complete the login process.

A user who has already logged in successfully using 2FA tries to log out and then logs back in again with the same credentials.

Given the user is logged out, when they enter their username and password, then they must receive a verification code via SMS or email to re-authenticate and complete their login.

A user enters the wrong verification code within the Two-Factor Authentication process during login.

Given the user attempts to log in and enters an incorrect verification code, when they submit the login attempt, then they should receive an error message indicating the code is invalid and be prompted to request a new code.

An existing user tries to log in after changing their phone number and has not updated their account with the new number for receiving 2FA codes.

Given the user has changed the phone number without updating their account details, when they attempt to log in, then they should receive a notification that the verification code cannot be sent and be directed to update their contact information.

A user chooses the option to receive 2FA codes via their email rather than SMS during the setup process.

Given the user selects email as their preferred method for receiving 2FA codes, when they complete the login process, then they should receive a verification code sent to their registered email address.

A user tries to log in from a new device for the first time with 2FA enabled.

Given the user is logging in from a new device, when they enter their username and password, then they must successfully complete the 2FA verification step to access their account, ensuring enhanced security.

A user attempts to enable Two-Factor Authentication from their account settings but does not have a verified phone number or email.

Given the user is in their account settings and tries to enable 2FA without a verified phone number or email, when they attempt to save the settings, then they must receive an error message prompting them to verify their contact information first.

Real-Time Security Alerts

"As an independent contractor, I want to receive real-time alerts whenever there's a login attempt from a new device so that I can monitor and protect my fund management activities effectively."

Description

Develop a real-time security alert system that notifies users of suspicious activities or logins from unrecognized devices. This feature is designed to proactively inform users of potential threats to their accounts, allowing them to take immediate action if necessary. Users will receive alerts via push notifications or email, ensuring that they are always aware of their account's security status. This capability will enhance the overall trustworthiness of the FundSweep platform, as users will feel more secure knowing they are continuously monitored for unusual activities, thereby fostering engagement and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert on their mobile device when an unrecognized device attempts to log in to their FundSweep account.

Given a user has logged into their account, when an unrecognized device attempts to log in, then the user receives a push notification and an email alerting them of the login attempt.

A user is notified immediately via email if any suspicious activity is detected in their account, such as unusual transactions.

Given a user has set up security alerts, when a transaction is flagged as suspicious, then an email is sent to the user within 5 minutes of detection.

The user can manage their security alert preferences within the application settings.

Given a user is in the security settings of the app, when they modify their alert preferences, then the changes are saved and reflected in their notification settings.

A user can view a history of security alerts within their account dashboard for reference.

Given a user accesses the security alert section of their dashboard, when they view the alerts history, then they should see a chronologically ordered list of all alerts received, with timestamps and details.

Users who have not set up security alerts receive a prompt to enable notifications for suspicious activities upon account login.

Given a user logs into their account without security alerts set up, when they access the dashboard, then a prompt appears encouraging them to enable security alerts.

Session Timeout Management

"As a small business user, I want my FundSweep account to log me out after 10 minutes of inactivity so that I can ensure my financial data is secured if I forget to log out after using a public device."

Description

Establish a session timeout management feature that automatically logs users out after a period of inactivity. This requirement is critical for protecting sensitive financial data, particularly when users access their accounts on public devices or while traveling. By logging users out after a set period, the risk of unauthorized access is reduced, safeguarding their information. Users should also be able to customize the timeout duration in their security settings, providing flexibility while maintaining strong security standards. This feature seamlessly integrates into the existing design, ensuring a user-friendly experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses their FundSweep account on a public device and is logged out automatically after the inactivity period.

Given the user has logged in to their account, When the user is inactive for the specified timeout duration, Then the user is automatically logged out of the account and redirected to the login page.

User modifies the session timeout duration in their security settings within the app.

Given the user is on the security settings page, When the user changes the session timeout duration and saves the settings, Then the new timeout duration should be reflected in the user profile settings, and the user should be logged out based on the updated duration.

User accesses their account repeatedly without activity and confirms they are logged out after the set timeout period.

Given the user has been inactive for the timeout duration and then returns to the app, When the user attempts to access their account, Then they should be prompted to log in again to regain access to their financial information.

User checks the app’s session timeout notification feature before being logged out.

Given the session timeout notification feature is enabled, When the user is approaching the timeout duration, Then a notification alert should appear, warning the user of impending logout, allowing them to reset the session.

User logs in to the FundSweep app from different devices and observes consistent timeout settings across all sessions.

Given the user has set a custom session timeout duration, When the user logs in from multiple devices, Then the session timeout duration should be consistent across all devices, reflecting the user's saved settings.

Secure Data Encryption

"As a user, I want to know that all my financial data on FundSweep is encrypted so that I can confidently use the platform without worrying about data theft."

Description

Implement secure data encryption protocols for all sensitive information stored and transmitted within the FundSweep platform. This requirement is paramount for protecting user data from breaches and ensuring compliance with financial regulations. Data encryption will safeguard user information, providing an additional layer of protection against unauthorized access, while ensuring data integrity during transfers. The encryption methods implemented should align with industry standards, such as AES-256, assuring users their financial data is handled with utmost security. This feature will enhance the credibility of FundSweep as a secure financial management solution.

Acceptance Criteria

Securely accessing FundSweep using mobile app during a travel to review financial data.

Given the user has the FundSweep mobile app installed and their account is active, when the user attempts to log in using biometric authentication (fingerprint or facial recognition), then the user should be granted access to their financial data only after successful authentication.

Sending sensitive financial data while making an invoice through the FundSweep app.

Given the user is creating an invoice that contains sensitive client information, when the user submits the invoice for processing, then the sensitive data must be encrypted using AES-256 standards before transmission.

User repaying a previous invoice using the FundSweep platform.

Given the user initiates a repayment for an invoice, when the user confirms the transaction, then all sensitive payment information must be encrypted both in transit and at rest, ensuring compliance with financial regulations.

User accessing transaction history in FundSweep on a public Wi-Fi network.

Given the user is connected to a public Wi-Fi network, when the user requests their transaction history through the mobile app, then all transmitted data must be encrypted, and the session should utilize secure HTTPS protocol to safeguard data integrity.

An administrator auditing user data access logs in FundSweep.

Given the administrator is reviewing logs of accessed user data, when examining any log entry, then each entry must indicate whether data transmission was encrypted and include details about the encryption method used.

Industry Trends Dashboard

The Industry Trends Dashboard provides users with real-time visuals and analytics on market trends specific to their industry. By accessing up-to-date reports and insights, users can identify emerging trends and make informed business decisions to stay ahead of competitors.

Requirements

Real-Time Data Visualization

"As a small business owner, I want to view real-time market trends so that I can make informed decisions quickly and stay ahead of my competition."

Description

The Industry Trends Dashboard requires real-time data visualization capabilities, enabling users to view up-to-date trends and market insights directly on their dashboards. This function should integrate seamlessly with existing financial data processing, utilizing AI algorithms to analyze incoming data streams and generate accurate, visually appealing charts and graphs. The benefit of this feature is that users will have an immediate understanding of market conditions, allowing them to react promptly to changes. Furthermore, it enhances the overall functionality of FundSweep by providing actionable insights, which is essential for informed decision-making in a rapidly changing market environment.

Acceptance Criteria

Displaying Real-Time Market Trends for Users

Given the user is logged into their FundSweep account, When they navigate to the Industry Trends Dashboard, Then they should see real-time visuals of market trends that automatically update every 5 minutes without needing to refresh the page.

Integration of Financial Data Streams

Given the user has enabled data integration settings, When industry-specific financial data streams are received, Then the Industry Trends Dashboard should automatically update with the latest information reflecting these inputs within 10 seconds.

User Interaction with Visualization Tools

Given the real-time visual data is displayed, When the user hovers over a chart or graph, Then a tooltip should appear providing detailed metrics and insights related to the displayed data.

Accessibility of Insights on Mobile Devices

Given the user accesses the FundSweep platform via a mobile device, When they open the Industry Trends Dashboard, Then all visualizations should be responsive and display correctly on various screen sizes without losing functionality.

Error Handling for Data Visualization

Given a temporary failure in data stream connection, When the Industry Trends Dashboard attempts to refresh the data, Then the user should be presented with an error message and an option to retry the connection without affecting previously displayed data.

AI Algorithm Recommendation System

Given the user views the Industry Trends Dashboard, When the AI algorithms analyze the data trends, Then actionable insights and recommendations should be displayed prominently on the dashboard based on the latest market trends.

Trend Analysis Comparison Functionality

Given the user wants to compare market trends, When they select multiple data points from the dashboard, Then the Industry Trends Dashboard should generate a comparison chart displaying differences and insights between the selected data sets.

Customizable Alerts and Notifications

"As a freelancer, I want to set alerts for specific industry trends so that I can take immediate action when significant changes occur."

Description

This requirement entails implementing customizable alerts and notifications within the Industry Trends Dashboard. Users should have the ability to set thresholds for specific metrics and receive notifications via email or in-app messages when these thresholds are met. The alerts should be configurable, allowing users to prioritize which trends or metrics matter most to them. This feature would empower users to focus on critical data points that impact their business, ensuring they are always informed of significant changes. This functionality adds value by enhancing user engagement and ensuring timely action can be taken based on relevant insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Setting Custom Alerts for Market Trends

Given the user has accessed the Industry Trends Dashboard, When they select the 'Customize Alerts' option, Then they should be able to set thresholds for specific metrics such as 'sales growth', 'new competitors', and 'market demand'.

Receiving Email Notifications

Given the user has configured their alert preferences to include email notifications, When a specified metric threshold is met, Then the user should receive an email notification detailing the trend and its implications.

In-App Notification Display

Given the user has enabled in-app notifications for trend alerts, When a trend reaches the set threshold, Then the user should receive an in-app notification prominently displayed on their dashboard.

Modifying Alert Preferences

Given the user is on the 'Alert Preferences' page, When they choose to edit existing alert settings for a specific metric, Then the updated settings should be saved successfully, and the changes reflected in their notifications.

Prioritizing Important Metrics

Given the user has access to multiple metrics, When they prioritize certain metrics for alerts, Then only the selected priority metrics should trigger notifications when thresholds are met.

Viewing Historical Alert Data

Given the user has received alerts for met thresholds, When they access the 'Alert History' section, Then they should see a log of past notifications with corresponding dates, metrics impacted, and user settings for each alert.

Testing Alert Functionality

Given the development team is implementing the customizable alerts feature, When functional tests are conducted, Then alerts should trigger accurately based on the set thresholds across varying user profiles and metrics.

Comparative Industry Analytics

"As an independent contractor, I want to compare my performance metrics against industry standards so that I can identify areas for improvement and competitive advantage."

Description

The dashboard should include a comparative analytics feature that allows users to benchmark their performance against industry standards and competitors. By integrating with external industry data sources, users will be able to compare revenue growth, customer acquisition rates, and other key performance indicators. This feature is critical as it provides context for users' own data, helping them understand their position in the market landscape. Users can identify strengths and weaknesses more holistically, enabling strategic adjustments to their operations that align with industry best practices, thereby supporting growth and sustained competitiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Industry Trends Dashboard to view the comparative analytics feature and compares their revenue growth against competitors' data.

Given the user is logged into FundSweep and has selected the comparative analytics feature, When they view the revenue growth comparison data, Then it should display accurate, real-time benchmarks against industry standards for the same time period.

User attempts to analyze customer acquisition rates using the comparative analytics feature of the Industry Trends Dashboard.

Given the user selects the customer acquisition rates for their industry, When the system retrieves data from external sources, Then it should show a clear comparison of their customer acquisition rates against the average rates within their industry.

User navigates the Industry Trends Dashboard to find insights on key performance indicators related to their specific market sector.

Given the user selects their market sector, When they view the dashboard, Then it should present a visual representation of their key performance indicators relative to sector averages and top-performing competitors.

User wants to understand how their financial performance compares to that of their competitors in a specific market category.

Given the comparative analytics section is loaded, When the user selects a specific market category, Then it should provide a detailed comparison report including charts and metrics for revenue, growth rate, and other KPIs within that category.

User filters the comparative analytics to view performance metrics from the last fiscal year.

Given the user applies a filter for the last fiscal year, When they refresh the comparative analytics report, Then the dashboard should update to reflect only the relevant metrics and benchmarks in that specific timeframe.

Interactive Trend Analysis Tools

"As a small business owner, I want interactive tools for analyzing trends so that I can explore data insights that specifically relate to my business needs."

Description

The Industry Trends Dashboard must incorporate interactive tools that allow users to manipulate data visualizations to uncover deeper insights. Users should be able to filter, zoom, and drill down into specific data points to explore underlying trends. This requirement is crucial for enabling users to customize their analysis according to their unique needs and business strategies, improving their understanding of complex data sets. It significantly enhances user experience and encourages proactive engagement with the data, enabling users to derive personalized insights and make better-informed decisions based on thorough analyses.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to filter trend data by specific parameters such as date range, region, and product category to analyze performance over time.

Given a user is on the Industry Trends Dashboard, when they apply filters for date range, region, and product category, then the dashboard visualizations should update in real-time to reflect the filtered data.

User needs to zoom into a specific area of a data visualization to examine the trends in more detail.

Given a user is viewing a data visualization on the Industry Trends Dashboard, when they zoom in on a specific area of the visualization, then the dashboard should display a more detailed view of the selected data points without losing context of the overall trend.

User wants to drill down into a specific data point to view the underlying statistics and metrics related to that trend.

Given a user is interacting with a data visualization on the Industry Trends Dashboard, when they click on a data point, then a detailed pop-up should appear showing the underlying metrics and statistics associated with that specific trend.

User seeks to save their customized analysis settings for future reference and continuous monitoring.

Given a user has applied filters and customized their view on the Industry Trends Dashboard, when they click the ‘Save Settings’ button, then the dashboard should save their current settings and allow them to access these saved settings in the future.

User needs to reset their filters and zoom settings to the default view after performing various analyses.

Given a user has manipulated filters and zoom levels on the Industry Trends Dashboard, when they click the ‘Reset’ button, then the dashboard should revert to the default visualizations with no filters applied and the original zoom level.

User wants to view a tutorial on how to effectively use the interactive tools provided in the Industry Trends Dashboard.

Given a new user accesses the Industry Trends Dashboard, when they click on the ‘Help’ button, then a tutorial should be displayed, guiding them through the interactive tools and their functionalities.

Scheduled Reports Generation

"As a busy freelancer, I want to receive scheduled reports on industry trends so that I can stay informed without having to log in daily."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a feature that allows users to schedule automatic generation of reports based on industry trends. Users will have the option to set daily, weekly, or monthly reports that summarize key insights from the dashboard. This capability is essential for users who may not have the time to log in regularly but still need to stay informed about industry changes. By automating report generation, FundSweep not only increases user convenience but also ensures that critical information is delivered consistently, enabling timely strategic planning.

Acceptance Criteria

User schedules a daily report for industry trends at 8 AM.

Given the user is logged in to FundSweep, When the user selects the Industry Trends Dashboard, and chooses the option to schedule a report, Then the system should allow the user to specify daily, weekly, or monthly frequency and should save the report settings accurately in the user's profile.

User receives the scheduled daily report via email.

Given the daily report is scheduled for 8 AM, When the designated time arrives, Then the user should receive an email containing the industry trends report summarizing key insights from the dashboard, ensuring the report is generated and formatted correctly.

User modifies the frequency of the scheduled reports from weekly to monthly.

Given the user accesses the scheduled reports settings, When the user updates the report frequency from weekly to monthly, Then the system should reflect this change and confirm the new schedule back to the user without errors.

User attempts to schedule a report but does not select a frequency.

Given the user initiates the report scheduling process, When the user submits the form without selecting a frequency, Then the system should display an error message prompting the user to select a frequency before proceeding.

User cancels a previously scheduled report.

Given the user has a scheduled report, When the user selects the option to cancel the scheduled report, Then the system should remove the report from the user's schedule and confirm the cancellation.

User views the history of generated reports.

Given the user wants to check their report generation history, When the user accesses the report history section, Then the system should display a list of previously generated reports with dates and frequencies, ensuring all entries are accurate.

Expert Advisor Access

Users have the option to connect with industry experts for one-on-one consultations. This feature provides personalized financial advice tailored to their unique challenges and opportunities, empowering users to implement strategies that enhance their business growth.

Requirements

Expert Advisor Matching

"As a small business owner, I want to be matched with a financial expert who understands my industry and specific challenges so that I can receive tailored advice that enhances my business growth."

Description

This requirement involves developing an intelligent matching algorithm to connect users with financial experts based on their specific needs, industry, and financial challenges. The goal is to provide users with personalized advisor options, enhancing the effectiveness of the consultations. By analyzing user profiles, preferences, and previous consultations, the system aims to recommend suitable experts, facilitating better user experience and outcomes. This feature will be integrated seamlessly into the FundSweep platform, ensuring users can access expert advice easily and efficiently, leading to improved financial decision-making and business growth.

Acceptance Criteria

User seamlessly initiates a consultation request with an expert advisor through the FundSweep platform.

Given the user has completed their profile with relevant industry and financial needs, When they select the 'Consult an Expert' option, Then the system matches them with at least three suitable advisors based on their profile information and displays their details on the screen.

User receives personalized advisor recommendations that are relevant to their financial challenges.

Given that the user is seeking advice on expense management, When the system analyzes their profile and past consultation data, Then it displays a list of recommended financial advisors who specialize in expense management with a confidence score indicating the match quality.

User interacts with the matching algorithm and expects to filter advisor results based on specific criteria.

Given the user is viewing the list of recommended advisors, When they apply filters such as expertise, availability, and user ratings, Then the system updates the displayed advisor list to reflect the filtering criteria applied.

System tracks and learns from user feedback after consultations with advisors.

Given a consultation has concluded, When the user submits feedback on the advisor's performance, Then the system records this feedback and updates the advisor's profile to improve future matching accuracy.

Users can view detailed profiles of matched advisors to make informed selections.

Given the user has a list of matched advisors, When they click on an advisor's profile, Then the system shows the advisor's credentials, user ratings, areas of expertise, and a summary of past consultations and feedback.

Users can successfully schedule a consultation with a matched advisor from their recommendations list.

Given the user has selected a matched advisor, When they click the 'Schedule Consultation' button, Then the system allows them to select a preferred date and time, sends a notification to the advisor, and confirms the appointment with the user via email.

Consultation Scheduling

"As a freelancer, I want to easily schedule consultations with financial experts at times that fit my availability so that I can receive advice without interrupting my work."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a user-friendly interface for scheduling consultations with financial experts. Users should be able to see available time slots, book appointments, and receive reminders about their consultations. The feature should integrate with third-party calendar services to allow users to sync appointments and avoid scheduling conflicts. This capability is essential to ensure that users can easily connect with advisors without the hassle of back-and-forth communication, thereby increasing user engagement and satisfaction with the service.

Acceptance Criteria

User views available time slots for consultation with an expert.

Given the user is logged into their account, when they navigate to the consultation scheduling page, then they should see a list of available time slots for the selected expert that are free for booking.

User successfully books an appointment with a financial expert.

Given the user has selected a time slot, when they submit their booking request, then they should receive a confirmation message and see their appointment listed in their dashboard.

User receives reminders for upcoming consultations.

Given the user has a confirmed appointment, when the appointment is within 24 hours, then the user should receive an email and a push notification reminder about the upcoming consultation.

User integrates their consultation appointments with a third-party calendar.

Given the user has linked their third-party calendar, when they book an appointment, then the appointment should automatically sync and appear in their external calendar (Google Calendar, iCal, etc.).

User attempts to book a time slot that is no longer available.

Given the user selects a time slot that has just been taken by another user, when they attempt to confirm the booking, then they should receive an error message stating that the selected time is no longer available and be prompted to choose another time.

User cancels a booked consultation appointment.

Given the user has a confirmed appointment, when they click the cancel button, then they should receive confirmation that the appointment has been canceled and it should no longer appear in the user's dashboard.

Expert Feedback & Ratings System

"As a user, I want to be able to rate and review my consultation experience with financial experts so that I can share helpful feedback with others and improve the quality of service offered."

Description

Develop a feedback and rating system for users to evaluate their consultation experience with financial experts. This will include a simple interface for users to provide post-consultation reviews and rate experts based on their expertise, communication, and overall satisfaction. Implementation of this feature will not only help future users to choose the right advisor based on peer feedback but will also encourage experts to improve their services, creating a better ecosystem within the FundSweep platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User submits feedback and ratings after a consultation with an expert regarding financial strategies to improve their business.

Given a user has completed a consultation with a financial expert, when they access the feedback section, then they should be able to submit a rating from 1 to 5 stars and provide a written review.

User views feedback for experts they are considering for consultations.

Given a user is browsing available experts, when they click on an expert profile, then they should see an average rating and a list of 3 most recent reviews from other users.

An expert receives notifications of new ratings and reviews submitted by users.

Given an expert has completed consultations, when a user submits feedback, then the expert should receive a notification of the new review along with the rating.

Users can filter experts based on average ratings and reviews prior to booking a consultation.

Given a user is searching for experts, when they apply a filter for ratings, then only experts with ratings above a certain threshold (e.g., 4 stars) should be displayed.

Expert responses to user reviews are visible to future users.

Given an expert has received reviews, when a user views the expert's profile, then they should see any responses made by the expert to user reviews for transparency and engagement.

Users can edit their feedback within a week of submission.

Given a user has submitted a rating and review, when they access their previous feedback within 7 days, then they should have the option to edit their review or rating.

Feedback and ratings from users are aggregated into a summary for each expert.

Given an expert has multiple reviews, when a user views the expert's profile, then they should see a summary that includes total reviews, average rating, and common keywords from user comments.

Secure Messaging Platform

"As a business owner, I want to securely message my financial advisor so that I can ask questions and clarify my needs before our consultation."

Description

This requirement involves creating a secure messaging platform allowing users to communicate directly with financial experts before and after consultations. The messaging feature must ensure that all exchanges are secure, private, and compliant with data protection regulations. This capability enhances user engagement and ensures that users can clarify issues or ask questions related to their consultations, fostering a more comprehensive and personalized advisory experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a secure messaging session with a financial expert after scheduling a consultation to discuss business growth strategies.

Given that the user has scheduled a consultation, when they send a message to the expert, then the message should be encrypted and securely stored until the expert reads it.

During a consultation, a user wants to ask a follow-up question via the secure messaging platform.

Given that the user is in an active consultation, when they send a follow-up message, then they should receive a confirmation that their message was delivered securely to the expert.

A user wants to review past messages with their financial expert for reference after a consultation.

Given that the user accesses their messaging history, when they select a previous conversation, then they should be able to view the entire message thread without any security warnings.

A user is concerned about data privacy and wants to confirm that their messages are compliant with data protection regulations.

Given that the user accesses the messaging feature, when they review the privacy policy, then it should clearly state encryption protocols and compliance with relevant data protection regulations.

A user attempts to initiate a messaging session outside of business hours and needs to understand the availability of the expert.

Given that the user is trying to message an expert outside of designated hours, when they attempt to send a message, then they should receive an automated response indicating the expert's availability.

A user needs to ensure that sensitive information shared via the messaging feature is secure and private.

Given that the user is typing a message containing sensitive information, when they send the message, then it should undergo automatic content scanning for sensitive data before encryption.

An expert wants to provide additional resources to a user after a consultation via the secure messaging platform.

Given that the expert wants to send a resource link to the user, when they attach a document in the messaging session, then the document should be successfully sent and accessible to the user directly within the secure chat.

Expert Profile Management

"As a financial expert, I want to manage my profile on the platform so that potential clients can see my qualifications and expert areas to match me with appropriate users."

Description

Develop an expert profile management feature where financial advisors can create and update their profiles, highlighting their expertise, areas of specialization, availability, and user ratings. This feature encourages advisors to present themselves effectively, making it easier for users to choose the right expert for their needs. The profiles should be visually appealing, informative, and allow for easy updates to keep information current, thereby improving the overall professionalism of the advisory service offered on the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

Expert Profile Creation and Initial Setup

Given a financial advisor user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they access the expert profile management feature, then they are able to create a new profile by entering personal information, expertise, and availability, which is then saved successfully in the system.

Expert Profile Update Functionality

Given an expert's profile exists in the system, when the expert logs in and selects the edit option, then they can update any field within their profile, and the changes reflect immediately after saving.

Profile Visual Appeal and Usability

Given a completed expert profile, when a user views the profile, then they should see a visually appealing layout that includes a professional photo, clear sections for expertise, ratings, and contact information, ensuring an easy-to-read format.

User Ratings and Feedback System

Given a completed expert profile, when a user has a consultation with the expert, then they should be able to leave a rating and feedback that updates the expert's profile with an average rating and visible comments immediately post-submission.

Expert Availability Display

Given an expert profile is created, when a user views the profile, then the expert's availability should be clearly displayed in the format of a calendar or timeslot options indicating when the expert is available for consultations.

Invalid Profile Information Handling

Given an expert is attempting to create or update their profile, when they input invalid information (such as invalid email format or empty required fields), then the system should display appropriate error messages to guide the correction of these inputs.

Multi-Currency Support Display in Profile

Given a financial advisor indicates specialization in multiple currencies, when a user views the expert's profile, then the profile should accurately display the currencies the expert can give advice on, ensuring clarity for users with various financial needs.

Benchmarking Reports

The Benchmarking Reports feature allows users to compare their financial performance against industry standards and competitors. By highlighting strengths and areas for improvement, this feature helps users identify opportunities to optimize their operations and drive profitability.

Requirements

Industry Standards Data Integration

"As a small business owner, I want to access industry standards data so that I can accurately benchmark my financial performance against peers and identify areas where I can improve my operations."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating a comprehensive database of industry standards and performance metrics into the FundSweep platform. Essential for the Benchmarking Reports feature, this integration will allow users to compare their financial performance against relevant benchmarks in their industry. The data should be updated regularly to ensure accuracy and relevance. This functionality will enhance user insights, making it easier for small business owners to identify strengths and weaknesses in their financial management, ultimately driving informed decision-making and strategic adjustments to improve profitability.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Industry Standards Data into FundSweep Dashboard

Given that the database of industry standards is integrated, when the user accesses the Benchmarking Reports feature, then the reports should display relevant industry benchmarks and performance metrics for the user's sector.

Real-Time Updates of Industry Standards Data

Given that the industry standards data integration is live, when there are changes to industry benchmarks, then the data in FundSweep should update in real time without user intervention.

User Engagement with Benchmarking Reports

Given that benchmarks are displayed in the Benchmarking Reports, when a user reviews their financial performance against the benchmarks, then they should be able to identify at least three strengths and areas for improvement based on the report's insights.

User Notification of Data Updates

Given that the industry standards data is updated, when changes occur, then the user should receive an automated notification via email or in-app alert, informing them of the updates and their implications.

Comparison Across Multiple Industries

Given that the user can select different industries, when accessing the Benchmarking Reports, then the user should be able to compare their performance against multiple industry standard datasets seamlessly.

User Friendly Interface for Benchmarking Reports

Given that the user is accessing the Benchmarking Reports feature, when they view the reports, then the interface should allow for easy navigation, with intuitive controls for filtering and sorting data by relevant metrics.

Feedback Mechanism for Industry Standards Data Accuracy

Given that the user can access industry standards, when they notice discrepancies in the data, then there should be a feedback form available for them to report these issues directly to the FundSweep support team.

Customizable Reporting Templates

"As a freelancer, I want to customize my benchmarking reports with the metrics that are most relevant to my work so that I can gain meaningful insights and make better financial decisions."

Description

This requirement involves creating customizable reporting templates that allow users to personalize their Benchmarking Reports according to their specific needs and preferences. Users will be able to select metrics and visualizations that are most relevant to their business, ensuring that the reports provide actionable insights tailored to their financial management objectives. This flexibility will enhance the user experience and enable businesses to focus on the performance indicators that matter most to them, facilitating more effective financial planning and strategy development.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects specific metrics and visualizations for their Benchmarking Report.

Given the user is on the Customizable Reporting Templates page, when they select at least three different metrics and two different visualizations, then the selected options should be saved and reflected in the Preview section of the report.

User saves a customized reporting template for future use.

Given the user has customized their report with selected metrics and visualizations, when they click the 'Save Template' button, then the system should save the template with a user-defined name and confirm the saving action with a success message.

User generates a Benchmarking Report using a saved customizable template.

Given the user has at least one saved reporting template, when they select a template and click 'Generate Report', then the system should create the report according to the selected metrics and visualizations from the chosen template without errors.

User edits an existing customizable reporting template.

Given the user is on the list of existing templates, when they select a template to edit, modify at least one metric or visualization, and save the changes, then the updated template must reflect the changes immediately upon re-selection.

User deletes a customizable reporting template.

Given the user has navigated to the list of customizable reporting templates, when they select a template and click 'Delete', then the system should prompt for confirmation and upon confirming, the template should be permanently removed from the user's list with a success message displayed.

Automated Insights Generation

"As an independent contractor, I want to receive automated insights from my benchmarking reports so that I can quickly understand what improvements I should make to increase my profitability."

Description

This requirement involves implementing a feature that automatically generates insights and recommendations based on the data analyzed in the Benchmarking Reports. By utilizing AI and machine learning, the system will identify trends, anomalies, and potential operational improvements, providing users with valuable guidance on how to optimize their financial practices. This feature aims to deliver proactive suggestions that can help users enhance their strategies, ensuring they are making data-driven decisions that can positively impact their bottom line.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Benchmarking Reports feature on the FundSweep platform to analyze their financial performance.

Given the user is logged into their FundSweep account, when they navigate to the Benchmarking Reports section, then they should see a generated report comparing their financial data against industry benchmarks and competitors.

User reviews the automated insights generated from the Benchmarking Reports after clicking the 'Generate Insights' button.

Given the user has an up-to-date Benchmarking Report, when they click 'Generate Insights', then the system should provide at least three actionable insights based on the submitted data.

User receives notifications about new insights generated by the Automated Insights Generation feature.

Given the user has opted in for notifications, when new insights are generated based on their data, then the user should receive a real-time notification through the app and an email summarizing the insights and recommendations.

User examines the clarity and relevance of the insights provided by the Automated Insights Generation feature.

Given the insights have been generated, when the user reviews them, then at least 80% of the insights should be rated as relevant and actionable in a user feedback survey.

User requests to view historical insights generated in previous Benchmarking Reports.

Given the user has previously generated insights, when they navigate to the insights history section, then they should be able to see a list of past insights along with the corresponding Benchmarking Reports' dates.

User attempts to implement a recommendation provided by the Automated Insights Generation feature.

Given the user selects a specific recommendation, when they apply the suggested changes in their financial practices, then the system should prompt them to confirm these changes and track their impact on future reports.

User assesses the impact of the implemented recommendations on their financial performance over a quarter.

Given the user has implemented recommendations from the insights, when they generate a new Benchmarking Report after three months, then the system should show a measurable improvement in the relevant financial metrics compared to previous reports.

Interactive Visualization Tools

"As a small business owner, I want to use interactive visualization tools in my benchmarking reports so that I can easily compare my financial performance with industry metrics and quickly identify areas for improvement."

Description

This requirement is centered around developing interactive visualization tools within the Benchmarking Reports feature. Users should be able to graphically display their financial data alongside industry benchmarks, allowing for intuitive comparisons and better understanding of their performance relative to peers. Features such as drag-and-drop chart creation, real-time data updates, and customizable views will enhance the analytical capabilities of the reports, making it easier for users to identify trends and make informed financial decisions.

Acceptance Criteria

User Interaction with Drag-and-Drop Features

Given a user is logged into FundSweep, when they access the Benchmarking Reports feature and utilize the drag-and-drop functionality to create a custom chart, then the chart should be successfully created and displayed with the selected data points.

Real-Time Data Synchronization

Given the user is viewing a Benchmarking Report, when the financial data is updated from the user's account, then the report should automatically refresh and display the latest data without requiring a page refresh.

Customizable Visualization Settings

Given a user has created a chart in the Benchmarking Reports feature, when they modify the visualization settings such as chart type, color scheme, and date range, then the chart should update accordingly to reflect these new settings without errors.

Comparison Against Industry Standards

Given a user accesses the Benchmarking Reports feature, when they select a specific financial metric for comparison, then the tool should display their performance against industry benchmarks and competitors, highlighting gaps and providing actionable insights.

Accessibility of Export Features

Given a user has generated a Benchmarking Report with interactive visualizations, when they choose to export the report as a PDF or CSV, then the exported file should accurately reflect the report’s content, including all visual components.

Mobile Responsiveness of Interactive Tools

Given the user is accessing the FundSweep platform on a mobile device, when they navigate to the Benchmarking Reports feature, then the interactive visualization tools should be fully functional and visually coherent across different screen sizes.

User Feedback Mechanism

Given a user is using the Benchmarking Reports interactive visualization tools, when they submit feedback regarding the usability of the feature, then the feedback should be successfully recorded and a confirmation message displayed to the user.

Export and Share Functionality

"As a business owner, I want to export my benchmarking reports in multiple formats so that I can share them with my financial advisor and discuss strategies for growth effectively."

Description

This requirement entails developing functionality that allows users to easily export their Benchmarking Reports in various formats (such as PDF, Excel, and CSV) and share them with stakeholders, advisors, or team members. This feature is important for facilitating collaboration and communication about financial performance and strategies within and outside of the organization. By enabling users to share key insights effortlessly, this will enhance the collaborative aspects of financial management and foster a culture of data-driven discussions.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates the export of a Benchmarking Report after reviewing their financial performance metrics on the dashboard.

Given the user has completed their Benchmarking Report, when they click on the 'Export' button, then they should be presented with format options (PDF, Excel, CSV) for exporting the report.

A user exports their Benchmarking Report in PDF format to share with a financial advisor.

Given the user selects PDF as the export format, when they confirm the export, then the system should generate a downloadable PDF file containing the Benchmarking Report, and a success message should be displayed.

A user wants to share their exported Benchmarking Report via email using the share functionality.

Given the user has successfully exported their Benchmarking Report, when they choose the 'Share' option and input email addresses, then the system should send the report as an attachment to the specified email addresses with a confirmation message.

A user needs to export a Benchmarking Report in Excel format for further analysis.

Given the user's Benchmarking Report is ready, when they select the Excel export option and click 'Export', then the system should generate an Excel file with all relevant financial data and allow the user to download it.

A user encounters an error while attempting to export the Benchmarking Report.

Given the user clicks on the export option, when there is a system error occurring during the export process, then an error message should be displayed informing the user of the issue and suggesting corrective actions.

A user wants to verify the accuracy of the information exported in the Benchmarking Report.

Given the user has exported the Benchmarking Report, when they open the exported file, then the data should match the figures displayed on the FundSweep platform prior to export with no discrepancies noted.

Multiple users collaborate on the same Benchmarking Report to ensure comprehensive feedback and analysis.

Given several users have access to a shared Benchmarking Report, when one user exports and shares the report, then all users should have access to the same version of the report and be able to provide feedback before final export.

Custom Analytics Tools

Custom Analytics Tools let users create personalized reports and dashboards based on their specific metrics and KPIs. By tailoring the analytics to their unique business needs, users can focus on the most relevant data, enhancing their decision-making and strategic planning.

Requirements

Dynamic Report Creator

"As a small business owner, I want to create custom reports based on my specific metrics and KPIs so that I can gain insights that are relevant to my decisions and strategies."

Description

The Dynamic Report Creator allows users to build custom reports by selecting specific metrics, dimensions, and visualizations that align with their business objectives. Users can filter, sort, and aggregate data to create tailored reports that highlight key performance indicators (KPIs) relevant to their operations. This functionality is integrated with the existing data management system within FundSweep, enabling seamless access to real-time financial data. The benefits include improved decision-making, as users can focus on data that matters most to them, and enhanced strategic planning capabilities. It empowers users to derive insights that align with their unique business needs, ultimately contributing to better financial management and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to create a report that shows my revenue, expenses, and profit margins over the past six months, so I can analyze my financial performance accordingly.

Given I am on the Dynamic Report Creator page, when I select the metrics 'Revenue', 'Expenses', and 'Profit Margins' and set the date range to the last six months, then I should see a report generated with accurate calculations and visual representations for those metrics.

As a freelancer, I need to filter my report by specific client names to assess how much revenue and expenses are associated with each client, so I can make informed decisions on future projects.

Given I am in the Dynamic Report Creator, when I select the metric 'Total Expenses' and 'Total Income' and apply a filter to include only the clients 'Client A' and 'Client B', then the report should display the expenses and income associated with those clients accurately.

As an independent contractor, I want to save my custom reports for future reference, so I can easily access my analytics without needing to recreate them each time.

Given I have customized a report in the Dynamic Report Creator, when I click the 'Save Report' button and provide a name for the report, then the report should be saved successfully and accessible from my reports dashboard.

As a business analyst, I want to compare different time periods in my financial reports, so I can identify trends and performance changes.

Given I have selected the metric 'Monthly Revenue', when I choose to compare the current month with the same month from the previous year, then the report should display a side-by-side comparison showing both figures and percentage change clearly.

As a small business owner, I want to visualize my data using different chart types in my reports, so I can select the most effective representation of my financial data.

Given I am in the Dynamic Report Creator and have selected my metrics, when I change the visualization type from 'Bar Chart' to 'Line Chart', then the report should update and reflect the selected visualization type accurately.

As a user, I need to export my custom reports in PDF format for sharing with my stakeholders, so I can present my findings professionally.

Given I have generated a report in the Dynamic Report Creator, when I click on the 'Export as PDF' option, then the system should generate a PDF file that includes all visuals and data points from my report without loss of information.

Interactive Dashboard Designer

"As a freelancer, I want to design my dashboard to highlight the financial metrics that matter most to me, so that I can monitor my performance at a glance."

Description

The Interactive Dashboard Designer provides users the ability to customize their dashboards by dragging and dropping widgets that represent different financial metrics, graphs, or data visualizations. Users can personalize the layout and select from various display options to create a dashboard that provides an at-a-glance view of their most important financial data. This feature enhances user engagement and improves information accessibility, allowing users to quickly evaluate their financial health. It integrates seamlessly with other modules in FundSweep, ensuring that users can leverage real-time data while creating their visuals. The outcome is a more intuitive user experience that aligns with individual preferences and workflows, fostering better financial oversight.

Acceptance Criteria

User customizes their dashboard by selecting specific financial metrics they want to track, such as revenue, expenses, and profit margin, and arranges them in a layout that reflects their workflow.

Given a user is logged into the FundSweep platform, when they access the Interactive Dashboard Designer, then they can successfully drag and drop at least three different widgets representing financial metrics onto their dashboard and arrange them according to their preference.

A user saves their customized dashboard layout after making changes to the arrangement and selection of widgets.

Given a user has customized their dashboard, when they click the 'Save' button, then the layout and widget selections are stored and persist after the user logs out and back in.

A user switches between different predefined dashboard templates to assess which one best suits their needs for visualizing financial data.

Given a user is in the Interactive Dashboard Designer, when they select a predefined template from the template library, then the dashboard updates to reflect the selected template’s layout and default widgets without losing existing customizations.

A user wants to delete a widget they previously added to their dashboard to streamline their view.

Given a user has added widgets to their dashboard, when they click on the 'Delete' icon for a specific widget, then the widget is removed from the dashboard without affecting other widgets.

A user is viewing their dashboard and wishes to update the data displayed in real-time to reflect current metrics.

Given a user is viewing their customized dashboard, when they enable the real-time data synchronization setting, then all metrics displayed on the dashboard update automatically every minute without requiring a page refresh.

A user accesses the dashboard on a mobile device and verifies that the dashboard adapts well to different screen sizes.

Given a user accesses their dashboard from a mobile device, when they view the Interactive Dashboard Designer, then the layout and widgets adjust responsively to fit the mobile screen while retaining functionality.

A user seeks assistance in using the Interactive Dashboard Designer to ensure optimal usability.

Given a user is on the Interactive Dashboard Designer page, when they click on the 'Help' icon, then they receive detailed instructions and tips for customizing their dashboard effectively within a pop-up help window.

Automated Report Scheduling

"As an independent contractor, I want to automatically receive customized financial reports at scheduled intervals so that I can stay updated without having to manually generate them."

Description

The Automated Report Scheduling feature allows users to set up periodic delivery of customized reports via email or in-app notifications. Users can select the frequency of report generation (daily, weekly, or monthly) and specify the metrics they wish to include, which helps in keeping stakeholders informed on important financial trends without needing manual intervention. This feature promotes efficiency by saving users time and ensuring they remain aligned with their financial objectives through timely data distribution. Integration with the existing notification system in FundSweep allows users to maintain consistency in communications and data updates. Expected outcomes include improved communication with team members and a stable flow of information facilitating proactive financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User schedules a weekly automated report for sales performance metrics.

Given the user has selected 'weekly' as the frequency, when they include metrics for 'sales performance' and submit the schedule, then the system should send an email with the report every week at the specified time.

User selects daily report scheduling for expense tracking.

Given the user chooses 'daily' for expense tracking reports, when they save the settings, then the system should successfully store the preferences and generate the report every day at the set time.

User wants to customize the metrics included in their reports.

Given the user is in the report scheduling section, when they select specific metrics they wish to include in their automated report, then the system should confirm the selection and incorporate those metrics in the generated report.

User needs confirmation of successfully scheduled reports.

Given that a user has set up an automated report schedule, when the schedule is created, then the system should display a confirmation message and send a notification to the user confirming the details.

User accesses past automated reports.

Given that automated reports have been previously scheduled, when the user navigates to the reports section, then they should see a list of all past reports available for download.

User wishes to edit an existing report schedule.

Given the user chooses an existing report schedule to edit, when they make the modifications and save the changes, then the system should successfully update the report scheduling parameters without errors.

User identifies a need for integration with the notification system.

Given the automated report scheduling relies on existing notification settings, when the user is configuring their report preferences, then the system should ensure it utilizes the pre-defined notification channels (email or in-app) without requiring additional setup.

Data Visualization Options

"As a small business owner, I want to use different types of visualizations in my custom reports so that I can better understand the financial data and present it to my stakeholders effectively."

Description

The Data Visualization Options feature offers a variety of chart types (bar, line, pie charts, etc.) and advanced visual representation techniques (heat maps, scatter plots) to help users illustrate their data more effectively. Users can customize colors, labels, and legends to ensure that the visualizations align with their brand or personal preferences. This enhances the interpretability of the data, making it easier for users to analyze trends and anomalies directly from the visuals. Integration with analytics tools within FundSweep allows for dynamic updating of visualizations based on real-time data changes. The outcome is an enriched user experience that transforms complex data into understandable formats, aiding in strategic financial decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a bar chart to visualize monthly expenses over a six-month period to analyze spending patterns.

Given a user selects the bar chart option, when they input their monthly expense data and choose the timeline, then a bar chart is generated displaying the data accurately with labels and legends as specified.

A user customizes a pie chart to represent the distribution of income sources, selecting specific colors and labels to match their branding.

Given a user selects the pie chart option and inputs their income data, when they customize the colors and labels, then the pie chart reflects those customizations accurately and can be saved for future use.

A user wants to create a heat map to visualize sales performance across different regions, using real-time data.

Given the user selects the heat map option, when they connect to their real-time sales data source, then the heat map is generated displaying the sales performance accurately, with regions highlighted according to sales volume.

A user analyzes trends by generating a line graph that tracks client acquisition over the past year.

Given a user selects the line graph option, when they input their client acquisition data for the past year, then the line graph displays the data accurately with clear labeling of the x-axis and y-axis.

A user reviews a scatter plot to identify correlations between marketing spend and revenue growth.

Given the user selects the scatter plot option, when they input their marketing spend and revenue growth data, then the scatter plot displays the data points accurately, allowing the user to visually assess correlation.

A user needs to create a customizable dashboard that features their selected visualizations for quick insights into financial health.

Given a user creates a new dashboard, when they drag and drop visualizations into the dashboard, then the dashboard saves and displays all selected visualizations correctly upon refresh.

KPI Tracking Alerts

"As a freelancer, I want to receive alerts when my financial KPIs hit critical values so that I can take timely action to stay on track with my business goals."

Description

The KPI Tracking Alerts feature enables users to set up alerts based on specific KPI thresholds they establish within the system. Users will receive notifications when their KPIs reach critical levels, whether that involves revenue targets, expense limits, or cash flow needs. This proactive feature enhances financial management by ensuring that users can swiftly respond to emerging trends or risks before they escalate. Integration with the notification system ensures that alerts are delivered through preferred channels, whether it be email or in-app notifications, providing timely insights into their financial performance. The result is heightened responsiveness and the ability to implement corrective actions necessary to maintain financial health.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up a KPI tracking alert for revenue thresholds that triggers when revenue drops below a specified amount.

Given the user has set a revenue threshold of $10,000, When their revenue falls below $10,000, Then the user receives an email notification immediately.

A user establishes an alert for expense limits to monitor spending against a budget.

Given the user has a budget set at $5,000 for monthly expenses, When their spending exceeds $5,000, Then the system sends an in-app notification to the user.

The user customizes the alert method for KPI notifications in their account settings.

Given the user prefers email notifications, When they save their notification preferences, Then all future KPI alerts are sent to the provided email address.

User receives alerts through multiple channels based on their preferences.

Given the user has enabled both email and SMS notifications for alerts, When a KPI threshold is reached, Then the user receives notifications through both channels simultaneously.

User updates an existing KPI tracking alert threshold after reviewing their financial performance.

Given the user has an existing alert for cash flow set at $15,000, When they update the threshold to $20,000, Then the system confirms the update and future alerts trigger only at the new threshold.

User views a history of KPI alert notifications for tracking performance over time.

Given the user accesses the KPI alert history, When they view past notifications, Then all previous alerts are displayed with timestamps and details of the threshold crossed.

An alert is triggered during non-business hours and still reaches the user.

Given the user prefers to receive alerts even after business hours, When a KPI condition is met during non-business hours, Then the notification is sent to the user without delay.

Performance Insights

Performance Insights delivers deep dives into users' historical financial data, offering actionable recommendations for improvement. By analyzing past performance trends, this feature helps users adjust their strategies and optimize their financial management for better outcomes.

Requirements

Data Visualization Dashboard

"As a small business owner, I want a dashboard that visualizes my financial data so that I can quickly understand my performance trends and make better decisions based on clear insights."

Description

The Data Visualization Dashboard requirement involves developing a user-friendly interface that displays key financial metrics through graphs, charts, and interactive elements. This feature aims to make complex financial data more accessible and understandable for users, enabling them to visualize trends, patterns, and anomalies in their historical financial performance. By integrating seamlessly with existing data sources, the dashboard will provide real-time updates and allow users to customize views to focus on specific financial aspects. This functionality will enhance users' ability to make informed decisions based on clear insights, ultimately improving their financial management strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

As a small business owner, I want to view my financial performance over the last six months to identify trends so that I can adjust my spending habits accordingly.

Given that I have logged into the FundSweep platform, when I navigate to the Data Visualization Dashboard, then I should see a visual representation of my financial performance over the last six months, including expenses, income, and profit margins displayed in charts and graphs.

As a freelance contractor, I want to customize the views on my Data Visualization Dashboard to focus only on my income streams so that I can understand which services are generating the most revenue.

Given that I am on the Data Visualization Dashboard, when I select the income streams filter, then I should see only the charts and metrics related to my income displayed, and all other financial data should be hidden.

As an independent contractor, I want the Data Visualization Dashboard to provide real-time updates on my financial metrics so that I can track my financial health without lag.

Given that my financial data sources are connected to the FundSweep platform, when I refresh the Data Visualization Dashboard, then I should see the latest financial data reflected in the visualizations, with no more than a 5-minute delay in updates.

As a small business owner, I need to easily identify any anomalies in my financial performance in the Data Visualization Dashboard so that I can take immediate action if necessary.

Given that I am viewing the Data Visualization Dashboard, when there is a significant drop in income or an increase in expenses, then the dashboard should highlight these metrics visually with alerts or color changes to draw my attention.

As a user of FundSweep, I want to export the visualized financial data from the Data Visualization Dashboard so that I can share insights with my accountant.

Given that I am on the Data Visualization Dashboard, when I choose the export option, then I should be able to download a report containing the selected financial metrics in a CSV or PDF format without losing data fidelity.

As a product manager, I want the Data Visualization Dashboard to be user-friendly so that all users, regardless of their financial expertise, can navigate and understand their data.

Given that a new user is accessing the Data Visualization Dashboard for the first time, when they explore the interface, then they should be able to find help documentation and tooltips that explain how to use the dashboard effectively without needing prior training.

Automated Performance Alerts

"As a freelancer, I want to receive alerts when my expenses exceed a certain threshold so that I can manage my budget proactively and avoid overspending."

Description

The Automated Performance Alerts requirement involves creating a notification system that automatically alerts users when significant financial thresholds or performance indicators are met or exceeded. This feature is designed to proactively inform users about potential financial issues or noteworthy achievements, such as reaching a new revenue milestone or incurring unusually high expenses. By leveraging machine learning algorithms to analyze historical data, the alert system will provide personalized, relevant insights to users, enabling them to respond swiftly to financial changes. This functionality is critical for empowering users to stay on top of their financial health in real-time.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an automatic alert when their monthly expenses exceed the predetermined budget threshold.

Given the user has set a budget for monthly expenses, When the total monthly expenses exceed that budget, Then the user receives an immediate notification via email and in-app alert regarding the overspending.

User is notified when reaching a new revenue milestone based on their historical financial data.

Given the user has defined revenue milestones, When the user’s monthly revenue surpasses a defined milestone, Then the user receives a notification indicating the new revenue milestone they have achieved.

User receives alerts for unusually high expenses compared to historical data.

Given the user’s historical expense data, When an individual expense is significantly higher than the average of the past six months, Then the user is notified about this unusual expense with recommendations on reviewing it.

User is informed when cash flow is forecasted to drop below a certain level based on predictive analytics.

Given the user's cash flow forecast analysis, When the system predicts a cash flow drop below a user-defined threshold, Then the user receives a proactive notification advising them of potential cash flow issues along with suggested actions.

User opts in to receive notifications for financial performance reviews at the end of each month.

Given the user has opted into financial performance alerts, When the last day of the month occurs, Then the user receives a summary report notification of their financial performance for that month.

A user can disable specific performance alerts in their notification settings.

Given the user is in the notification settings section, When the user disables a specific performance alert type, Then the system should confirm the alert has been disabled and the user should not receive further notifications for that alert.

Customizable Performance Reports

"As an independent contractor, I want to create customized performance reports so that I can analyze my financial data in a way that meets my specific needs and preferences."

Description

The Customizable Performance Reports requirement entails developing a reporting tool that allows users to generate customized financial reports based on selected metrics and timeframes. This feature will enable users to tailor their insights according to their specific needs, such as generating monthly budget variance reports or quarterly income summaries. By providing flexibility in report design and the option to export reports in various formats (e.g., PDF, Excel), the tool will enhance the usability and functionality of the performance insights feature. This will allow users to analyze their financial history in a way that aligns with their unique business objectives.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to generate a customizable monthly budget variance report by selecting specific metrics, including actual vs. budgeted expenses.

Given the user is on the Customizable Performance Reports page, when they select 'Monthly Budget Variance' from the report type dropdown and choose the relevant metrics, then they should see a generated report displaying the selected metrics accurately reflecting their input.

A user needs to export their quarterly income summary report in PDF format for their records.

Given the user has generated a quarterly income summary report, when they click the 'Export' button and select 'PDF' as the format, then the system should download the report in PDF format without errors.

User wants to generate a report for a specific past financial period to analyze trends over a quarterly timeframe.

Given the user selects a custom date range for the last quarter on the Customizable Performance Reports page, when they click on 'Generate Report', then the report should display data from that specific period only, showcasing the requested metrics clearly.

A small business owner is looking to create an income report that includes metrics for both product and service revenues over the past year.

Given the user is on the report creation page, when they select both 'Product Revenue' and 'Service Revenue' as metrics and set the timeframe to 'Last Year', then the generated report should include both metrics with accurate calculations.

A freelancer wants to modify an existing report to add additional metrics and adjust the display format.

Given the user has an existing report displayed, when they select additional metrics from the available options and change the display format from 'Table' to 'Graph,' then the report should refresh and reflect the new metrics and revised format accurately.

An independent contractor requires a report that shows monthly expenses categorized by type (e.g., Travel, Supplies).

Given the user selects 'Monthly Expenses by Category' from the report options, when they click 'Generate', then the resulting report should categorize expenses accurately and display totals for each category side by side for comparison.

A user wants to review a detailed report on their financial performance over the last six months to inform their business strategy going forward.

Given the user selects 'Last Six Months' as the time frame and clicks on 'Generate Detailed Report', then the system should display a comprehensive report that summarizes all financial activities, including revenues, expenses, and net profit, for the chosen period.

AI-Driven Financial Recommendations

"As a small business owner, I want my financial software to provide me with recommendations based on my past performance so that I can optimize my financial strategies and boost my profits."

Description

The AI-Driven Financial Recommendations requirement focuses on implementing an AI-based algorithm that analyzes users' financial data and provides personalized recommendations for improving financial strategies and optimizing resource allocation. This feature will process historical performance trends and suggest actionable steps, such as adjusting budget allocations or exploring new revenue streams. By offering tailored insights, this feature aims to empower users to enhance their financial decision-making, ultimately leading to better performance outcomes. This requirement is crucial for helping users leverage their financial data to drive strategic growth.

Acceptance Criteria

User views personalized financial recommendations on the Performance Insights dashboard after inputting historical financial data.

Given the user has entered their historical financial data, when they navigate to the Performance Insights dashboard, then they should see personalized financial recommendations tailored to their performance trends.

User receives actionable alerts for budget adjustment based on AI-driven analysis of their spending trends.

Given the user has ongoing financial activities, when the AI algorithm identifies that expenses exceed budget limits, then the user should receive an alert suggesting a budget adjustment.

User explores new revenue streams based on AI-generated insights from their financial history.

Given the user has utilized the AI-driven recommendation feature, when they access the revenue streams suggestions, then they should see at least three actionable recommendations based on their historical performance data.

User evaluates the effectiveness of AI-driven recommendations over a specified time period.

Given the user implements the AI-driven recommendations, when the user reviews their financial performance after one quarter, then they should observe at least a 10% improvement in their key financial metrics compared to the previous quarter.

User interacts with the AI feature to get real-time updates and recommendations during a financial review session.

Given the user is conducting a financial review session, when they request insights from the AI feature, then they should receive real-time recommendations based on the latest financial data.

User customizes the parameters of the AI-driven recommendations based on their business goals.

Given the user has specified their business goals in the settings, when they access the AI-driven recommendation feature, then the recommendations provided should align with their specified goals.

User accesses a summary of implemented recommendations and their outcomes after a financial period.

Given the user has applied several AI-driven recommendations, when they view the summary report at the end of the financial period, then they should see a comprehensive analysis of the implemented recommendations and their corresponding outcomes.

Integration with External Financial Tools

"As a freelancer, I want to connect my bank account to FundSweep so that I can see all my financial data in one place and simplify my financial management process."

Description

The Integration with External Financial Tools requirement focuses on creating APIs that allow FundSweep to connect with various external financial services such as bank accounts, payment processors, and accounting software. This feature will enable users to consolidate their financial data from multiple sources into one platform, providing a comprehensive view of their financial health. By ensuring real-time synchronization and data accuracy, users can make better-informed financial decisions based on all relevant information. This integration is vital for expanding the platform's utility and increasing user satisfaction through improved workflow efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

User successfully integrates their bank account with FundSweep.

Given the user navigates to the integration settings, when they select their bank and enter their credentials, then the system successfully connects to the bank and displays the account balance and recent transactions within FundSweep.

User imports financial data from external accounting software.

Given the user selects their accounting software from the integration menu, when they provide the necessary API key and permissions, then the system retrieves and displays the last three months of transaction data accurately in FundSweep.

User synchronizes their payment processor data with FundSweep.

Given the user has linked their payment processor account, when they click the 'Sync Data' button, then the system fetches the latest transactions and balances, updating the dashboard in real-time without errors.

User receives an error notification when integration fails.

Given any incorrect credentials or permissions during integration, when the user attempts to connect the external service, then the system shows an error message explaining the issue without allowing further integration attempts until corrected.

User views consolidated financial health metrics from multiple sources.

Given the user has connected their bank, payment processor, and accounting software, when they navigate to the performance insights dashboard, then the system displays a detailed overview of their income, expenses, and profits derived from all integrated sources.

User disconnects an external financial service from FundSweep.

Given the user decides to remove an integrated financial service, when they select the disconnect option and confirm the action, then the system removes all associated data and confirms the disconnection with a success message.

User configures data synchronization preferences for external integrations.

Given the user accesses the integration settings, when they set preferences for data synchronization frequency (e.g., daily, weekly), then the system adheres to their settings and performs synchronizations as specified without manual intervention.

Interactive Financial Scenarios

This feature allows users to simulate different financial scenarios using advanced modeling tools. By visualizing potential outcomes based on various decisions, users can make more strategic choices that align with their business goals.

Requirements

Scenario Selection Interface

"As a small business owner, I want to select different financial scenarios for analysis, so that I can understand potential outcomes and make better strategic decisions for my company."

Description

The Scenario Selection Interface allows users to choose from a variety of pre-defined or customizable financial scenarios to simulate their outcomes. By providing an easy-to-navigate interface, users can quickly access different scenarios based on their unique business situations, helping them understand the possible financial impacts of their decisions. This functionality enhances user engagement by making the tool more intuitive and accessible, thereby increasing the likelihood of informed financial decision-making. Ultimately, this requirement is aimed at simplifying the user's experience while enabling thorough exploration of potential outcomes.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Scenario Selection Interface to view available financial scenarios for their business needs.

Given a user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the Scenario Selection Interface, then they should see a list of at least five pre-defined financial scenarios presented clearly with descriptions.

User customizes a financial scenario to reflect their unique business situation.

Given a user is on the Scenario Selection Interface, when they select the option to create a custom scenario and input their specific financial parameters, then the system should save the scenario and confirm its creation with a success message.

User selects a financial scenario and initiates a simulation to view potential outcomes.

Given a user has chosen a specific financial scenario, when they click the 'Run Simulation' button, then the system should display the potential outcomes based on their selected scenario within 2 seconds.

User navigates away from the Scenario Selection Interface and returns to find their previous selections intact.

Given a user has selected multiple financial scenarios, when they log out and log back into FundSweep, then the Scenario Selection Interface should retain the previously selected scenarios without requiring re-selection.

User filters the available scenarios based on specific criteria, such as scenario type or business size.

Given a user is on the Scenario Selection Interface, when they apply a filter for scenario type (e.g., budget forecasting), then the interface should only display scenarios that match the selected filter criteria.

User utilizes help documentation to understand how to effectively use the Scenario Selection Interface.

Given a user is on the Scenario Selection Interface, when they click the 'Help' icon, then the system should display a contextual help guide that explains the features and functionalities of the interface clearly.

User provides feedback on the usability of the Scenario Selection Interface after usage.

Given a user has completed at least one simulation, when they click on the 'Feedback' option, then they should be able to submit a feedback form and receive a confirmation of their feedback submission.

Outcome Visualization Charts

"As a freelancer, I want to see the potential financial outcomes presented in charts, so that I can easily interpret the data and make informed decisions about my projects."

Description

The Outcome Visualization Charts enable users to visualize the results of their simulations in clear, interactive graphs and charts. These visualizations will present key metrics, allowing users to easily comprehend the implications of various financial strategies. By leveraging data visualization best practices, this requirement enhances user understanding of complex financial data, facilitating quicker decision-making and better strategic planning. The outcome charts will integrate seamlessly with the simulation engine to provide real-time feedback on user-selected scenarios, showcasing potential financial trajectories and aiding in risk assessment.

Acceptance Criteria

User interacts with the Outcome Visualization Charts after running multiple financial scenarios to understand potential outcomes and make informed decisions.

Given that the user has completed a financial simulation, when they access the Outcome Visualization Charts, then the charts must accurately reflect the data from the simulation and display key performance metrics in real-time.

User wants to switch between different financial scenarios to compare outcomes visually using the Outcome Visualization Charts.

Given that the user is on the Outcome Visualization Charts page, when they select a different financial scenario from the dropdown menu, then the charts must update seamlessly to display the new scenario’s outcomes without any delay.

User reviews the Outcome Visualization Charts to assess the potential financial trajectories for different strategies before making a business decision.

Given that the user views the Outcome Visualization Charts, when they hover over any part of the chart, then detailed tooltips must appear, providing additional information on the metrics associated with that data point.

User utilizes the Outcome Visualization Charts on a mobile device while on the go to evaluate financial decisions in real-time.

Given that the user accesses the Outcome Visualization Charts on a mobile device, when the user navigates to the chart page, then the charts must be fully responsive and maintain usability without losing critical functionality across devices.

User wants to print the Outcome Visualization Charts for offline review or presentation purposes.

Given that the user is viewing the Outcome Visualization Charts, when they select the print option, then a formatted PDF version of the charts must be generated, ensuring that all data is clearly presented and visually appealing.

User attempts to export the data from the Outcome Visualization Charts for further analysis or reporting.

Given that the user is on the Outcome Visualization Charts page, when they click on the export button, then a CSV file containing all relevant financial metrics must be downloaded without errors or data loss.

What-If Analysis Tool

"As an independent contractor, I want to modify scenario variables and see how different inputs affect the outcomes, so that I can identify the best financial strategy for my work."

Description

The What-If Analysis Tool allows users to modify variables and assumptions within the financial scenarios to explore the impact of their changes on potential outcomes. This feature is essential for users who want to test different strategies and gauge the risks and rewards associated with each decision before taking action. By providing real-time simulations based on the adjusted variables, users can develop a deeper understanding of financial dynamics essential for effective business management. This tool is a critical element of the interactive modeling functionality, fostering informed decision-making grounded in personalized data.

Acceptance Criteria

User modifies a sales forecast value to evaluate its impact on overall revenue using the What-If Analysis Tool.

Given the user has accessed the What-If Analysis Tool, when the user changes the sales forecast value, then the tool should update the projected revenue within 3 seconds and display the result on the dashboard.

User explores the impact of increasing expenses on net profit using the What-If Analysis Tool.

Given the user has adjusted an expense variable in the What-If Analysis Tool, when the user clicks on the 'simulate' button, then the tool should simulate changes in net profit and display updated figures accurately on the results page.

User utilizes the What-If Analysis Tool to compare multiple financial scenarios side by side.

Given the user has created at least two different scenarios, when the user selects the 'compare' option, then the system should display a visual comparison chart of key metrics between scenarios within 2 seconds.

User saves a modified financial scenario for later review and analysis using the What-If Analysis Tool.

Given the user has modified a scenario, when the user clicks the 'save' button, then the scenario should be saved successfully and retrievable from the user's scenario library with all modifications intact.

User accesses historical data to inform changes within the What-If Analysis Tool.

Given the user is utilizing the What-If Analysis Tool, when the user opts to view historical financial data, then the system should retrieve and display relevant data accurately without delay.

User receives instant feedback on the risk associated with a specific financial change in the What-If Analysis Tool.

Given the user has made a change to a financial variable, when the user clicks the 'risk assessment' button, then the system should analyze and present a risk assessment report summarizing potential risks within 5 seconds.

User triggers a notification for significant changes in projected outcomes due to adjustments made in the What-If Analysis Tool.

Given the user has made significant adjustments resulting in over a 10% change in projected outcomes, when the simulation is completed, then the user should receive a notification alerting them to the significant change.

User Feedback Mechanism

"As a user, I want to provide feedback on the financial scenarios and tools, so that I can help improve the overall usefulness and effectiveness of the FundSweep platform."

Description

The User Feedback Mechanism will allow users to provide insights and comments on the financial scenarios and their outcomes. This feedback will be vital for continuous improvement of the tool, enabling the development team to understand user needs and enhance the functionality accordingly. By integrating a user-friendly feedback collection system, such as surveys or rating systems, users can contribute their experiences and suggestions, fostering a community of engaged users while also guiding future updates and improvements to the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User submits feedback after simulating a financial scenario using the Interactive Financial Scenarios feature.

Given a user has completed a financial scenario simulation, when they select the 'Submit Feedback' option, then they should be presented with a user-friendly feedback form where they can rate their experience and provide additional comments.

User receives a confirmation notification after submitting their feedback.

Given a user has submitted their feedback through the feedback form, when the feedback is successfully recorded, then the user should receive a confirmation notification on the screen indicating their feedback has been received and appreciated.

Administrator reviews the aggregated feedback gathered from users.

Given that multiple users have submitted feedback over a period of time, when the administrator accesses the feedback reports section, then they should see a summary report reflecting ratings, common themes in comments, and suggestions for improvements.

User modifies their feedback on a previously submitted financial scenario.

Given a user has successfully submitted feedback, when they navigate back to the feedback section, then they should have the option to edit or modify their feedback before the feedback collection period closes.

System filters feedback based on the user's selected financial scenario.

Given a user has submitted feedback to the User Feedback Mechanism, when the administrator filters feedback by a specific financial scenario, then only the relevant feedback related to that scenario should be displayed accurately.

User engages with the feedback collection process through a rating system.

Given a user is presented with the feedback collection interface, when they select a rating (1 to 5 stars) for their experience, then that selection should be recorded accurately in the system to inform future updates.

Users receive insights based on the feedback trends collected.

Given a set of feedback has been collected, when the analysis is conducted, then insights derived from common user feedback trends should be generated and presented to the development team for actionable improvements.

Real-time Data Integration

"As a small business owner, I want my financial simulations to use real-time data, so that I can base my decisions on the most current information available and respond effectively to market changes."

Description

The Real-time Data Integration requirement ensures that the financial scenarios leverage live data to provide users with the most accurate simulations. By connecting to external financial data sources and APIs, users can access updated figures for their financial analysis. This feature is vital for ensuring the scenarios reflect true market conditions, enabling accurate forecasting and planning. As a result, users can make better decisions based on current data, reducing the risks associated with outdated information and fostering a more proactive approach to financial management.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Interactive Financial Scenarios feature and wants to simulate a financial scenario using live data from their bank account.

Given the user has linked their bank account to FundSweep, when they initiate a simulation, then the system should automatically fetch the latest transactions and balance.

A user wants to compare multiple financial scenarios using real-time data to make informed decisions.

Given the user has set up multiple scenarios, when they request a comparison, then the system should present a side-by-side analysis using the most current data from integrated sources.

The user needs to adjust their expense predictions based on real-time market fluctuations impacting their business.

Given the user has enabled real-time data updates, when market conditions change, then the system should provide immediate notifications of the impact on their financial scenarios.

User attempts to refresh the financial data for their simulations.

Given the user is in the Interactive Financial Scenarios feature, when they click on the refresh button, then the system should retrieve the latest available data from all connected sources within 5 seconds.

The user wants to ensure their financial scenario reflects the most current data before making a decision for investment.

Given the user is ready to finalize their decision, when they check for data updates, then the system must confirm that data has been refreshed within the last 15 minutes.

User manually inputs data for a financial simulation but wants to ensure it is accurate and up-to-date with market trends.

Given the user inputs manual data, when they save the simulation, then the system should validate input against real-time data trends and suggest adjustments if discrepancies are found.

The user needs to export their financial scenario results that include real-time data for a presentation.

Given the user requests to export their financial scenario, when the export is initiated, then the file must include all relevant real-time data used in the simulation and format it in a user-friendly manner.

Peer Comparison Insights

Peer Comparison Insights enables users to see how they stack up against similar businesses in their industry. By providing comparative analytics, this feature helps users identify competitive advantages and areas for efficacy improvements.

Requirements

Display Peer Benchmarking

"As a small business owner, I want to compare my financial metrics with those of similar businesses so that I can identify areas where I am doing well and where I need to improve."

Description

The 'Display Peer Benchmarking' requirement enables users of FundSweep to visually compare their financial metrics against those of similar businesses within their industry. This functionality involves creating an intuitive dashboard widget that presents key performance indicators (KPIs), including revenue, expense ratios, and profit margins side-by-side with peer averages. The implementation of this feature will offer users clear insights into their competitive standing, allowing them to quickly identify strengths and weaknesses. The peer comparison data will be sourced from industry benchmarks and updated in real-time to ensure users have access to the latest information. This feature will enhance decision-making by providing actionable insights, aiding users in strategic planning and resource allocation. By integrating seamlessly with the existing dashboard, users can effortlessly toggle between their data and peer data without additional navigation, creating a user-friendly experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User views the peer comparison dashboard on FundSweep's main interface.

Given the user is logged into FundSweep, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see a widget displaying their financial metrics alongside peer averages for KPIs such as revenue, expense ratios, and profit margins.

User interacts with the peer comparison dashboard to view specific metrics.

Given the user is on the peer comparison dashboard, when they select a specific KPI from the dropdown menu, then the widget should update to display their metric compared to the peer average for that selected KPI.

User checks for real-time updates in peer benchmarking data.

Given the user is viewing the peer comparison dashboard, when the peer benchmarking data is refreshed, then they should see updated financial metrics without needing to refresh the entire page.

User toggles between their financial data and peers' data on the dashboard widget.

Given the user is on the peer comparison dashboard, when they click on the toggle button, then the dashboard should switch between displaying their data and the peer averages seamlessly without additional navigation.

User compares their expense ratio with peers in their industry.

Given the user is on the peer comparison dashboard, when they view the expense ratio metric, then the display should show their current ratio alongside the average expense ratio of similar businesses in their industry.

User receives insights based on peer comparison data.

Given the user is viewing the peer comparison dashboard, when they check their metrics, then they should receive AI-generated insights and recommendations based on their performance compared to peers.

Data Filtering Options

"As a freelancer, I want to filter peer data by industry and region so that I can see comparisons that are directly relevant to my business."

Description

The 'Data Filtering Options' requirement allows users to tailor their peer comparison insights by selecting specific filters such as industry type, geographic location, or business size. This functionality is essential for providing relevant and meaningful comparison data tailored to each user's unique situation. Users can apply various filters to refine the results, ensuring that they are comparing their performance against the most comparable peers. The implementation of this feature involves developing a user-friendly interface that facilitates easy filter application and adjustment. By ensuring the relevance of comparison data, users will be empowered to make better-informed decisions based on contextual insights that reflect their specific business environment. This feature will enhance the overall user experience and increase engagement with the peer comparison insights.

Acceptance Criteria

User applies industry type filter to view comparative analytics specific to their sector.

Given a user is on the Peer Comparison Insights page, when they select an industry type from the filter dropdown, then only businesses from the selected industry should be displayed in the comparison results.

User selects geographic location filter to narrow down peer comparisons based on location.

Given the user is on the Peer Comparison Insights page, when they choose a geographic location from the filter options, then the comparison results should update to show only businesses located within the selected geographic area.

User applies multiple filters to see a more tailored view of peer comparisons.

Given a user has selected filters for industry type and business size, when they apply these filters, then the comparison results should reflect only those businesses that match both criteria simultaneously.

User interacts with the filtering options to adjust their peer comparison results in real time.

Given a user has selected a filter, when they change the value of that filter, then the comparison results should dynamically update to reflect the new filter criteria without needing to refresh the page.

User accesses help or tooltips for each filter option to understand their functionality.

Given a user hovers over a filter option, when they do so, then a tooltip should appear explaining the purpose of that filter and how it affects the comparison results.

User wants to reset all filters to view the complete peer comparison data.

Given a user has applied one or more filters, when they click the 'Reset Filters' button, then all filters should be cleared, and the user should see the original, unfiltered comparison results.

User wants to save specific filter selections for future comparisons.

Given a user has applied certain filters, when they choose to save these filters, then their preferences should be stored and available for easy access in future sessions.

Automated Insights Generation

"As a small business owner, I want automated insights about my performance compared to peers so that I can quickly understand where I stand and what I need to improve."

Description

The 'Automated Insights Generation' requirement leverages AI algorithms to analyze the peer comparison data and generate automated insights for users. This functionality will highlight key discrepancies and advantages, such as distinguishing areas where the user exceeds peer performance or falls short. By providing contextual analysis, this feature aims to guide users in understanding their comparative data more effectively. The implementation will entail developing machine learning models that recognize patterns in financial behaviors across similar businesses, thus delivering personalized recommendations based on real data. This requirement is crucial for enhancing the value of the peer comparison insights by transforming raw data into informative, actionable conclusions. This feature will also promote user engagement by delivering insights that feel personalized and relevant, fostering a deeper understanding of financial positioning.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives automated insights after uploading peer comparison data.

Given the user has uploaded their peer comparison data, When the system processes the data, Then the user should receive automated insights highlighting key discrepancies and advantages within 5 minutes.

User views the generated insights in their dashboard.

Given the automated insights have been generated, When the user accesses their dashboard, Then the insights should be displayed prominently with clear visual indicators of performance areas.

User interacts with the insights for further details.

Given the user is viewing the automated insights, When the user clicks on a specific insight, Then the system should provide a detailed contextual analysis supporting that insight, including relevant data points and comparisons.

User receives personalized recommendations based on generated insights.

Given the insights have identified areas for improvement, When the user reviews the recommendations, Then the system should provide at least three actionable steps that the user can take to enhance their performance relative to peers.

User shares insights with team members.

Given the user has successfully generated automated insights, When the user selects the share option, Then the system should allow the user to send a summary of insights via email or a shareable link.

User checks the accuracy of automated insights.

Given the user has access to their raw data, When the user compares the insights with their original data, Then the insights should accurately reflect the data analysis performed by the system, with a maximum deviation of 5% in any suggested performance metric.

User receives notifications for new insights published.

Given the user has opted into notifications, When new automated insights are generated, Then the user should receive an email or in-app notification detailing the updates and encouraging them to review their dashboard.

Peer Comparison Reports

"As an independent contractor, I want to create and share reports comparing my finances to my peers so that I can present my performance to potential clients."

Description

The 'Peer Comparison Reports' requirement enables users to generate and export comprehensive reports that detail their financial performance in comparison to peers. This functionality allows users to compile comparative data in a structured format, ideal for presentations or strategic planning sessions. The implementation involves developing reporting templates that automatically populate with the customized peer comparison data based on user-selected parameters and filters. Users will be able to generate reports that highlight key metrics, charts, and insights derived from the peer comparison analysis. This feature is vital for users who need to present their financial standings to stakeholders or utilize the data for decision-making purposes. By providing an easy way to generate professional reports, this requirement enhances the overall functionality of the FundSweep platform and adds significant value to users' financial management processes.

Acceptance Criteria

User generates a Peer Comparison Report for presenting to stakeholders after a quarterly review.

Given a user selects their desired peers and filters (e.g., financial metrics, industry type) for comparison, When they click the 'Generate Report' button, Then the system should produce a downloadable report in a structured format (PDF, Excel) that includes key financial metrics, graphs, and comparative analytics against selected peers.

User customizes the report parameters to view specific data points before generating the report.

Given a user has chosen specific criteria such as monetary thresholds or performance metrics in the report settings, When they finalize their selections and click 'Generate Report', Then the report should reflect only the selected parameters and generate an error message if no data matches the filters applied.

User exports a generated report to share with their team via email.

Given a user has successfully generated a Peer Comparison Report, When they select the 'Email Report' option, Then the system should prompt for email addresses, and upon confirmation, the report must be sent successfully to the specified email addresses with a confirmation message displayed to the user.

User views a summary of the report generation process including time taken and any errors encountered.

Given a user has initiated the report generation process, When the report is generated, Then the system must display a summary screen indicating the time taken, status (success or error), and details of the issues encountered if any errors occurred.

User accesses a previously generated Peer Comparison Report from their account dashboard.

Given a user has generated Peer Comparison Reports in the past, When they navigate to their account dashboard and select the 'Previous Reports' section, Then they should be able to view and download all previously generated reports along with the date of generation.

Real-time Data Synchronization

"As a small business owner, I want my peer comparison insights to update in real-time so that I can always rely on the most current data for my decision-making."

Description

The 'Real-time Data Synchronization' requirement ensures that the peer comparison insights remain up-to-date by synchronizing with the latest financial data in FundSweep. This functionality will automatically refresh comparison data and analytics in real-time, as users enter and update their financial information. Implementing this feature involves creating a robust backend service that monitors and syncs data changes instantaneously, ensuring that users always access the most current insights. The significance of this requirement lies in providing users with a reliable tool that reflects their real-time financial position relative to their peers, thus facilitating timely and informed decision-making. This ongoing synchronization is essential for maintaining the integrity and usability of the peer comparison feature, particularly as businesses grow and fluctuate over time.

Acceptance Criteria

User enters new financial data into FundSweep and expects peer comparison insights to refresh automatically to reflect this new data without manual intervention.

Given the user enters new financial data into the system, when the data is saved, then the peer comparison insights must update and reflect the changes within 5 seconds.

A user updates their existing financial information and checks the peer comparison insights to see the immediate effects of the changes made.

Given the user updates financial information, when the update is processed, then the peer comparison insights should display updated comparative analytics within 3 seconds.

A user wants to review peer comparison insights while multiple updates are being made to their financial records concurrently.

Given the user is updating multiple financial records at the same time, when the updates are completed, then all peer comparison insights should refresh to show the most current data accurately and consistently without data loss or errors.

A user logs into FundSweep after making financial updates from a different device and examines if their peer comparison insights are showing the latest data.

Given the user has synchronized FundSweep data from a different device, when they log in, then the peer comparison insights should reflect the latest data synced from all devices within 2 seconds.

A user tests the system's response time for the real-time synchronization feature while competing peer comparison insights are being accessed.

Given the user is actively using the peer comparison feature, when they trigger a refresh, then the loading time for the updated analytics must be under 3 seconds, ensuring a seamless user experience.

A user runs into issues where the peer comparison insights did not update after entering financial changes and needs assistance.

Given a user reports an issue where peer comparison insights did not update, when the backend service is checked, then the logs should show that data synchronization triggers were successful or document any failures.

Product Details

Vision & Mission

Problem & Solution

Details & Audience

User Personas

Cynthia the Caregiver

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Mark the Marketing Maven

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Lisa the Aspiring Entrepreneur

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Emma the Efficiency Expert

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Steve the Startup Strategist

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Product Features

Tag It, Track It

Requirements

Dynamic Tag Suggestions

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Batch Tagging Functionality

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Custom Tag Creation

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Tag Filtering Options

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Tag Management Interface

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Tag Analytics Reporting

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Intelligent Spend Analysis

Requirements

Automated Spending Insights

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Trend Visualization Dashboard

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Budget Adjustment Recommendations

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Spending Alerts and Notifications

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Multi-Currency Support Analytics

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Auto-Tailored Budget Adjustments